DESIGN OF REINFORCED

CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Second Edition Volume 2

Mashhour Ghoneim Mahmoud El-Mihilmy

Professor of Associate Professor of
Concrete Structures Concrete Structures
Cairo University Cairo University
 DESIGN OF REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Prof. Mashhour Ghoneim Dr. Mahmoud El-Mihilmy

Features
Good theoretical background for each topic with code provisions.
Numerous illustrations and figures for each topic.
Reflects the very latest Egyptian Code provisions (ECP 203-2007)
and includes all major changes and additions.
Extensive examples in each chapter on design and analysis of
reinforced concrete structures utilizing SI units.
All examples are worked out step by step ranging from simple to
advanced.
Full reinforcement details for every example.
Numerous design charts covering a wide range of cross sectional
shapes and straining actions.

This volume covers the following topics

Solid Slabs
Hollow Blocks
Paneled Beams
Flat Slabs
Stairs
Short Columns
Eccentric Sections
Slender Columns
R/C Frames

V olum e 2
DESIGN OF REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Volume 2

Mashhour Ahmed Ghoneim

Professor of Concrete Structures
Cairo University

Mahmoud Tharwat El-Mihilmy

Associate Professor of Concrete Structures
Cairo University

Second Edition
2008
 PREFACE
Teaching reinforced concrete design, carrying out research relevant to the behavior of
reinforced concrete members, as well as designing concrete structures motivated the
preparation of this book. The basic objective of this book is to furnish the reader with
the basic understanding of the mechanics and design of reinforced concrete. The
contents of the book conform to the latest edition of the Egyptian Code for the Design
and Construction of Concrete Structures ECP-203. The authors strongly recommend
that the Code be utilized as a companion publication to this book.

The book is aimed at two different groups. First,, by treating the material in a logical
and unified form, it is hoped that it can serve as a useful text for undergraduate and
graduate student courses on reinforced concrete. Secondly, as a result of the continuing
activity in the design and construction of reinforced concrete structures, it will be of
value to practicing structural engineers.

Numerous illustrative examples are given, the solution o f which has been supplied so
as to supplement the theoretical background and to familiarize the reader with the
steps involved in actual design problem solving.

In writing the book, the authors are conscious of a debt to many sources, to friends,
colleagues, and co-workers in the field. Finally, this is as good a place as any for the
authors to express their indebtedness to their honorable professors of Egypt, Canada
and the U.S.A. Their contributions in introducing the authors to the field will always
be remembered with the deepest gratitude.

This volume contains the following chapters

• Solid slabs
• Hollow block slabs
• Paneled beams
• Flat slabs
• Reinforced concrete stairs
• Short columns
• Eccentric sections
• Slender columns
• Reinforced concrete Frames
It also includes appendices containing design aids.
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SOLID SLABS

1.1 Introduction........................................................................................................... 1
1.2 One-Way Solid Slabs................................ ........................................................... 2
1.2.1 Definition................................. ....................................................................2
1.2.2 Structural Behavior................................................... ................................... 3
1.2.3 Effective Span.............................................................................................. 4
1.2.4 Minimum Thickness..................................................................................... 5
1.2.5 Bending moments......................................................................................... 6
Example 1.1........................................................................................................... 8
1.3 Two-Way Slabs.................................................................................................... 13
1.3.1 Definition..................................................................................................... 13
1.3.2 Elastic Analysis of Plates.............................................................................13
1.3.3 Load Distribution Factors According to ECP 203 ...................................... 16
1.3.4 Minimum Thickness..................................................................................... 18
1.3.5 Related Code Provisions............................................................................... 19
1.3.6 Comer Reinforcement.................................................................................. 21
Example 1.2........................................................................................................... 22

2. HOLLOW BLOCK SLABS

2.1 Introduction..... .............................................................................................................29

2.2 One-Way Hollow Block Slabs..................................................................................... 31
2.2.1 General..... .................................................................................................... 31
2.2.2 Arrangement of blocks.................................................................................32
2.2.3 Code Provisions................................................................................ ...........35
2.2.4 Design of One-way Hollow Block Slabs.....................................................36
2.2.4.1 Design of Ribs................................................................................. 36
2.2.4.2 Design of Hidden Beams................................................................. 38
Example 2.1........................................................................................................... 40
2.3 Two-Way Hollow Block Slabs............................................... ............................... .....51
2.3.1 Method o f Analysis......................... ..................................... .......................53
2.3.2 Design of two-way hollow slabs with projected beams..............................53
2.3.2.1 Design of ribs............................................. -.................................... 53
2.3.2.2 Design of Projected beams..................................... ..........................54
Example 2.2...........................................................................................................58
3. PANELED BEAMS

3.1 Introduction........................................................................ ................................... ......70

3.2 Load Distribution..............................................................£ ........................................ 72
3.3 Code Provisions.................................................................................................... .......75
3.4 Simplified Design Method........................................................................................... 76
3.5 Design of Skew Paneled Beams...................................................................................81
Example 3.1................................................................................................ ..........82

4. FLAT SLABS

4.1 Introduction.............................................................................. ................................... 102

4.2 Statical Equilibrium of Flat Slabs....... ........................................................................104
4.3 Minimum Dimensions According to ECP 203............................................................105
4.4 Analysis of Flat Slabs......................................................... ........................................ 108
4.5 Direct Design Method.................................................................................................. 108
4.5.1 Limitation of the direct method................................................................... 108
4.5.2 Definition o f column strip and field strip................................................... 108
4.5.3 Calculation of slab load................................................................................108
4.5.4 Statical Moment Mo.................................................... ................................ 110
4.5.5 Distribution o f the Statical Moment.... ,...................................................... 111
4.5.6 Moment Correction......................................................................................114
4.5.7 Provision for Pattern Loading....... ................................ .............................115
4.5.8 Design Steps According to the Direct Design Method..............................115
4.6 Reinforcement of Flat Slabs.........................................................................................116
4.6.1 General......................................................................................................... 116
4.6.2 Column Head Reinforcement........................................^.............................120
4.6.3 Reinforcement at Openings in Flat Slabs................................................... 121
4.7 Punching Shear Strength of Flat Slabs................................ ....................................... 122
4.7.1 General......................................................... .....................:..........................122
4.7.2 Critical Sections........................................................................................... 123
4.7.3 Concrete Punching Shear Strength.............................................................. 125
4.7.4 Detailed Analysis.........................................................................................126
4.7.4.1 Introduction......................................................................................126
4.7.4.2 Calculations of the Punching Stresses............................................. 126
4.7.5 Simplified Method.......................................................................................131
4.8 One-Way Shear Strength............................................................................................. 133
Example 4.1...........................................................................................................134
Example 4.2................................................... .......................................................147
Example 4.3....... .......................................... ........................................................ 162
Example 4 .4..... ......................................................................................... ...........163
4.9 The Equivalent Frame Method.....................................................................................165
4.9.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 165
4.9.2 Structural Analysis............................................................... ........................165
Example 4.5........................................................................................................... 170
4.10 Computer Model of Flat Slabs.......... ;.......................................................................172

iii
5. REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRS

5.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................174
5.2 Structural Systems of Stairs..........................................................................................177
5.2 Cantilever T ype.............................................................................................................178
Example 5.1............................................................................................................181
5.3 Slab Type ...................................................................................................................194
Example 5.2............................................................................................................198
Example 5.3.......................................... ................................................................ 207

6. SHORT COLUMNS SUBJECTED TO CONCENTRIC

COMPRESSION

6.1 Introduction................................................................................................................... 223

6.2 Axially Loaded Tied Columns.....................................................................................224
6.2.1 Behavior and Strength.................................................................................. 224
6.2.2 Code Provisions for Tied Columns............................................................. 226
6.2.3 Splicing of Vertical Reinforcement............................................................. 229
Example 6.1............................................................................................................232
Example 6.2............................................................................................................234
6.3 Axially Loaded Spiral Columns................................................................................... 235
6.3.1 Behavior and Strength...................................................................................235
6.3.2 Minimum Spiral Reinforcement.................................................................. 237
6.3.3 Code Provisions for Spiral Columns........................................................... 239
Example 6.3.......................................................................................... ................. 241
Example 6.4............................................................................................................243
6.4 Design of Composite Columns............................................ ........................................245
6.4.1 Design Guidelines.... ....................................................................................245
Example 6.5.......................................................................... ................................. 252
Example 6.6............................................................................................................254
Example 6.7................................. ........... ...............................................................257
6.5 Calculation of Axial Loads on Columns......................................................................259
6.5.1 Area Method........................................... ............................................... ......259
6.5.2 Reaction Method...........................................................................................261

7. DESIGN OF SECTIONS SUBJECTED TO ECCENTRIC

FORCES

7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................... 262

7.2 Interaction Diagrams..................................................................................................... 264
7.2.1 Definition......................................................................................................264
7.2.2 Modes o f Failure............................................................................... ...........265
7.2.3 Development of the Interaction Diagram..................................................... 267

iv
 7.2.4 Plastic Centroid.............................................................................................270
Example 7.1.......................... ................................................................................ 271
Example 7. 2 .......................................................................................................... 273
Example 7.3............................................................................. ................. ...........274
7.3 Sections Subject to Eccentric Compression Forces.................................... ................281
7.3.1 Design Using Interaction Diagrams................................................ :...........282
Example 7.4..... .....................................................................................................286
7.3.2 Design Using MUS Approach.............................................. .................... . 288
Example 7.5........................................................................................................... 292
7.3.3 Design Curves For Eccentric Sections.........................................................294
Example 7.6................................................................ ...........................................296
7.4 Sections Subjected to Eccentric Tension Forces............. ................................. ..........299
7.4.1 Sections Subject to Small Eccentric Tension Forces..................... ............ 300
Example 7.7........................................................................................................... 301
7.4.2 Sections Subjected to Big Eccentric Tension Forces................................. 303
Example 7.8.... ...................................................................................................... 304
7.5 T-Sections Subjected To Eccentric Forces.................................................................. 305
Example 7.9.......................................................................................................... .306
Example 7.10......................................................................................................... 308
Example 7.11...................................^................. ................................................... 310
7.6 Analysis of Irregular Sections...................................................................................... 312
7.6.1 General.......................................................................................................... 312
7.6.2 Strength of Shear Walls................................................................................ 313
Example 7.12......................................................................................................... 315
7.7 Interaction Diagrams For Circular Columns............................................................... 320
Example 7.13.........................................................................................................323
Example 7.14......................................................................................................... 325
Example 7.15......................................................................................................... 327
7.8 Interaction Diagrams For Box Sections.......................................................................329
Example 7.16......................................................................................................... 331
7.9 Columns Subjected to Biaxial Bending........................................................................334
7.9.1 General.......................................................................................................... 334
7.9.2 Exact Analysis of Biaxial Bending.............................................................. 335
7.9.3 Minimum Eccentricity for Biaxially Loaded Columns...............................343
Example 7.17..... ................................................................................................... 344
7.9.4 Biaxial Interaction Diagrams........................................................................345
7.9.5 The use of Biaxial Interaction Diagrams.....................................................345
Example 7.18......................................................................................................... 347
7.9.6 ECP-203 Design Procedure for Biaxial Bending.........................................349
Example 7.19......................... ......................................... ..................................... 353
7.9.7 Biaxial Bending in Urtsymmetrically Reinforced Sections........................ 355
Example 7.20............................................. ...........................................................359
7.9.8 Circular Columns under Biaxial Bending................................................... 362
Example 7.21......................................................................................................... 363
7.9.9 Interaction Diagrams for L-Sections.... ....................................................... 365

v
8. SLENDER COLUMNS

8.1 Definition of Slender Columns....................................................................................369

8.2 Classification of Buildings.................................................. ........................................ 372
8.3 Braced and Unbraced Columns................................ ...................................................375
8.4 Slenderness Considerations in the Egyptian Code...................................................... 376
8.4.1 Code Definition of Slender Columns..........................................................376
8.4.2 Unsupported Height of a Compression Member (Ho)................................377
8.4.3 Effective Height of a Compression Member (He)......................................378
8.5 Design Moments in Slender Braced Columns............................................................ 383
8.5.1 Calculation of the Additional Moments.......................................................383
8.5.2 Design Moments..........................................................................................384
8.6 Design Moments in Unbraced Slender Columns.........................................................387
8.6.1 Additional moment..... ............................................................................... 387
8.6.2 Design moments........................................................................................... 387
Example 8.1...........................................................................................................391
Example 8.2.............................................................................:.............................395
Example 8.3...........................................................................................................398
Example 8.4...........................................................................................................403
Example 8.5...........................................................................................................408
Example 8.6........................ .................................................................................. 412

9. REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMES

9.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................419
9.2 Definition of the Frame................................................................................................ 420
9.3 The Choice o f the Type of the Frame.......................................................................... 422
9.4 Layout of a Hall Supported by R/C Frames............................................... ................ 425
9.5 Reinforcement Detailing of Rigid Frames................................................................... 427
9.6 Hinged Bearings...........................................................................................................434
Example 9.1........................................................................................................... 436
Example 9.2...........................................................................................................450

APPENDICES

Appendix A Design Charts for Sections Subjected to Flexure........................................465

Appendix B Interaction Diagrams Top and bottom steel....................... .........................473
Appendix C Interaction Diagrams Uniform steel............................ ................................522
Appendix D Design Charts for Sections Subjected to Eccentric Forces......................... 535
Appendix E Interaction Diagrams for Circular Sections............................................ :.... 560
Appendix F Interaction Diagrams for Hollow Circular Sections....................................573
Appendix G Interaction Diagrams for Box Sections.......................... .............................581
Appendix H Interaction Diagrams for Biaxialiy Loaded Sections..................................586
Appendix I Interaction Diagrams for L-Sections............................................................615

vi
 1
SOLID SLABS

Photo 1.1 Burj Dubai during construction (2007)

1.1 In trodu ction

Reinforced concrete solid slabs are used in floors, roofs and as decks of bridges as
shown in Photo 1.1. Slabs may span in one direction or in two directions depending on
the slab dimensions and the surrounding supporting elements. Slabs spanning in one
direction are referred to as one-way slabs while those spanning in two directions are
referred to as two-way slabs.

1
1.2 One-W ay S o lid S la b s
1.2.1 Definition
One-way solid slabs are extensively used in buildings, especially for spans less than 4
meters. To be classified as a one-way slab, the ratio of the long side to the short side
of the slab panel must exceed 2. They are referred to as one-way slabs because the
bending is mainly in the short direction. Typically, a lm wide strip of the slab is
analyzed and the reinforcement required for this strip is used in all parts of the slab.

cantilever slabs main direction

Fig. 1.1 One-way slabs

2
 .
1 2.2 Structural Behavior
The direction in which the slab bends is called the main direction as shown in Fig 1.1.
The main reinforcement is placed in this direction as illustrated in Fig. 1.2.
For a one-way slab supported on four beams like the one shown in Fig. 1.2, the strip
near the middle acts as a one-way slab. However, at the slab parts near the edges,
some of the load is transferred in the longitudinal direction producing a two-way slab
action. Thus, top reinforcement should be added on each' side of the girder to account
for this action. If this reinforcement is ignored, wide cracks may develop on the top of
the slab along edges (A-B) and (A'-B')

Secondary reinforcement
Main reinforcement direction

Fig. 1.2 Structural action of one-way slabs

The load transferred to the perpendicular direction is almost equal to zero except near
the edge beams (Beams AB and A'Br). Thus, a secondary mesh is required in this
direction (as shown in Figs. 1.2 and 1.3) to carry this small portion and to keep the
main reinforcement in place. Also, the secondary reinforcement is placed to control
cracks produced by shrinkage or temperature changes and to help in distributing
concentrated loads transversely.

3
 a- Simply supported b- Continuous

Fig. 1.3 One-way slabs supported on two sides

It should be noted that if a slab panel is supported only on two sides, it would act as
one-way slab regardless of the ratio of the long side to the short side. Figures 1.3.a and
1.3.b show examples of slabs act as one way because of having supporting beams on
two sides only.

1.2.3 Effective Span

The effective span (LeJ) for solid slabs is given by the following equation

max of
L - = min o f 1.05 x Lclcar for simple or continuous slabs ...................... (1.1)
CL to CL (L)

Lett = min o f for cantilever slabs . ( 1.2 )

edge to CL (L)

- 'c l e a r
L c le a r

Continuous span Cantilever span

Fig. 1.4 Effective spans for solid slabs

1.2.4 Minimum Thickness
The depth of solid slabs is usually controlled by deflection rather than flexural
strength requirements. The ECP-203 gives the minimum thickness for one-way slabs
reinforced with high grade steel in which the deflection calculations can be ignored as
listed in Table 1.1.

Table 1.1 (Ln/t)* ratios for members spanning less than 10 meters or cantilevers
spanning less than 2m (£=400 N/mm2). (Deflection calculations can be ignored)

Simply One end Two ends Cantilever

Element
supported continuous continuous
Solid slabs 25 30 36 10
Hidden Beams
20 25 28 8
and hollow blocks

*Ln is the clear span.

The values listed in Table (1.1) are valid when using high grade steel 400/600. In the
case of using other types of reinforcing steel, the values mentioned in Table 1.1 should
be divided by factor t,, given by:

£ = 0 .4 0 + ^ - ..... •................................................. .(1.2)

650
Where f y is the yield strength of reinforcing steel in N/mm2.

The code also provides an absolute minimum thickness for one-way slabs

L I 30 simple span
t mm.. = L ! 35 continuous from one end ......................... (1.3)
L ! 40 continuous from two ends
where L is the effective span

In addition, the absolute minimum thickness should not be less than 80 mm for slabs
subjected to static loads and 120 mm for slabs subjected to dynamic loads. The
aforementioned thickness can be reduced in case of prefabricated slabs. To satisfy
serviceability requirements for corrosion and fire protection, the concrete cover should
not be less than 20mm.

5
1.2.5 Bending moments
The exact solution for determining the bending moment distribution of solid slabs is
complicated. In the case of equal spans with a maximum difference of 20% with equal
uniform loads and the live loads are less than the dead loads (p<g), the Egyptian Code
gives the following values:
For slabs with two spans
w u = \A {yc x ts +flooring)+ \.6w LL

The value of the factor k is given in Fig. 1.5.

24 24

mh
10 10

Fig. 1.5 k-factor for continuous slabs with two spans

For slabs with three spans or more

w ux L 2.,
= —12----

The value of the factor k is given in Fig. 1.6.

10 12

10 12 12

Fig. 1.6 k-factor for continuous slabs with three spans or more

In the case of unequal continuous one-way slabs, the bending moment can be obtained
using classical structural analysis or computer programs. In this case, the negative
bending moment over supports can be reduced according to a parabolic distribution by
Mj/2, where Mi is the difference between the bending at the centerline and that at the
support face as shown in Fig. 1.7.

6
The structural analysis of the slabs shown in Fig. 1.8 may lead to a negative moment
at midspan of the interior bay. However, the Egyptian Code requires that a minimum
positive bending moment at any span should not be less than wu L2/16 as shown in
Fig. 1.8.

HW WuR
>11 a ;i i 11 ,e \ q : i i
A dm Mf,

Lr

Fig. 1.8 Minimum positive bending moments in one way slabs

In case of slabs subjected to heavy live loads, the sections at midspan should be
designed to withstand a negative bending moments in addition to a positive bending
moment. The negative moment at midspan equals

I*
.(1.4)
24
where g is the dead loads, p is the live loads, and L is the effective span

7
Example 1.1
Compute and draw the reinforcement details for the reinforced concrete floor shown
in the figure below. The floor is to be designed to carry a live load of 3 kN/m2 and a
flooring material o f 1.5 kN/m2 using concrete strength of 30 N/mm2 and yield strength
of steel o f400 N/mm2. Consider the width of all beams to be 250 mm.

k-. . •.
---------------- _ : .zu L- - ...- — — . . -*j . . . .

1 1 ..................... !
i

i
i
i
i
i
i
i O
i c-*
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
!
I - . ■: , , . . : .... . . . . . . .
\
i
! 3.0 3.0 3.0
i
F lo o r p la n

Solution
Step 1: Estimate the thickness of the slab
The plan consists of one way slabs. Assume that the slab thickness ts is 120 mm for all
slabs in the floor and will be checked as follows.
For one way slab, the minimum thickness is given by
L I 30 simple span
?mjn=-(L/35 continuous from one end
L I 40 continuous from two ends
Slabs Si and S3 are one way slabs continuous from one end thus
 3.0x1000
'mm 35 : :86 mm (< ts....o.k)
35
Also for deflection calculations may be ignored if the thickness is greater than the
values listed in Table 1.1. For the solid slab panel that is continuous from one side
with./J,=400 N/mm2
(3.0 - 0.25) x 1000
91.61 mm < ts (Deflection calculation is not necessary)
30 30

— ~ ^
0

o
L,;=2.75 m r~-

w=l 1.1 kN/m' w=l 1.1 kN/m' w=l 1.1 kN/m'

© © ‘ '

3.0 3.0 3.0

Step 2: Calculate the effective span

Since the width of all beams is 250 nun, the clear span is equal to
=L-0.25
L c le a r

where L is the centerline to centerline distance

For the interior panel, the effective span is equal to

max of
Leff =min [1.05xirfair
CL —> CL
f / ( 3 - 0 . 2 5 ) -+ 0.12 = 2.87 m
= m i n | m a x ° | l . 0 5 x ( 3 - 0 . 2 5 ) = 2 .8 9 m
3 m

Lejj= 2.89 m

9
Step 3: Calculate the Loads
g s = slab weight +flooring =Yc x ts +flooring = 25x 0.12 + 1.5 = 4.5kN / m 2
ps = Live loads =3kN/m2
=1.4 gs +1.6 ps
Wu = 1.4x4.5+1.6x3 = 11.10 kN tm 2
Taking a strip width of lm (b=1000 mm), the load acting on this strip is equal to
Wsu =w „xl = 11.10/W/m'
Load transferred in x-direction =11.1 kN/m2 (main direction)
Load transferred in y-direction = 0 (secondary direction)

Step 4: Bending Moments

Since the slab is continuous with equal spans and equal loading, the bending moments
can be obtained using code coefficients as follows
W„ X Li
=-

Wu/rib=ll-lO kN/m'
Loading ltnil.ll.il t.U t.LLL t U_u
imr mrnrr mnnr
■2.89- 2.89 -------- 4 - ---------2.89----------- -1

-24 -10 -10 -24

Moment
factor +10
mu
^ +12 +10
Mb

9.25 9.25
3.86
Bending
moments
(kN.m)
9.25 7.71 9.25

Critical
sections
© ©

10
Step 5: Design of reinforcement
Assuming concrete cover of 20 mm
d= 120-20 =100 mm

A, = — x b x d = — xl000xl00 = 150mm2
fy 400

Design of Section 1
M_ve= 9.25 kN.m, using the design aids namely R-co curve

R= = — 9 '2 5 x l - -------= 0.0308

f aib d 2 30xl000xl002
From the curve, co=0.037
f 30
A, =a> f^
ls --b
b x d = 0.037 ~
— x 1000x100 = 276 mm2 >As,min
fy 400
use (2.5 O 10 + 2.5 <t> 8/m') ASiChosen=322 mm2

Design of Section 2
M+Vc=7.71 kN.m, and using R-co curve

R=
■- — 7-7---— — - = 0.0257
f mb d 2 30x1000x100
From the curve, co=0.030
f 30
A - co -^-b x d =0.030-----xlOOOxlOO = 229 m m 2 >Asmjn
fy 400

use (5 ® 8/m ') As,chosen=250 mm2

Because the slabs are one-way in the x-direction, the moment in the y-direction equals
to zero. However, a secondary reinforcement mesh with cross sectional area of at least
25% of the main steel should be provided.
Use (5 <D>8 /m').

11
Photo 1.2 Cantilever solid slab in a hotel building.

12
1.3 Tw o-W ay S la b s
1.3.1 Definition
To classify a slab as a two-way slab, the length of the long side should be less than
twice the length of the short side. The short direction is considered the main direction
because most o f the load is transferred in this direction. The main reinforcement is
arranged in the short direction and the secondary reinforcement is arranged in the long
direction. Two-way slabs are those that bend in double curvature as shown in Fig. 1.9,
and thus require steel reinforcement in two directions to prevent excessive cracking
and to limit deflections. The reinforcement is normally positioned parallel to the side
of the slab in both directions. The position of the reinforcement is determined by the
curvature of the slab. The top steel is placed in the negative curvature areas and the
bottom steel in the positive curvature areas.

1.3.2 E la stic Analysis o f Plates

Textbooks dealing with the theory of elasticity such as the one by Timoshenko and
Krieger contain exact solutions for two-way slabs. The fundamental assumption used
in the analysis of plates under pure bending is that the deflection of the plate ( z ) is
small in comparison to its thickness t. The basic differential equation for the uniformly
loaded-simply supported rectangular plate shown in Fig. 1.10 is given by
3 4z S 'z dAz w
----—4- 2 --- ------ -H------ ——
ftt4 dx dy dy4 D

where z is the deflection of the plate, w is the uniform load and D is the flexural
rigidity of the plate (similar to El in beams) and is given by
E—
t 3v
D =- - .......................................................... (1.6)
12(1 —v )

13
where E is the modulus of elasticity of the plate, t is the plate thickness and v is
Poisson's ratio.

y1ft 7i
o y/ \
X

a
y

Fig. 1.10 Elastic analysis of plates

Solving the previous differential equation gives the deflection of the plate. The
solution must satisfy the conditions at the boundaries of the plate. For example, for a
simply supported plate the deflection z along the edges must equal to zero (z=0 and
Mx=0 @ x=0 and x=a). Levy presents one of the famous solutions for this problem in
1899 in the form of a series of sin curves as follows:

(1.7)

where Ymis function of y only and determined to satisfy the boundary condition.
Having determined the deflection equation, the developed bending moments in the
plate can be obtained using the following relations:

( 1.8)

M y = -D (1.9)

l-v) (1.10)
dx dy

14
 where 32z/3x2 is the curvature o f the slab in x direction, and 52z/5y2 is the curvature in
y direction. A positive curvature corresponds to a curve that is concave downwards.
The magnitude o f the moment is proportional to curvature. Equation 1.5 can be
written in the following form:

■ ;................................... .( l i d
dx dx dy dy

This form indicates that in plates the load w results in:

• Bending moments in strips running in the x-direction (Mx)
• Bending moments in strips running in the y-direction (My)
• Torsional moments (M_v )

15
1.3.3 Load Distribution Factors According to ECP 203
As has been shown in 1.3.2, the exact analysis of two-way slabs is complicated and
involves many mathematical computations. However, for simplicity a strip of 1.0 m
width can be analyzed in each direction as a wide beam. The bending moments
resulting from the analysis of such a strip is quite different from those obtained using
the exact plate analysis mentioned in section 1.3.2. This is attributed to the disregard
of the torsional moment represented by the term 52z/3x5y. For example, for a
uniformly loaded-simply supported square slab, the load transferred in x direction
equals the load transferred in y direction (=w/2). Thus, the maximum bending
moments developed in a strip of 1.0 m width of the slab is equal

M max J w l 28^ \ 0. 5 x g ^ ..................................... (1.12)

However, according to the theory of plates the maximum bending for square plate
(v=0.2, Poisson's ratio for concrete) is only equal to

^ max^= 0 .0 4 4 w « 2 = 0 . 3 5 x ^ ................................(1.13)

The difference is quite large (%30) and attributed to the torsional moments developed
in the plate. As the rectangularity ratio increases the load transferred in the short
direction increases and the load transferred in the long direction decreases. The
theoretical analysis of the plates is the basis of the values adopted in the Egyptian
code in which the bending moment of a simply supported slab equals

M „= °^a (short direction)

............:................. (1.14)
(w J3)b2 ,. . .
M b = - — —— (long direction)
8
where a and p represent the percentage of loads causing bending moments in each
direction.
Comparing Eq. 1.13 to Eq. 1.14 gives a=0.35 for square plates, which is identical to
the value adopted by the Egyptian code. Table 1.2 shows the ECP 203 values for a
and p for different plate rectangularity ratios. The slab load w„ transferred in the short
direction is denoted as w0 and the load transferred in the longitudinal direction is
denoted as wp as shown in Fig. 1.11, where

w a = a -w u ...................................................... (1.15.a)

w fi =/3-wu ....................... .......................... ...,(1.15.b)

The distribution factors a and p can be also represented by following set of equations

16
 a = -— 0.15
2 ,(1.16.a)

.(1.16.b)

in which r is the rectangularity ratio given by Eq. 1.17

(1 m J

lm . . x

Fig. 1.11 Load distribution for two-way slabs

Table 1.2 Values of a and |3 for solid slab with live loads less than 5 kN/m2
r 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2
a 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85

P 0.35 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08

The load transferred in each direction is affected by the continuity condition of the
adjacent slabs. This was taken into consideration when determining the rectangularity
ratio of slabs by using the coefficient m. The value of m depends on the support
condition and is defined as the ratio between the two inflection points to the effective
span. This coefficient is applied in each direction (a, b) to determine the effective
rectangularity ratio r as follows

mb xb
r= .(1.17)
m „ xa
where
1.0 simple span
m„ or m, = 0.87 continuous from one end .(1.18)
0.76 continuousfrom two ends

17
The use of the values listed in Table 1.2 is limited to slabs with live loads not more
than 5 kN/m2. If the live loads exceed this limit, the value of a and (3 should be taken
from Table 2.4 in which the torsional moment is neglected.

Two-way slabs designed according to the previously mentioned procedure have

proven over the years a very satisfactory performance under service loads. This is
attributed to the stress redistribution at higher loads. As a result, the design of two-
way slabs is generally based on empirical moment coefficients even for unequal
spans, which might not give actual prediction of the stresses but give the total amount
of reinforcement. That is why they say, “the total amount o f reinforcement in a slab
seems more important than the exact distribution ”. The designer can clearly establish
his design on numerical analysis or on a finite element method as long as they meet all
the ECP 203 requirements for deflection, cracking and reinforcement.

1.3.4 Minimum Thickness

To control cracking, deflection and to ensure good performance for two-way slab, the
code states that the minimum thickness tmin should be

a l 35 simple span
tmi„ = {a l 40 continuousfrom one end (1.19)
a! 45 continuous from two ends
where a is the short effective span

Although thin reinforced concrete two-way slabs have high flexural resistance, their
deflections are often large. From the deflection point of view, the thickness is
considered acceptable if it is greater than t calculated using the following equation

( 1.20)
15+ 20/(6/ a ) + 10 f5p

Where a is the span in the short direction, b is the span in the long direction, pp is the
ratio between the perimeter of the continuous edges to the total perimeter, and fy is the
steel yield strength N/mm2. It is clear that the slab thickness required for deflection
considerations is higher in case of square slabs with large spans. For example, a slab
reinforced with high-grade steel and continuous from all edges with dimensions of
(5mx5m) requires 122 mm thickness, while a slab with dimensions of (6m x 6m)
requires 146 mm.

18
 Rectangularity ratio, f5

Fig. 1.12 Minimum thickness of 2-way slabs for deflection control

1.3.5 Related Code Provisions

The minimum area of steel for one and two-way slabs is given by

As,mi„ =^ — b d for all types of steel..........................(1.21a)

f y

Or

0.25
bxd for mild steel (f=240and280N/m m 2)
100
A5,mln .(1.21b)

~——b x d forhighgradesteel(f =360and400N/mm2)

100

At least one third of the reinforcement must extend from the support to the
support.
The maximum distance between bars is 200 mm
The area of the secondary steel mesh should be at least 20.% of the main
area of steel with a minimum of 4 bars per meter.
The minimum bar diameter is 6 mm for straight bars and 8mm for bent bars.
Slabs with a thickness of more than 160 mm should be reinforced with top
steel mesh not less than 20% of the main steel with a minimum of 5<j>8/m'
for mild steel and 5<j>6/m' for high grade steel.
Under normal conditions and for spans that do not differ more than 20%,
half o f the reinforcement can be bent at the fifth o f the clear span and
extends to the adjacent span one fourth the bigger of the two spans as shown
in Fig. 1.13.

19
 bigger of bigger of
Ljj/4 or Ld/4 W 4 Or L&/4
b— H
f T 7 \ . . ..^ 7 7 X ? . .
L — j
~*W 7'
L ei
^W 5 J W 5 1
L C2
1W 7

A. Minimum code requirement for bar extension

Fig. 1.13a Reinforcement details for solid slabs

t t

~\3<t> 10/m' 3 d> 10/m'

3 0 10 /m '
V
3 O 10 /m’
T

B. Example of reinforcement for two-way slabs

Fig. 1.13b Reinforcement details for solid slabs

20
1.3.6 Comer Reinforcement
Twisting moments are developed at the comers of exterior two-way slabs. The
magnitude of these moments is usually small for slabs spanning less than 4 to 5
meters. However, for bigger spans (>5 ms) these moments tend to crack the slab.
Special reinforcement should be added to control cracking and to resist the torsional
moments. Bottom bars are placed perpendicular to the slab diagonal while top bars are
placed in the direction of the diagonal as shown in Fig. 1.14.a. Alternatively, the
diagonal reinforcement can be replaced by top and bottom mats as shown in Fig.
I.l4.b. The amount of this reinforcement can be taken as the same area and the
spacing as the main positive reinforcement (per meter). The reinforcement should
extend about one fifth of the clear span in either direction as shown in Fig. 1.14.

T o p a n d B o tto n
m a ts |

/
1

L c/5

L c= lo n g e r c le a r s pan

b -u s m g to p a n d b o tto m

Fig. 1.14 Corner reinforcement at an exterior two-way slab

21
Example 1.2
A reinforced concrete floor is to be constructed as shown in Fig. EX L2. Beams with
a cross section of (250 mm x 600 mm) are provided on all column lines. The floor is
to be designed to carry a live load of 3 kN/m2 and a flooring material of 2 kN/m2,using
concrete strength of 25 N/mm2 and reinforcing steel having a yield strength of 360
N/mm2. Calculate and draw the reinforcement required for the floor.

Solution
Step 1: Estimate the thickness of the slab
The plan consists of one way, two way and cantilever slabs. Assume that the slab
thickness ts is 120 mm for all slabs of the floor.

For one way slab

L! 30 simple span ■
tmin = LI 35 continuous from one end
LI 40 continuous from two ends

Since slabs S6 and S8 are one-way slabs continuous from two ends, the minimum
thickness is given by
L 2.4x1000 ■ ..
<mi„ = — = ------------- = 60 mm (< ts.. ,.O.k)
mm 40 40 v s /
Also for deflection calculations to be ignored the thickness should be at least:

^ = 0.40+^ = 0.40+ — = 0.95

650 650
Ln (2.4-0.25) x 1000 _ ,,
t min = ---- 2— = ---------------------- = 56.73 mm (< ts. . ..o.k)
""" (36 /£ ) (36/0.95)

For two way slabs

The biggest slab is S10 (4.8x 5.4 m)
a 135 simple span
a* 1 40 continuous from one end
a* / 45 continuousfrom two ends

a* is the short span

This span is considered continuous from one end thus
a 4.8x1000 , ..
tmm
, =-40
— = -----------
40 = 120 mm(=ts....O.k)
V S 7

22
23
For cantilever slabs
There is no direct recommendation for the minimum thickness for cantilever slabs
except for deflection calculations. The minimum thickness for cantilever slabs
reinforced with high grade steel (fy=360 N/mm2 ) equals
L 1.6x1000 _
= ^ = ---- ------ = 160 mm>ts
From economic point of view, it is better to use thickness of 120 mm and to check the
deflection.
Step 2: Effective span
Since the width of all beams are 250 mm, the clear span equals
L c l e a r =L-0.25

where L is the centerline to centerline distance

For interior span, the effective length equals to

, • L x o f f ^ . L x o f j ( I - ° - 2 5 ) + 0 -12
Leff = mm j [1.05 x Ldar = mm j | l .05 x (Z, - 0.25)
[CL to CL [L
For cantilever slabs
■ U + r+ t, • f(£-0.125) + 0.12
L /r=min< = imn <
cff [edge to CI. [L

Slab U Lclcitr.x Lclear.x 1.05 x I'dT.X Ly Lclear,y Lclear,y 1.05 x Lefr,y

+ts Lclear,x +ts Lclcar,y
S1 3.60 - - - 3.60 1.20 1.08 1.20 1.13 1.20
S2 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 4.78 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 4.78
S3 3.60 3.35 3.47 3.52 3.52 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 4.78
S4 1.60 1.48 1.60 1.55 1.60 3.60 - - - 3.60
S5 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 , 4.78 3,60 3.35 3.47 3.52 3.52

S6 1.80 1.55 1.67 1.63 1.67 7.20 6.95 7.07 7.30 7.20
S7 4.00 3.75 3.87 3.94 3:94 3.60 3.35 3.47 3.52 3.52
S8 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 .4.78 2.40 2.15 2.27 2.26 2.27
S9 4.00 3.75 3.87 3.94 3.94 3.60 3.35 3.47 3.52 3.52
S10 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 "■4.78 5.40 5.15 5.27 5.41 5:40
S11 1.80 1.55 1.67 1.63 1.67 '4.20 3.95 4 .07 4.15 4.15

24
Step 3: Calculation of loads
wu =1.4 gs +1.6 ps= 1.4 ( 25 x ts + flooring) + 1.6 x LL
w„ = 1.4x(25x0..120+2.0) + 1.6x3 = 11.8 kN/ m 2
Taking a strip of lm, the load acting on this strip equals to
wsu = wu x l = 11.80 kN / m! and b=1000 mm
For one-way and cantilever slabs
w0=ws„ and wp=0

For two-way slabs

The load distribution factors are determined using the rectangularity ratio r
mbxb (bigger)
maxa (smaller)
where b and a are the effective spans and
1.0 simple span
m„ or mh =- 0.87 continuous from one end
0.76 continuous from two ends
The values of a and p are obtained from Table 1.2
wa cc. wsu
Wp= p . w su
Please note that wa is the load transferred in the short direction (not x-direction) and
Wp is the load transferred in the long direction. For example for slab S8 wa runs in y-
direction and Wp in x-direction, while for slab S10 wa runs in x-direction and wp in y-
direction.

Slab l-etT,x mx I'eff.y my r a P Wa Wp

S1 3.60 1 1.20 0.87 3.46 1.00 0.00 11.80 0.00

S2 4.78 0.87 4.78 0.87 1.00 0.35 0.35 4.13 4.13
S3 3.52 0.87 4.78 0.87* 1.36 0.53 0.19 6.24 2.24
S4 1.60 0.87 3.60 1 2.59 1.00 0.00 11.80 0.00
S5 4.78 0.76 3.52 0.76 1.36 0.53 0.19 6.24 2.24
S6 1.67 0.76 7.20 0.87 4.94 . 1.00 0.00 1180 0.00
S7 3.94 0.87 3.52 0.87 . 1.12 0.41 0.28 4.83 3.30
S8 4.78 0.87 2.27 0.76 2.41 1.00 0.00 11.80 0.00
S9 3.94 0.87 3.52 0.87 1.12 0.41 0.28 4.83 3.30
S1.0 4.78 1 5.40 0.87 1.02 0.36 0.34 4.23 3.99
S11 1.67 1 4.15 1 2.48 1.00 0.00 11.80 0.00
* In Y- direction, slab S3 is not continuous with S6 (one way slab in X- direction).

25
d£
Bending moment and reinforcement
The floor slab considered in this example has panels that contain variation in loads
and spans o f more than 20%. Exact analysis of such a floor is lengthy and quite
tedious. Due to the fact that R/C slabs have an ability to redistribute the moments, it
has become a common practice to extend the use of the moment coefficients
mentioned in 1.2.5 to most types of floors.
The procedure followed to obtain the design moments in the floor of this example:
1. The positive moment in any span equals to
w, x LL-
——

2. The negative moment developed at the support connecting two adjacent unequal
spans is conservatively taken as the larger o f Mu, and Mu2 given by

« ... - ^ 4 -

the larger of the larger of

Mui and Mu_ MU2 and Mu3

mb /mr 'T T

10 12 12

For cantilever slabs and assuming that the hand rail weight is 1.5 kN/m', the bending moment
equals to
M„ ^ + 1.5x/,„<r

The effective depth equals

d = ts-15 = 105 mm in the main direction (a)
d= tj-25 = 95 mm in the secondary direction (P)

xlO6 Mu x40
f cu b d 2 25xl000x d 1 d2
f 25
A, x ^ - x b x d = a>x——xlOOOxrf =69.44x®xrf > A,
fy 360
0.6
Armin = — b d = — x 1000x105 =175 mm2
/, 360

26
DesignofSlabsinX-Direction
Slab i-eff.x wux k M Ux d R (JO As As
(m) ') (kN.m
(kN/m ) mm required chosen
S1 3.60 0.00 0 0.00 95 0.0000 0.000 - 5 <t>8/m'
4.78 4.13 10 9.43 105 0.0342 0.041 299 3 <P 8/m'+
S2
3 4) 10/m'
S3 3.52 6.24 10 7.72 105 0.0280 0.033 243 6 <t 8/m'
3 <t>10/m'+
S4 1.60 11.80 2 17.40 105 0.0631 0.079 573 3 <P 12/m'
3 <5 8/m'+
S5 4.78 2.24 10 5.11 95 . 0.0226 0.027 176 3 10/m'
3 <I>8/m'+
S6 1.67 11.80 12 2.74 105 0.0099 0.012 175 3 <D10/m'
S7 3.94 3.30 10 5.11 95 0.0226 0.027 176 6 4> 8/m'
S8 4.78 0.00 0 0.00 95 0.0000 0.000 175 6 4> 8/m'
S9 3.94 3.30 10 5.11 95 0.0226 0.027 176 6 <t>8/m'
S10 4.78 3.99 8 11.39 95 0.0505 0.062 408 6 O 10/m'
S11 1.67 11.80 8 4.11 105 0.0149 0.017 175 5 3> 8/m'

DesignofSlabsinY-Direction
Slab WUy k Muy d R As As
(kN.m
) mm
CO

(m) (kN/m
') required chosen
S1 1.20 11.80 2 10.3" 105 0.0374 0.045 325 3 O 8/m'+
3 <E>10/m'
S2 4.78 4.13 10 9.43 95 0.0418 0.051 333 3 8/m'+
3<D 10/m'
S3 4.78 2.24 10 5.11 95 0.0226 0.027 176 6 4> 8/m'
S4 3.60 0.00 - 0.00 95 0.0000 0.000 175 5 4> 8/m'
S5 3.52 6.24 12 6.44 105 0.0234 0.028 201 6 <D8/m'
S6 7.20 0.00 - 0.00 95 0.0000 0.000 175 5 <E>8/m'
S7 3.52 4.83 10 5.98 105 0.0217 0.026 187 6 <P 8/m'
S8 2.27 11.80 12 5.07 105 0.0184 0.022 175 3 4> 8/m'+
3 0 10/m'
S9 3.52 4.83 10 5.98 105 0.0217 0.026 187 6 <I>8/m'
S10 5.40 4.23 10 12.33 105 0.0447 0.054 396 6® 10/m'
S11 4.15 0.00 - 0.00 95 0.0000 0.000 175 5 4) 8/m'

X = 1 1 . 8 x 1 . 22/ 2 + 1 .5 x l.2

27
28
2
Hollow Block Slabs

Photo 2.1 Reinforcement placement in ribbed slab during construction

2.1 Introduction

Hollow block floors are formed typically using blocks made of concrete with
lightweight aggregate. The void in the blocks reduces the total weight of the slab
significantly.
The main advantage of using hollow.blocks is the reduction in weight by removing the
part of the concrete below the neutral axis. An additional advantage is the ease of
construction, especially if the floor is designed with no projected beams (hidden
beams). Hollow block floors proved economic for spans of more than 5m with light or
moderate live loads, such as hospitals, office or residential buildings. They are not
suitable for structures having heavy live loads such as warehouses or parking garages.

29
The blocks do not contribute to the strength of the slab; as a matter of fact it is an
additional weight on the slab. Thus, in recent years these blocks were made of
polystyrene which is 1/15 of the weight of concrete blocks as shown in Fig. 2.1. Thus,
a reduction in the reinforcement can be achieved. The values listed in Table 2.1
include the weight of the concrete ribs and 50mm top concrete slab. If for any reason
the thickness of the top flange was increased more than 50 mm, the additional weight
should be included in the calculations. The total ultimate load for per square meter wsu
is given by

wu = 1.4x[weightof blocks !m 2(Table 2.1)+flooring]+l.6 w LL .................. (2.1)

cement mortar (20-30 mm)

(polystyrene) (without concrete slab weight)

Fig. 2.1 Weight comparison between concrete and foam blocks.

Table 2.1 Weight of material used in hollow block floors* (kN/m2)

Concrete blocks Concrete blocks Concrete blocks Foam blocks

400x200x150 400x200x200 400x200x250 500x400x200

One way Two-way One-way Two-way One-way Two-way One-way Two-way

3.03 3.36 3.30 3.80 4.10 4.78 0.70 1.20

* include the weight of the concrete ribs and 50mm top concrete slab
Hollow block slabs are classified into: a)one-way hollow block slabs or b)two-way
hollow block slabs depending on the arrangement of the ribs on plan. Fig. 2.2.A shows
a one-way hollow block slab in which the ribs are arranged in one direction. Fig. 2.2.B
on the other hand, shows a two-way hollow block slabs in which the ribs are arranged
in two directions
To avoid shear failure, the blocks are terminated near the support and replaced by solid
parts. Solid parts are also made under partitions, brick walls and concentrated loads.

30
 A. One-way hollow blocks with hidden beams

projected
mBmBmBmBm beam
mBmBfflBmBm
mBmBmBmBm
mBmBmBmBm
mBmamBmBco
fflBfflBmBlBBm
mBmBmBmBm
mBmBmBmBm
mBmBmBmBm ribs
mBmBmBmBm
mBmBmBmBm

B. Two-way hollow blocks with projected beams

Fig. 2.2 One and two-way hollow block slabs

2.2 One-Way Hollow B lock Slabs

2.2.1 General
One-way hollow blocks are used frequently in construction even for slabs with a
rectangularity ratio less than 2. This is attributed to the ease of placing the blocks in
one direction. The arrangement of the ribs controls the direction of the slab regardless
of its rectangularity ratio. The ribs are positioned in the shorter direction, thus all the
loads are transferred in this direction as shown in Fig. 2.2.A

31
2.2.2 Arrangement of blocks
The number of blocks in each direction must be specified on the construction
drawings. Thus, the layout of the blocks must be positioned so that enough solid parts
are present near the supporting beams. For floors with hidden beams, the solid part
must be wide enough to carry all the applied loads. The normal width of the solid part
ranges between 0.8-2.0 for floors with hidden beams and ranges between 0.2-0.5 for
floors with projected beams.
Having determined the dimension of the solid parts, the clear length of the blocks can
be attained as shown in Fig. 2.3. For example, in the case of using 400x200x200
blocks in a one-way slab, the clear distance in the rib direction equals to

Lcl = 200 x n, +100 x ncr

where n, is the number of blocks in rib direction and ncr is the number of cross ribs.
The clear distance in the perpendicular direction equals

Lcl =400xw2 + 100 (w2- 1)

LC 2 =500 xn I -100
Where n2 is the number of blocks perpendicular to the ribs. The number of ribs=n3-l

Photo 2.2 One-way hollow blocks during construction

32
n r1 o
o
X
5 LI
!L
o
On

nl = number of blocks in rib direction

n2 = number of blocks in the

L2
rH o
om
cross ribs=3 xlOOxnm
o
o
X
BBBBBBBBBE LI
3 BBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBB
L-H
Lo2= 500 x n2 - 100

Fig. 2.3 Arrangement o f blocks and cross ribs in one-way slabs

33
Hollow block slabs can be used to form a cantilever slab as shown in Fig. 2.4. The ribs
can be either made continuous as in Fig. 2.4.A, or simply supported on two hidden
beams as shown in Fig. 2.4.B. For slabs with irregular shapes, the blocks can be
arranged along the perimeter as shown in Fig 2.4.C.

A. Continuous ribs spanning in B. Ribs spanning as simply

the long direction supported on hidden beams.

C. Ribs arrangement in irregular plans

Fig. 2.4 Hollow blocks arrangement in cantilever and irregular slabs.

34
2.2.3 Code Provisions
• The thickness of the slab (tj should not be less than 50 mm or the 1/10 o f the
clear spacing between blocks (e/10) as shown in Fig. 2.5.
• The maximum clear distance (e) is 700 mm
• The minimum rib width (b) is 100mm or 1/3 the total slab thickness (t/3)

Fig. 2.5 Minimum dimensions required by the code

• To avoid cracking due to shrinkage in the top concrete flange, the cement
blocks should be watered prior to concrete placing. A light reinforcing steel
mesh should be placed in the top slab for added durability and strength. This
mesh also helps in case the slab is subjected to concentrated or moving loads
and reduces cracking and shrinkage in the concrete. The code requires that
reinforcement in the direction of the ribs should be at least 5<j)6/m'
perpendicular to the ribs and 4<j>6/m' parallel to the ribs.

• Transversal ribs or cross ribs are added to one-way hollow block floors for
better distribution of the applied loads. They also help in distributing the
concentrated loads due to walls in the transverse direction. The bottom
reinforcement is taken as the reinforcement in the main ribs, and the top
reinforcement should be at least 'A of the bottom reinforcement. The code
requires that in case of large spans or heavy live loads that the floor should
be equipped with cross ribs with the conditions shown in Table 2.2. Fig. 2.3
illustrate the use of cross ribs in one way slabs and block arrangement

Table 2.2 Cross-rib requirements by the ECP 203

Live loads Span Condition
< 3 kN/m2 <5m No cross rib required
< 3 kN/m2 > 5m One cross rib
>3 kN/m2 4m to 7m One cross rib
>3 kN/m2 > 7m Three cross rib

35
2.2.4 Design of One-way Hollow B lock Slabs

2.2.4.1 Design of Ribs

The ribs can be considered as a beam having a flange width B which is equal to the
distance between ribs. The ribs carries a uniformly distributed load wur equals to

w ur=wuxB (.kN /m') (2.2)

where wuis the Sab load in fcN/m2 and B=e+b

Depending on the sign of the bending moment, the sections may be designed either as
T-sections or rectangular sections. Since Section (A) is subjected to positive bending it
is designed as T-section, whereas section (B) is subjected to negative bending and it is
designed as rectangular section as shown in Fig. 2.6.

d ■

Sec. A

Rectangular
section
Sec. B

Fig. 2.6 Design of ribs

An example of the reinforcement of a one way hollow block floor is shown in Fig. 2.7

36
Fig. 2.7 Reinforcement o f a one way hollow blocks slab with hidden beams

37
2.2.4.2 Design of Hidden Beams
Hidden beams are usually used in hollow block floors to give flexibility and a sense of
spaciousness. Due to their limited depth, hidden beams are heavily reinforced and their
width exceeds their depth as shown in Fig. 2.8.A. To reduce the amount of
reinforcement, the depth of the hidden beam is increased by 50 mm as shown in Fig.
2.8.B.

A: Hidden beam

flooring

B: Hidden beam with increased thickness

Fig. 2.8 Cross section in a hidden beam

Since the width of the hidden beam is greater than its depth, the ECP 203 requires that
the applied shear stress, qu=QJ(B ■ d), be less than the concrete shear strength qcu
without any shear reinforcement contribution. Thus, it is customary not to use bent
bars in hidden beams because the shear reinforcement contribution is not allowed by
the code. For hidden beams, the concrete shear strength qcu is given by

qcu = 0 A 6 ^ > q u ( N / m m 2).'........................ (2.3)

The minimum shear reinforcement for hidden beams can be reduced to

_0A Qu (2.4.a)

04 1 m.
xb xs (2.4.b)
"fy \4a,
where qu is the ultimate shear strength at the critical section and qcu is the concrete
shear strength. The stirrups should be arranged so that the distance between stirrups
should not exceed 250 mm as shown in Fig, 2.8. It has to be mentioned that the role of
the stirrups in such case is to keep the longitudinal bars in place and to confine
concrete in the cross section.

Photo 2.3 Reinforcement placement in a hidden beam

39
Example 2.1
A hollow block floor with hidden beams is constructed with concrete blocks over
several spans as shown in figure. The characteristic material strength is
fcu~ 40 N/mm2 and
//=400 N/mm2
The applied loads are
Live loads=4 kN/m2
Flooring =2 kN/m2
Design the floor using one-way hollow block slabs with hidden beams.

I
©
1
T

a®

5400 mm 5400ram 5400 mm

Floor layout
x

40
Solution
Step 1: Dimensioning
Choose 400x200x200 concrete blocks
Thus, e= block width=400 mm
f50 mm
ts =biggerof\
(e/10 = 40 mm
ts=50 mm
t = tbiock+ts= 200+50 =250 mm
fl00 mm
b = bigger o f \
[250/3 = 83.3 mm

Step 2: Calculation of ultimate loads.

For concrete blocks of dimensions 400x200x200, the self weight of the blocks and the
concrete ribs is 3.3 kN/m2 (refer to Table 2.1)
gs= self weight + flooring=3.3+2 =5.3 kN/m2
ps=4 kN/m2
Wa =1.4gs +1.6ps =1.4x5.3 + 1.6x4 = 13.82 kNIm 2
Since this is a one way hollow blocks, all the load is carried in the direction of the ribs.
Wum, = wu (e+b) = 13.82 (400+100) /1000=6.91 kN/m'

Step 3: Arrangement of blocks

The code requires the use of one cross rib for live loads >3 kN/mz and spans from 4-7
m (ncr=l). Since the roof contains hidden beams the distance c measured from the
centerline is taken from 300-700 mm.
Let us assume that clear span for the blocks are 0.6-1.0 m less than centerline distance.

41
 iirmniiTimnniiiD
mmmnjfTTmmni
nnmpmoinmnD
iririn nnrinm n n 1I DHilil.1 HOHI 111H1
riTiinn iiriTTTnn 11 rminiTTTirnimiTin
nnnin inimumi
riimirmmmimi IlLl liLliiill UJ tiiillll
rmTTmiiriTTnimi mri it ittti nu"i mmTi
Intiliil fllintilUll iiniritniirmmnm
rimirminnTTTnii imimimrnTmTTm
LIIJllliJHLIUlillill * irnimrroiaimmn

Step 3.1: Arrangement of the blocks in x-direction

Step 3.1.1: Exterior bay
(Let C,+C2=900)
LC1= 5400 - (C, +C2)= 5400 - 900 = 4500 mm
200 x +100 x ncr = 4500 mm
where, nj=No of blocks and ncr= No. of cross ribs
200 xn, +100x1 =4500 nj=22
Ci=300 mm (near projected beam) C2=600 mm (near hidden beam)
Step 3.1.2: Interior bay
Assume C3=650 mm (value close to C2)
LC2= 5400 - 2C3 = 5400 - 1300 = 4100 mm
200xh2 +100xrt^ =4100 mm where, n 2=no ofblocks
200x n2 +100 x 1 = 4100 —>■—* rb=20 >C3=650 mm

42
Step 3.2: Arrangement of the blocks in y-direction
Assume C4= 300 mm
Lc3 = 6200 - 2 Q =6200 - 2 x 300 =5600 mm
If we assume that n3= No. of blocks, then the number of ribs =(n3- 1)
400xn,+100 (n3- l) = 5600
5600= 500xn3-100
n3 =11.4 block
Round down to the nearest number (n3=l 1), and recalculate C4
6 2 0 0 -2 C4= 500 x 1 1 - 100 C4=400mm
Thus use C4=400 mm
Step 4: Design of Ribs
Step 4.1: Calculation of the Bending Moments in Ribs

Since the ribs are continuous over the supports with equal loads and equal spans, the
code coefficients for slabs are applied

k
wu/rib=6-9J kN/m'
n .{ - { - n i p n t ti )
iT r ftifi' JtrfT7TT

--------- 5.4 --------- -4---------- 5.4 -------- + --------- 5.4 - --------

-24 -10 -10 -24

~~Z^
+10 +12 +10

8.40 20.15 20.15 8.40

20.15 16.80 20.15

© © ©
Jnk' Ab ""S "

43
Step 4.2: Design of rib critical sections (Continuous rib)
Design of Section 1
This section is subjected to a positive bending (20.15 kN.m), the compression flange
form a T-section as shown in the Figure.
From the figure B=500 mm >
Assuming concrete cover of 30 mm
d= 250 -30 =220 mm
B=500 mm

o
m
tN
ts = 50 mm

Using the C l-J curve

Cl=6.93

The point is outside the curve use (c/d)min=0.125

c=0.125 x 220=27.5 mm
a=0.8 x c = 22 mm<ts .....o.k.
use j=0.825
A
a = ------ u“— = --------------------
Z U . I J X 1 U
--= 2277
_
7 7 mm 2
j x d x f y 0.825x220x400

0.225 bd 0.225 4*0

---------- x 100x220 = 78.2 m m 2 J < A . ok
AsminW = smaller o f fy 400
1.3^4, =1.3x277 = 360 m m 1

use 2 O 14 (307 mm2)/rib(1)

The minimum area o f steel for beams was used

44
Design of Section 2
This section is subjected to a negative bending moment (20.15 kN.m), thus the rib will
be designed as rectangular section
b=100mm

M„=20.15
e=400 mm
-+
b=100 mm

Using R-co curve

= = 0.1041
fjb d 2 40x100x220
From the curve it can be determined that co=0.14

A, = m ^ - b x d = 0 .14 - ^ - x 100x220 = 307 mm2 > A smj„

fy 400

use ( 2 14, 307.9 mm2)/rib

Design of Section 3
This section is subjected to a positive bending (16.8 kN.m), the compression flange
form a T-section. Using the C l-J curve

fa.B

220 = C l J - - - —— , Cl=7.6
11 40x500

The point is outside the curve,

use c/d)mill=0.125 —>—»—» use j=0.826

c=0.125 x 220=27.5 mm

a=0.8 x c = 22 mm < t,..... o.k.

45
 A u I U . O a I V . . j
A, = -------H---- = ---------------------- = 231.3 mm
s j x d x f y 0.826 X220x 400

use (l<I>12+l<t>14,267 mm2)/rib

Step 5: Design of hidden Beam (Bl)

The slab over the hidden beam will be increased by 50 mm.
t=300 mm
B=600+650=1250 mm
The self weight of the beam =yc B t = 2 5 x 1.25x0.3 = 9.375 kN/m'
But this weight should subtracted from the self weight of the blocks
Self weight of the blocks = o.w x B=3.3 x 1.25 = 4.125 kN/m’
Net weight =9.375-4.125=5.25 kN/m', factored net weight =1.4 x 5.25 =7.35 kN/m'
w„b= wu x spacing + net weight=l3.82 x 5.4 + 7.35= 81.98 kN/m'
50 mm

Note: wub calculations can be simplified by assuming that the increase in the hidden
beam weight is about 10—»12% of the slab weight as follows:
w ub = l.lx w u xspacing =1.1x13.82x5.4 = 82.1 kN !m '

46
Step 5.1: Design for flexure
w„i,-81.98 kN/m'
ultimate
Loads “T T ~ L ,
Mfr
6.2 -4---------- 6.2

., t -24 -9 -24
Moment _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
faCt0rS £>r ., ~£r ~
+ 11 i +11

131.3 350.14 131.3

Bending
moments
(kN.m) .... 286.5 mm” 286.5

Critical
sections
rtr. ttt
© © ©

Shear
0.40 0.60 0.60 0.40
factors

Shear 203.3 304.9 304.9 203.3

■force, kN£ A

Design of section 1
All sections in the hidden beam are rectangular sections. Assuming cover of 30 mm,
d=270 mm. Using R-co curve

R= = 350 14- 1()6 = 0.096

/ £llM 2 4 0 x l2 5 0 x 270

From the curve it can be determined that oo=0.126

47
 f 40
A, = <o B x d = 0.126 — x 1250 x 270 = 4248 mm2
fy 400
0.225 440
x 1250x270 = 1201 m m 2 J <AS o.k
A s,a =smaller o f 400
1.3A, =1.3x4248 = 5523 Twm2
use (140 20, 4398 mm2)
The design of other critical sections is summarized in the following table

Sec Mu R 00 As Chosen
2 286.5 0.079 0.100 3379.7 3456 11 0 20
3 131.3 0.036 0.043 1459.5 1885 6 0 20

Step 5.2: Design for Shear

The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the middle support.
Assume that the width of the column is 600 mm. The critical section is at section 1 as
shown in figure with code coefficient of 0.6

Qu =°-6 wul, L —w h f - + - ] = 0 .6 x 8 1 .9 8 x 6 .2 --^ ^ x f— + — 1 = 269.3 kN

1,2” 2” 1 1000 V 2 2
Qu 269.3x1000
Qu 0.80 N/ mm2
B x d . 1250x270
The code requires that the beam shear stress be less than concrete shear strength given by
If 14 0
qa = 0.16 . p - = 0.16 J — = 0.826 N/ mm2
V1.5 V1-5
Since qu<qcu the shear strength of the beam is sufficient, Provide minimum area of
stirrups. Assuming spacing of 200 mm and using mild steel f y=240 N/mm2

= — .Sx.s= — *1250x200 = 416 mm2

f, 240

The previous amount can be reduced according to the code item 4-2-2-1-6-c

As,.min = 416x ■416x1 -9:.?^ I= 4 0 5 mm2

Qcii J 0.826)
Assuming 6 branches, the area of one branch equals
416
A. ------ -- 69.44 mm Choose <|>10 (78.5 mm )
sb 6
Use § 10/200 mm (5cp 10/m').
Since we have six branches, use 6 0 16 as a secondary reinforcement

48
 14 0 20
6 0 16 6 0 16
6 <5 2 0 ' 6 0 20
5 0 20
5020
6 0 20
6 0 20

b. Longitudinal section in the hidden beam

50 mm 64) 16 Stirrups

Reinforcement details for the hidden beam

49
 - tM - -
omramfTTTiiT llll
LimillJLLllJlilil III!
nmrramn'TTHT llll
nrnjraiiiiTTniT mi
ui ii .ii in ni iiu i .i Mil
d e d m ran in ii mi

5400

Reinforcement layout for the hollow blocks floor

50
2.3 Two-Way Hollow B lock Slabs
In these types o f floors the ribs run in two directions and the load is distributed in both
directions as shown in Fig. 2.9. It is more economical to use two-way slabs if the
shorter span exceeds 6 meters. However, the placing of the blocks in two directions
during the construction is more difficult.

m B C D B ra B m B ra
CDBCDBCDBCDBQJ p ro je c te d b e a m
00BCDBCDBID BED
EOBCDBCDBCDBIU
mBfflBIHBCDBCD
H3BCDBCDBC0B0]
CDBCDBCDBCDBQ3
m B m B m B fflB m
CDBfflBCDBlUBCD
fflBCDBCDBCDBCD
□BCDBCDBCDBCD

ribs

Plan
n n n n n n n n n .
"J ribs p ro je c te d b e a m

Section

Fig. 2.9 Arrangement of the blocks in two-way hollow block slabs

In typical hollow block floors, the designer has to choose between the simplicity of
construction one-way hollow block and the economy that might be offered by utilizing
two way hollow blocks.
Figure 2.10 shows two options for arranging hollow-blocks in the same roof. Note that
cantilever hollow block slabs are designed as one-way hollow block slabs.

51
 ® 14.00
®
6.00 2.00 6.00 1.50

© - T ts r®

■G> S i

;b ) (c )

a) One way slab hollow block slabs

f _ .............
®
1 14.00
© ®
1. 6.00 . 2.00 6.00 . 1.50
1 -r
1

BBBBBBBBBBB m ,BBBBBBBBBBB I ~ ©
mmmmmmracDiiimii! mmmmmmmmmmtD c
BBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBB
mmmmmmmmmmcD m m mm mmmmmmm
BBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBB
a ra D m m a M n m m m mmmmmmmmmmm .
BBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBB t
mmmmmmmmmmtD mmmmmmmmmmm
BBBBBBBBBBB m m
© -

A.) (B ) (C) (D)

b) One way and two way slab hollow block slabs

Fig^ 2.10 Alternative solutions for arranging blocks in hollow block slabs

52
It
2.3.1 Method of Analysis
The analysis of two-way hollow blocks is carried out according to the type of
supporting beams. The code distinguishes between the two cases:

Case A: two-way hollow block floors with hidden beams are designed in a similar
fashion to the flat slabs.

Case B: two-way hollow block floors with projected beams are divided in two sub­
cases depending on the live loads and the compression flange as shown Table
2.3.
- -
Table 2.3 load distribution values that should be used in designing two-way
hollow block floors with projected beams

Compression flange case Live load value

LL < 5 kN/m2 LL > 5 kN/m"
Complete compression Use Table (2.4) Use Table (2.5)
flange (Marcus) (Grashoff)
Incomplete compression Use Table (2.5) Use Table (2.5)
flange (Grashoff) (Grashoff)

2.3.2 Design of two-way hollow slabs with projected beams

2.3.2.1 Design of ribs
Two-way hollow blocks have some capability to develop torsion but not as much as
the solid slab. About 15-20% of the total load is consumed in torsional action. Marcus
developed the distribution for such types of slabs in which the distribution load factors
are reduced to account for some torsion action. The values are listed in Table 2.4.

Table 2.4 a and (3 values for two-way hollow block slabs (Marcus values)

r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

a 0.396 0.473 0.543 0.606 0.660 0.706 0.746 0.778 0.806 0.830 0.849

P 0.396 0.333 0.262 0.212 0.172 0.140 0.113 0.093 0.077 0.063 0:053

In some cases where the live loads are considerably high, it is more advisable to -
neglect the torsion action and distribute the load according to Grashoff's factors listed
in Table 2.5.-

53
R
Table 2.5 a and (3 values for two-way hollow block slabs with high live loads
(Grashoff s values)

r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

a 0.500 0.595 0.672 0.742 0.797 0.834 0.867 0.893 0.914 0.928 0.941

p 0.500 0.405 0.328 0.258 0.203 0.166 0.133 0.107 0.086 0.072 0.059

The total factored load in the slab is given by:

wu = 1.4 x [weight of blocks/m2(Table 2.1)+flooring] +1.6 w u ..............(2.4a)

For ribs running in the short direction, the design loads are given by:
w ainb = a w u (b + e) ........................................... (2.4b)

For ribs running in the long direction, the design loads are given by:
™ a/n b = f iw u Q> + e) ............................................(2.4c)

The analysis and the design of the ribs in the two directions are carried out in similar
manners to those followed in one way hollow block slabs. Fig. 2.11 shows an example
of the reinforcement for a floor comprising one-way and two-way hollow block slabs.
2.3.2.2 Design of Projected beams
Projected beams are designed to cany the following loads
1- Own-weight
2- Wall load (if any)
3- Load transmitted from the slabs
The distribution of the slab load to the projected beams is carried out as shown in Fig.
2.12. The triangular or trapezoidal loads can be replaced by equivalent uniform loads
for calculating bending moment and shear forces using Table 2.6.

Fig. 2.6 Coefficients of equivalent uniform loads on beams

Ljlx 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

a 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.853 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917

0 0.500 0.554 0.582 0.615 0.642 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750

54
 I
-— ---------( 4 )

f ------ ®

Fig. 2.11 R einforcem ent o f a typical hollow block floor

 1 I
Fig. 2.12 Load distribution on the projected beams.

The bending moments and shear forces in the projected beams are obtained using
methods of structural analysis (or code coefficients if applicable). Sections of positive
moments are designed as T-sections while those of negative moments are designed as
rectangular sections as shown in Fig. 2.13.

_<L i-

\ compression
T-section

A 1

Rectangular section -_ Mu
T\ compression
j! zone

Fig. 2.13 Type of section in projected beams according to the applied moment.

Fig 2.14 shows a summary of the load calculations for beams in hollow block roofs.

56
 Design of Beams in
Hollow block slabs

Oneway
t Twoway
Hidden beam

B2 B2

P ie
6.00m

X tt> K
B2 B2
5.00 ^ 5.00 5.00

WB1= O.W. + Wu x 2.50 r = 6/5 =1.20

WB2=O.W. From Table 2.6 — a = 0.769

WB3=O.W. +Wu x 5.00 WB1 = O.W. + Wux 0.769 x 2.50

WB2 = O.W. + Wux 0.67 x 2.50
WB3 = O.W. + Wux 0.769 x 5.00

Note:Wall loads may be added (if any)

Fig.2.14 Calculation of loads of beams in hollow block roofs

57
Example 2.2
Redesign example 2.1 using two-way hollow blocks with projected beams
Solution
Step 1: Dimensioning
Choose 400x200x200 blocks
Take e=400 mm
150 mm
--bigger o f
e/10 = 40 mm

ts=50 mm
t = tbiock+ts= 200+50 =250 mm
flOO mm
b = bigger o f
250/3 = 8.33 mm

Step 2: Calculating Ultimate Loads.

For concrete blocks 400x200x200 and from Table (2.1) the self weight of the blocks
and the concrete ribs is 3.8 kN/m2
gs= self weight + flooring=3.8+2 =5.8 kN/m2
ps=4 kN/m2
=1.4gs +l-6ps = 1.4x5.8+ 1.6x4 = 14.52 kN/ m 1
r = A = ^ 2 =L148
L2 5.4
Since this is two way hollow blocks with projected beams and L.L.< 5kN/m2, use
Table 2.3 (Marcus). The load distribution factors are
a=0.507 and (5=0.299
w„/nb = a wu (e+b) =0.507 x 14.52 (400+100) /1000=3.68 kN/m'
wp/rib = p wu (e+b) = 0.299 x 14.52 (400+100) H 000=2.17 kN/m'

58
Step 3: Arrangement of Blocks
Since the roof contains projected beams the distance c measured from the centerline is
taken from 300-500 mm. Let us assume that the clear span for the blocks is 0.6-1.0 m
less than centerline distance
Transversal direction
Assume Ci=500 mm
L a = 5400 - 2C,= 5400 - 1000 4400 mm
500 x «, + 400 = 4400 mm where, ni=no of ribs ■ni=8
Longitudinal direction
Assume C2 = 400 mm
Lc2= 6200 - 2 C2 =6200-2x 400=5400 where, n2=no of ribs
500x«2 +400=5400 n2 =10
Step 4: Design of ribs
Step 4.1: Transversal direction
Step 4.1.1: Calculation of the bending moments
Since the ribs are continuous over the supports with equal loads and equal spans, the
code coefficients (k) for slabs are applied. The transversal direction is the shorter
direction thus wa is transferring in this direction
wa xL 2 3.68x5.42
= -------- = -------------

Wcr3.68 kN/m'

A
m H ■
L L L Ai i n x m . loads
n iliiir A
/TT77T7T

5 .4 5.4 5.4

-24 -10 -10 -24

k factor
j s t
+10 +12 +10

1 0 .7 3 1 0 .7 3
4 .4 7
bending
moments

10.73 10.73

critical
sections
© © ©

59
Step 4.2: Design of the Longitudinal Direction
Step 4.2.1 Calculation of the bending moments
Since the ribs are continuous over the supports with equal loads equal span, the code
coefficients (k) for slabs are applied. The longitudinal direction is the shorter direction
thus wp is transferring in this direction
... wp xL 2 2.17x6.22
— = ------ -------
wp= 2.17 kN/m'
Ultimate
Loads U LLLLLi □ 'i r t i
A Mb
6.2 6.2

Moment -24 -24

factors ~~A.
+10 +10

Bending 3.47 10.42 3.47

moment J sr. HZ S ij4 A

Critical
sections /K

© © © (J)

Step 4.2.2: Design of Rib Critical Sections

Design of Section 1
This section has positive bending (8.34 kN.m), the compression flange form a T-
section as shown in Fig.
Since this is the secondary direction, d= 250 -30-15 =205 mm

b=100 mm e=400 mm

62
Using the C l-J curve
M„

8.34 x10s
205 = Cl Cl=10.04
40x500
The point is outside the curve use c/d)raill=0.125
c=0.125 x 205=25.5 mm
a=0.8 x c = 20.6 mm <ts ..... o.k.
use j=0.825
Mu 8.34 xlO6
a - ------ -— = ------------ --------= 123.3 mm > A smjn
'■ j x d x f y 0.825x205x400

use 2 <E> 10 (157 mm2)/rib

Design of Section 2
This section is subjected to negative bending moment (10.42 kN.m), thus the rib will
be designed as rectangular section
b=1000 mm

ts = 50 mm R-section

M„=10.42
kN.m
e=400 mm b=100 mm

Using R-co curve

M.. 10.42 xlO6
R= = 0.061
fjb d 2 40xl00 x 2052
From the curve it can be determined that co=0.075

A, =a> f>x d = 0.075— x 100x205 = 153 mm2 >AS

/, 400
use ( 2 0 10, 157 mm)/rib

63
64
Step 5: Design Of Projected beam (Bl)
Assume that the projected beam has the cross section shown in figure.
The self weight of the web of the beam equals =yc b t = 25 x 0.25x 0.75 = 4.68 kN/m'
The weight of the flanged part of the beam is approximately taken into consideration
when calculating the slab load transmitted to the beam
The load distribution over the beams will be the same as regular solid slab and the load
distribution factors of the beams will be used

6=11)00-

i
a=0.75 and (3=0.56
Load for bending
w„b = w u x a x spacing + 1.4 x o.w b=250 mm
wub =14.52 x 0.75 x 5.4 + 1.4 x 4.68= 65.37 kN/m'
Load for shear
wUSh= wu x P x spacing + 1.4 x o.w
wush =14.52 x 0.56 x 5.4 + 1.4 x 4.68= 50.47 kN/m'
i i

Load distribution on the projected beams.

65
Step 5 .1 : Design for Flexure

wub=65.4 kN/m'
bending
Loads p i n u . m o u m i
A imfr
-------- 6 .2 -------- J - -------- 6 .2 ---------4-

Moment -24 -9 -24

factors ------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------
mfrnr +11 tfliM)

Bending 104.7 279.2 104.7

moment
^ 228. 4 S 228.4 ^

Critical
sections

© © © ©

wush=50.47 kN/m'
Shear
Loads
i l l 1.\ 1 T n m
dm,
6.2 6.2

Shear 0 40 0.60 0.60 0.40

factors __ ______________________________________ ,

Shear 125.17 187.75 187.75 125.17

66
Design of Section 1
This section is subjected to -ve moment, thus it is a rectangular section
Assume concrete cover of 50 mm, d=700 mm

B= 1000 mm

Using R-co curve

279.2 xlO6
R=- ■-0.057
f mb d 2 40x250x7002
From the curve it can be determined that a>=0.07

A, =&> £*-bxd = 0.07 — x250x700 = 1230mm2 >AS

fy 400

0 . 2 2 5 J 0.225^40
bd - x 250x 700 = 622.6. m m 2 J <A, o.k
A sm in =smaller o f fy 400
1.3.4. =1.3x1230 = 1599 mm2
use (5® 18, 1272 mm2)
Design of Section 2
This section is subjected to a positive bending moment (228.43 kN.m), the
compression flange form a T-section as shown in Fig., B=500+500=1000 mm
B=1000 mm

b=250 mm

67
Using the C l-J curve

fa fi

700 = C lJ 2 - - 43xl()6 C 1=9.26

V 40x1000
The point is outside the curve use c/d)min=0.125
c=0.125 x 700=87.5 mm
a=0.8 x c = 70 mm <ts ..... o.k.
usej=0.825
Mu 228.43 xlO 6 noo 2
A = ------- ----- = ----------------------- = 988 mm
j x d x f y 0.825x700x400

use (4018,1017 mm2)

Step 6.2: Design for Shear

The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support.
Assume the width of the column is 600 mm. The critical section is at section 1 as
shown in figure with code coefficient of 0.6
Qu =0.6 L -w ub f - + - ) = 0 . 6 x 5 0 . 4 7 x 6 . 2 - 5 ^ x f — + — ] = 154.946jW
“b U 2 J 1000 I 2 2 J

Qu 154.94x1000 Ao o s r ; 2
qu = — — = ----------------- = 0.88 Nlmm
bxd 250x700
Concrete shear strength is given by

qcu = 0.24 = o.24 J — = 1.24 N/ mm 1

V1-5 V1.5
Since q„<qcu, no need for web reinforcement, provide minimum area of stirrups
Assuming spacing o f200 mm and using mild steel f y=240 N/mm2

^bX S = — X 250 X 200 = 83.33 mm2

' fy 240
t
Assuming 2 branches, the area o f one branch equals

Asb = =41.67 mm2 choose (J>8 (50 mm2)

Use ^ 8/200 mm

68
 5$8/m'
2016 50>18 2<t>16

I §
4018 2<D10 / 4018

-V - -Hr1 —

1018
20)16 24>16

r\ 2 ® 18
2® 18
20)18
2018
/I
Elevation

10® 10 as shrinkage

Cross section A-A in the projected beam

Reinforcement details of the projected beam

69
3
PANELED BEAMS

Photo 3.1 Reinforced concrete airplane hanger, Italy.

3.1 Introduction
A Paneled beams system is normally utilized when the dimensions of the floor are
relatively large so that it becomes uneconomical to either use solid slabs, or hollow
block slabs. In a paneled beams system, the floor is strengthened with a series of
beams with equal depth spanning usually in two perpendicular directions. These
beams divide the large floor into a number of small panels that can be easily designed
as solid slabs as shown in Fig. 3.1. The spacing between the beams ranges normally
from 2 to 4 meters. In this system, all beams are of the same depth and are supported
directly either on columns or on edge beams.
Because the deflection is equal at the point of intersection for any two beams, the load
transferred in the short direction is much larger than the long direction. This is because
it takes more loads to deflect a short beam than it does for a long one. If the ratio of
the long span to the short span (L[/Ls) exceeds 1.5, there is no structural advantage for
using paneled beams system. Almost the entire load in this case is transferred in the
short span, similar to the case of one-way slabs.

Section

Fig. 3.1 Layout of paneled beams floor

71
3.2 Load Distribution
To illustrate the behavior of the paneled beams system, let us assume a very simple
system which consists of two beams with the same depth intersecting at point A as
shown in Fig. 3.2. The dead and the live loads are transferred through these two
beams. Denoting the load transferred in the short direction as wa and the load
transferred in the long direction as Wp.

W p

The deflection of the long span beam A2 equals

5x.w gxL*
A2 =- (3.2)
384 El
But since the deflection at point A is the same, A, = A2

5 k-w a x.L\ _ 5 x w /JxZ,1

(3.3)
384 E l ~ 384 E l

.l: .(3.4)

72
but the total load w - wa+wp
w„ L
.(3.5)
WB+W<x L z +Ll
Defining wa = w a and wp=w £S

w L \+ L * 1+ L*/L

Denoting r as rectangularity ratio

r= sp-an = A- 5xhus the load distribution factors a and p equals

Short span Lx

r* 1
a =------ and similarly J3=-
1+ r 1+ r 4

The load distribution factor in the short direction a is always larger than the load
distribution factor p in the long direction by the magnitude of r4. Table 3.1 lists the
values of a and p for different rectangularity ratio. This table is used to calculate the
load transferred in each direction.

Table 3.1 a and p values for paneled beam slabs (Grashoff s values)

r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

a 0.500 0.595 0.672 0.742 0.797 0.834 0.867 0.893 0.914 0.928 0.941

p 0.500 0.405 0.328 0.258 0.203 0.166 0.133 0.107 0.086 0.072 0.059

73
The difference in magnitude between the part of the load transferred in the short beam
and that in the long beam can be explained by considering the structure in Fig 3.3. For
the same amount of deflection, it takes more force to displace a shorter beam than a
longer one. If the two beams are of the same length, the load transferred in both
directions will be the same (Pi=P2=P/2). The developed bending moment in each
beam will be PL/8 instead o f PL/4 in case of a simple beam(50% reduction), because
each beam supports the other. However, if the long span is twice that of the short span,
the long beam will provide little support to the short beam because the flexural
stiffiiess is considerably low. A computer analysis reveals that the developed bending
moment in the short beam is about (90%) of the simple beam moment with length
L(Pi=0.9 P) and the developed bending moment in the long direction is about 10% of
the simple beam moment with length 2L. This explains the limitation imposed by the
code concerning the ratio o f the long span to the short span (Li/L2<1.5). At this ratio,
about 75% percent o f the load is transferred in the short direction (P!=0.75P).

p = p ,+ p . P i=0.9 P P=P,+P2 p =0.5 P

M l=0.9 P (L/4)=0.225 PL M 1=0.5P(IV4)=0.125PL

L.------ L,=L-----_| _________ L |= L ___J

P,=0.5 P
P,=0.I P

" -----------------
M2=0.1P (2L)/4=0.05 PL
M2=0.5 P (L74)=0.125 PL

L z= 2 L

case Li/L2=2 case Li/L2 =1

Fig. 3.3 Bending moment and load distribution for different paneled beams

74
3.3 Code Provisions
• The paneled beams could either be arranged in two perpendicular directions,
or in skew, triangular, or quadruple grids as shown in Fig. 3.4.
• All beams should have the same depth with a maximum rectangularity ratio
of 1.5
• The internal force in the paneled beams should be determined based on
structural analysis, equilibrium and compatibility. The use of any simplified
method to calculate the forces is valid as long as the solution is compatible
with the actual behavior.

"r " l —

Rectangular grid Skew grid

Triangular grids Quadruple grid

Fig. 3.4 Types o f paneled beams systems

75
3.4 Simplified Design Method
In the simplified method, the paneled beams floor of dimension Ll x Ls behaves as
two-way slab that has rectangularily ratio r=LL/Ls. This two-way slab consists of a
system of intersecting beams surrounding a number of two-way slabs of smaller
dimensions. The design process consists of two steps namely

1. Design of the small solid slabs to resist the loads directly transferred to them
2. Design of the floor beams having dimensions Ll x Ls as follows
• Assume the dimensions of the beams
• Calculate the design loads
• Distribute the design loads
• Design of paneled beams in both the short and long directions
• Design of edge beams

a-Beam dimensions
The thickness of the paneled beams is usually assumed as a ratio form the short span
as follows

short span (Ls) n

t~ 12-16 ......................................................
Since the thickness (t) of the beams in both directions is the same, the reinforcement in
the short direction is the main direction and the effective depth equals the beam
thickness minus the cover as shown in Fig. 3.5. Reinforcement running in the long
direction (secondary direction) is placed on the top of the main reinforcement and the
effective depth equals the thickness minus the cover and the bar diameter of the main
direction as shown in Fig. 3.5.

Mu

Fig. 3.5 Cross-section in paneled beams floor

76
b- Design loads
The self-weight of the beams is assumed to be uniformly distributed over the floor.
The average weight o f the beams equals

ow b = yc xbx(t - ts) x n>xLA +n2xLs (kN/m2) (3.8.A)

Ll x Ls
To obtain the total loads of the system, beams self-weight is added to the slab self­
weight, flooring, partitions, and live loads.
wu =l.4x(ow ll +ts xyc ^flooring +partitons) +l.6 w u (kN/m2) (3.8.B)
where yc = 25 k N /m 3

c-Distribution of design loads

In the simplified method, a portion of the load transferred to the beams is determined
according to the overall rectangularity ratio of the slab. The transferred load in the
short direction is much higher than that transferred in the long direction and is
determined using Table 3.1.
Ll
r =—
Ls
W»a=WuXa Wufi=™uXP

d-Design of paneled beams

The design of paneled beams is carried out similar to that of regular beams. However,
the distribution of the moments is obtained by assuming that the deflection of the slab
is in the form of a sin curve. The bending moments developed in each beam is the
ratio between the deflection at this location to the deflection at mid span.
For example if we have the paneled beams slab shown in Fig. 3.6 with four beams
running in the short direction and three beams running in the long direction, the
developed bending moment equals
L2 L2
M bi =wux a —— sin(0,) M g2 =wux a sin(02)
8 8

L 2 L 1
M B3 = w „x ^ -i-sin ((9 3) MB4= wux / 3 - ± - x 1.0
o o
e-Design of edge beams
The thickness of the edge beams is usually equal to or greater than that of the paneled
beams. The load distribution on edge beams is affected greatly by the support
conditions. If the floor is supported on the comers only, the overall slab is considered
supported directly on the edge beam as shown in Fig. 3.7.A . On the other hand, if the
paneled beams rest directly on supports, the reaction of the beams is carried directly
by the columns. In this case, the load on the edge beam can be estimated as one half
the load of the parallel beams as shown in Fig. 3.7.

77
 L s/2

e4=90 a =— —x90= 45>

LJ2

Fig. 3.6 Load distribution and deflection of paneled beams system

78
 A-no intermediate columns B-paneled beams that are not rested
directly on columns

s 2/2

1
Sj/2—

U iL -
Wa ( s 2/2)
i u i rn ji
C-paneled beams are rested directly
on intermediate columns

Fig. 3.7 Effect o f column location on load distribution of edge beams

79
Photo 3.2 Main hall at the Faculty o f Architecture Sao Paolo University 1969

Photo 3.3 Ethical Society -entry hall- Missouri-USA

3.5 Design of Skew Paneled Beams
The Egyptian code allows the use of paneled beams that are not perpendicular to each
other or that are not parallel to the hall (skew grid). The simplified method discussed
in the previous section can not be used in designing skew girds. Structural analysis
programs can be used to compute the bending moment and shear developed in the
skew system in this case. Alternatively, for a relatively small number of beams, hand
calculations can be carried out using equilibrium of forces and compatibility of
deflections. For example, for the square hall shown in Fig. 3.8, the beams are
perpendicular to each other but are not parallel to the hall directions. Due to
symmetry, the problem has only 4 unknowns, which is the percent of loading
distributed in each direction (PI 1, P I2, P31, P32). At points 2 and 4 due to symmetry,
the load transferred in the two directions is the same (i.e. 50%, P/2). The load acting at
each intersection (joint) can be approximated by
P = w uxaxb
This load is divided between each two perpendicular beams. For example, at point 1
and 3, the equilibrium equation is
P = Pn +Pl2 (pointl)
P = P 3l+P32 (point3)

The deflection at any point can be easily obtained using the principle of superposition.
The compatibility of deflection at point 1 and 3 gives
Ai (beam B3)=Ai (beam B l) (pointl)
A3(beam B3)=A3 (beam B2) (point3)
Solving this set of equations gives the loads and bending moment at each beam.

P„ P31 P/2 P31 P„

A, A,
As A4 Aj
Beam B3

P/2 P32 P/2

a2 a 3 a 2

Beam B2
P l2

Beam Bl
A,
Fig. 3.8 Structural analysis of skew paneled beams
81
Example 3 .1
For the hall shown in figure, it is required to design rectangular paneled beams system
to cover the roof, knowing that
f a r 30 N/mm2
.£=400 N/mm2
Loads due to flooring=2.0 kN/m2
Live loads=3.0 kN/m2

13.0 m

j 6.50 m j 6.50 m |

Solution
Step 1: Roof layout
The Hall is divided into small slabs spanning between (3-4 m in each direction).
Assuming three beams spanning in the longitudinal direction (four spacing) and four
beams spanning in the shorter direction (five spacing) gives

C. = — = 3 .2 5 w and C , = — = 3 .4 0 m
4 2 5

82
 ___________ 13.0 m________ _
C,=3.25 3.25 3.25 3.25

©
(51)
©

Step 2: Design of solid slabs

Since the slab is relatively small (3.4 x 3.25), assume ts=100 mm
wus=1.4 gs+1.6 ps=1.4 (ys x tj + flooring)+1.6 x live loads
w„s =1.4x(25x0.10 + 2) + 1.6x3 = ll.l/WV/m2
The slab load distribution factors are determined using table (6-1) in the code.
w a= wusx a = ( l l . l ) a

W(j=wusx p = ( l l . l ) p
The rectangularity ratio r is given by
r my xL y

where m equals 1, 0.87, and 0.76 for simple, continuous from one end and continuous
from both ends respectively

The following table summarizes the results

Slab u mx Ly my r a P wa Wp

SI 3.25 0.87 3.4 0.87 1.046 0.37 0.32 4.141 3.550

S2 3.25 0.76 3.4 0.87 1.198 0.45 0.24 4.982 2.709
S3 3.25 0.87 3.4 0.76 1.094 0.40 0.29 4.408 3.245
S4 3.25 0.76 3.4 0.76 1.046 0.37 0.32 4.141 3.550

83
The bending moment for each slab is taken according to code coefficients given in
figure below

-24 -10 -12 i

A +10 ^ +12 ^ +12 ^

d (main direction) mm—85 mm

^ (secondary direction) ts-25mm—75 mm
For high grade steel the minimum area of steel equals

A ,aia = — Z>X£?= — xl000x85 = 127.5 mm2

fy 400

The following table summarizes the results of the bending moment in x direction and
y-directions
X -D irectio n

Slab Lx wx Mx d R 00 As As As
(m) kN/m' kN.m (mm) mm2/m' chosen chosen

SI 3.25 4.141 4.374 85 0.0202 0.024 151.4 5<D8/m' 251.3

S2 3.25 4.982 4.385 85 0.0202 0.024 151.8 508/m ' 251.3
S3 3.25 3.245 3.427 75 0.0203 0.024 134.5 508/m' 251.3
S4 3.25 4.141 3.645 85 0.0168 0.020 127.5* 508/m' 251.3

Y -D irectio n

Slab Ly wy My d R © As As As
(m) kN/m' kN.m (mm) mm2/m' chosen chosen

SI 3.4 3.550 4.104 75 0.0243 0.029 161.8 53>8/m' 251.3

S2 3.4 2.709 3.131 75 0.0186 0.022 127.5* 5<D8/m' 251.3
S3 3.4 4.408 4.246 85 0.0196 0.023 146.9 50>8/m' 251.3
S4 3.4 3.550 3.420 75 0.0203 0.024 134.2 54>8/m' 251.3
* the minimum reinforcement (Asmin) controls the design
Step 3: Design of the paneled beams roof
Step 3.1: Assume concrete dimensions
Assume that the depth of the beams is shorter span/14
t = 13.0/14 = 0.93m >Take t=950 mm and b=300 mm

84
Step 3.2: Calculate design loads
The self-weight of the beams is averaged over the slab using

, . . n . x L . + n , xLj
0 Wu = y x b x ( t - t , ) x —'■
------ !------ 1------ -
b ,c K L xx L 2
. . 300 (950-100) 3x17 + 4x13 2
o w , = 25x------x-i------------ - x ---------------- = 2.97 kN Itn
1 1000 1000 17x13

wu = 1.4 x o .w o f beams (kN / m2)+ wus ( k N/ m2)

wu = 1 . 4 x 2 . 9 7 + 1 1 .1 = 1 5 .2 6 k N / m2

Step 3.3: Distribution of the design loads

To determine the distribution of the load in both directions, use the total size of the
hall not the individual slab dimension

r=Longs^n = 17=13o7<i5 o.k

Short span 13
From Table 3.1, it can be determined that
a=0.746 and p=0.253, thus
w a = 0 .7 4 6 x 1 5 .2 6 = 1 1 .3 9 k N /m 2, th is lo a d is fo r b e a m s in th e s h o rt d ire c tio n (1 3 m )

W|)= 0 .2 5 3 x 1 5 .2 6 = 3 .8 7 k N /m 2, th is lo a d is f o r b e a m s in th e lo n g d ir e c tio n (1 7 m )

6.5m
3.25m

B2
-J-B

B1
CO
a OQ a

B1

B2

B5

-4 5 0 = 9O 0 -4 5

85
Step 3.4: Design of paneled beams
Step 3.4.1: Design of beam B1 (short direction)
Design beam B1 for flexure
Since beam B1 is spanning in the short direction, the load considered for design is wa
The compatibility angle 0 equals the ratio of its distance relative to the centerline of
the hall, thus

0 = — x90 = 72°
8.5

wub= wa x spacing x sin 0

= 11.39 x 3.4 x sin(72) = 36.83 kN/ m'

36.83 x!32
-=

w„/,=36.82 kN/m'
bending
Loads i' i u r n u .j .JH -U L i
£ Mb
13.0

-24 -24
Moment
factors +8 ~ ~ ^b

259.34 259.34

Bending
moment

778

Critical
sections
~~£&b
© ©
Beam B1

86
Section 1
This section has positive bending (778 kN.m), the compression flange form a T-
section. The effective width equals

16t,+ b = 16x100 + 300 = 1900 mm

L , 13x1000
B = smaller o f —+b = ---------- + 300 = 2900 mm
5 5
CLtoCL =3400 mm

B=1900 mm
Using the C l-J curve

rf = Cl Mu

778 xlO6
900 = C1 Cl=7.7
130x1900
The point is outside the curve use c/d)mjn=0.125
c=0.125x 900=112.5 mm
a=0.8 x 112.5 = 90 mm <ts ..... o.k.
use j=0.825
Mu 778 xlO6
A = ----- ------------------------------- = 2616 mm
j x d x f y 0.825x900x400

Q-225 b d = Q-225V30 x x = 2
smaller o f fy 400
13A = 1.3 x 2616 = 340 Im m 2

use (4022+4020, As=2777 mm2)

As'=(0.1-0.2) As choose (3016, 603 mm )
Section 2

24 24

i? s 259. 34x10* = 0 0 355

/J W 2 30x300x900

From the curve it can be determined that ®=0.043

87
 f 30
As = ® ^ -6 x < / = 0.043 ~ x 3 0 0 x 900 = 870mw2 >Asmi„
fy 400

use (4 <I>20, 1256 mm2)

Design Beam B1 for Shear

The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support. Assuming that
column width (c) is 500 mm

g
2
(—+—) = 36'- 3x— -36.83
2 2 2
f
{ 2 2 )
213.6 kN

g„ 213.6x1000 2
q„ = = -------------- = 0.791 N/mm
“ bx.d 300x900
The concrete shear strength is given by

qcu = 0.24 fcu__=n0.24

o/i J — _=1.07N/mm
1 m m
v1.5 Vi;5
Since qu<qcu the beam is considered safe, provide minimum area o f stirrups
Assuming spacing o f200 mm and using mild steel f y=240 N/mm2

dsl mm= ——b x j = x 300x 200 = 100 mm2

s,'mm f y 240

Assuming 2 branches, the area of one branch equals

As/J = = 50 mm1 choose <j>8 (50 mm2)

Use 5<j)8/m'
Step 3 .4 .2 : Design o f Beam B3 (longitudinal)
Design Beam B3 for flexure

Since this beam spanning in the long direction, the load considered is wp(3.87 kN/m2).
The compatibility angle 0 equals the ratio of the its distance relative to the distance of
centerline of the hall, thus

0 = M x9O = 9O0
6.5
w ui, - W^ Xspacing xsin<9=3.87x3.25xsin(90) = 1 2 . 5 8 / m'
 wub=12.58 kN/m'
bending
I I I . 1 i 1 11 I H I 1. 1 1 1 1
Loads A A t
i . ]7 0 r1
1 1
-24 -24
Moment
factors Jnb +8 A-

151.5 151.5

Bending
moment

454.45

Critical
sections,

©
~7L
©
Beam B3

Section 1
.. w ubx L z 12.58xl72
M„ = —- ------= --------------= 454.45 kN .m
8 8

This section has positive bending (454.45 kN.m), the compression flange form a T-
section.
16/,+6 = 16x100 + 300 = 1900 mm J
L w 17x1000
B = smaller o f —+b = — ?------ + 300 = 3700 mm
5 5
CLtoCL = 3250 mm

B=1900 mm
Because the steel in the longitudinal direction is placed on top of the steel in the short
direction, the depth is less than the transverse direction by approximately 50 mm.
d= 850 mm
Using the C l-J curve

89
850>==CCl 1J ^— —>C1=9. 52
30x1900
The point is outside the curve use c/d)mi„=0.125 u se j=0.825
c=0.125 x 850=106.25 mm
a=0.8 x 106.25 = 85 mm <ts .....o.k.
M. 454.45 xlO6 2
■* " - = 1620 mm
s j* d x fy 0.825 x 850x 400

0.225 J f Z b d = 0.225 >/30_ x 3QQx g50 —786 m m 2 J < A, o.k

'‘ismin = smaller o f fy 400
1.3 As =1.3x1620 = 2106mm2
use (5022,1900 mm2)
As'=(0.1-0.2) As choose (2016,400 mm2)

Section 2
Wj xL2 12.58xl72
= — ----- = ------------- = 151.5 WV.m
24 24

R=- . = I 51 - * 1- — = 0.0233
/ c„6rf2 30x300x850
From the curve it can be determined that co=0.028
f 30
,4 ^ - b xrf = 0.028—
0.028 — x300x850 = 535 mm2
fy 400

d = - 2~ ? — x 300 x 850 = 786 mm2

Asn,m = smaller o f fy 400
1.3,4. =1.3x535 = 696mm2 J > AS (check 0.15/100b d )

But not less than — - x 300 x 850 = 382.5 m m u

100

Use A s,mjn (696 mm2)-*-►use (2 ® 22, 760 mm2)

Design of Beom B3 for Shear

Since beam B1 (which have more load than beam B3) requires minimum stirrups for
shear, provide minimum stirrups as well for beam B3(5(j>8/m')

90
Step 3.4.3:.Design of Beam B2 and B4
Beam B2 Beam B4
Item short direction long direction
Wu 11.39 3.87
spacing (m) 3.40 3.25
9 36 45
wub=wu x spacing x sin (0) kN/m' 22.76 8.89
span (m) 13 17
Mu=wub L2/8 (kN.m) 480.86 321.48
B (mm) 1900 1900
Cl 9.8 11.3
c/d (=c/d,min) 0.125 0.125
a (mm) 90 <ts 85 <ts
J 0.825 0.825
d (mm) 900 850
As (mm2) 1616 1144
No of bars 5022 6016
Shear design 5<j)8/m' 5<|>8/m'

Step 4: Design of edge beams

Step 4.1: Design of edge beam B5
The load distribution on the supporting beams is shown in figure below.

B5

I"™ 6.50 m " | ' 6.50 m

91
The load on each beam will be calculated using the area method because the load is
not symmetrical between each two successive supports.
The thickness of this beam should be at least the thickness of the paneled beams, thus
try a beam cross section (250 x 950 mm)
Ultimate beam self weight =1.4 yc b t
w0„ = 1.4 x 25 x 0.25 x 0.95 = 8.31 kN / m'
area o f the triangular 0.5x6.5x6.5 ,
ws!„i, ~ wu x ------- ------------ ------- = 15.26x------------------= 49.6 kN/m
span 6.5
wu—wow+ wstah =8.31+49.6=57.9 kN/m'
Since the beam has an equal loads and spans, the code coefficients for continuous
beam with two spans can be used
Design of beam B5 for flexure
Section 1
M = — - = — - x~6- - = 271.84 kN.m

Slab
load

Wui,=57.9 kN/m ’
Ultimate
load w i ni r n 'o n : n: i dm,
6.5 6.5

-24 -9 -24
Moment
factors | mmV
ittn n f | jb il
/TTTrTTT

271.84

101.9 101.9
Bending
moment

222.4 222.4

Critical
sections JK.

© © © ©
92
Since this section is subjected to negative bending, it will be designed as rectangular
section
, = ^ =^ ;g4* l ^ = 0 0447
f cubd 30x250x900
From the curve it can be determined that co=0.054

4 ® Z>x = 0.054 — x 250 x 900 = 916 mm2 >A* min

fy 400 ’

use (5 <D 16, 1005 mm2)

Section 2
wuhxL2 57.9 x6.52
= 222.4 kN.m
11 11

This section has positive bending (222.4 kN.m), the compression flange form a L-
section.
6t'+ b =6x100 + 250 = 850 mm
0.8x6.5x1000
B = smaller of ± +b - + 250 = 770 mm J
10 10
CLtoCL =1700 mm

B=770 mm
Using the C l-J curve

d = Cl
fcuB

222.4 xlO6
900 = Cl Cl=9.17
30x770
The point is outside the curve use c/d)niin=0.125
c=0.125x 900=112.5 mm
a-0.8 x 112.5 = 90 mm < tj..... o.k.
use j=0.825
M„ 222.4 xlO6
A=- - = 748 mm
jx d x f 0.825x900x400

0.225-v/30
x 250x900 = 693mm2 J <A. ok
Asui« = smaller o f 400
1.3A, =1.3x748 =972.4m m 2

use (4016, 804 mm )

93
Design of Beam B5 for shear
The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support. Assuming that
column width (c) is 250 mm

Wuh-57.9 kN/m'
ultimate
Loads
U .I l l .L X L I T X t~m
6.5 6.5

Shear q.40 0.60 0.60 0.40

factors JA ~ ~ ^ fr
critical

Shear
force

Qu = 0.6 xw,, xL = 225.8-57.9 = 192.5 kN

Qu 192.5x1000 noC£XII 2
q„ = — — = ---------:------ = 0.856 N l mm
“ bxd 250x900
The concrete shear strength is given by

qcu =°.24| S = ().2 4 | ^ = 1.07W /™ 2

Since q„<qCu the beam is considered safe, provide minimum area of stirrups
Assuming spacing of 200 mm and using mild steel f y—240 N/mm2
0.4 , 0.4
= --- o x i = -----:
Jf y 240

Assuming 2 branches, the area of one branch equals

83.33
A,h = = 41.67 mm choose <j)8 (50 mm ), Choose 5 <j>8/m'

94
Step 4.2 Design of Beam B6
w0„ = 1.4 x 25 x 0.25 x 0.95 = 8.31 kN / m'
The weight of the slab will be divided in two parts
area o f the triangular(A,) 0.5x5.67x5.67 ,
w. =w x ------ ----------- 2 -----^-^- = 15.26x------------------ = 43.26 kN I m
span 5.67
wu/=wi+w0w =43.26 + 8.31=51.5 kN/m'

area o f A2 4.01x6.5 +2x0.5(5.67+ 6.5)x 0.83 ,

w, = w x--------—- = 15.26x----------------------------------------- = 97.33 kN I m
span 5.67
wu2=w2+wow=97.33 + 8.31=105.64 kN/m' •

Since the beam is equal in spans but the load magnitude differs by more than 20%,
code coefficient can not be used. For simplicity, pattern loading was not considered.
Using three moment equations to solve the indeterminate beam, applying the equation
at b
MaLj +2 Mb (L i+L2) + Mc L2=-6(Rba+Rbc)
The elastic reaction Rab and Rbc equals

24 24
From symmetry Mb=Mc and Ma=0, substituting in the moment equation gives

0+ 2 Mb (5.67+5.67) + M„ (5.67)= -6 (391.15+802)

Mb= - 252.4 kN.m

... , . . . 51.5x5.672 252.4

M(+ve)span(ab) = ----------------------- -- 80.7 kN.m

M(+ve)span(bc) = —- - * — 252.4 = 171.9 kN.m

95
 5.67- 5.67 ■5.67-

252.4 252.4

Critical
sections 'A A hr A /A-
© © ©

Design of beam B6 for flexure

Section 1
M„=252.4 JcN.m (rectangular section)

252.4 xlO6
R= = 0.0415
fjb d 2 30x250x9002

From the curve it can be determined that co=0.050

f ”-50
A. = ® ^ b x d = 0.05 — x 250x 900 = 843.75 mm2
fy 400

0.225>/30
x 250x 900 = 693 m m 2 J < A , o.k
Asmn = smaller o f 400
1.3,4. = 1.3x843 =1095mw2
use (2 <D 16+2 0 18, 911 mm2)

96
Section 2
This section has positive bending (171.9 kN.m), the compression flange forms re­
section.
6ts +b =6x100 + 250 = 850 mm
L2 , 0.7x5.67x1000 ' , . cn
B = smaller of - L +b =------------------- + 250 = 646.9 mm J
10 10
CL toCL =1700 mm

B=646.9mm

Using the C l-J curve

fj*

900 = C l j 171.9x10 Cl=9.56

30x646.9
The point is outside the curve use c/d)mi„=0.125
c=0.125 x 900=112.5 mm
a=0.8 x 112.5 = 90 mm <ts .....o.k.
use j=0.825
171.9x10
A.=- = 578 mm
jx d x f, 0.825x900x400

0.225^30
x 250x900 = 693 mm J
4 mi„ = smaller of 400
1.3A, =1.3x578 = 752 mm2

As < As,mill use As,min (693 mm2)

use (2 0 16+2 0 18, As=911 mm2)

97
Design of Beam B6 for shear
Since the loading on the beam is not equal on all spans, code shear coefficients can not
be used. The maximum shear is at section middle span (be) thus, the maximum shear
can be obtained from the structural analysis of the beam.

252.4 wui=IQ5.6kN/m' .. _ 252.4

Loads

5.67
299.3 299.3

Shear

The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support(b). Assuming that
column width (c) is 250 mm
. D A c . 105.6x5.67 l n c ,f0 .9 0.25)
G„ = * (j + 2> = --------2---------- [ T + ~ J =

Q„ 2 3 8 .6 x 1 0 0 0 2
q = — — = --------------------= 1 .0 6 Nl mm
“ bxd 250x900

concrete shear strength is given by

a = 0.24
V1.5= 0.24 JV—1.5= 1.07N lmm1
Since qu<qcu the beam is considered safe, provide minimum area of stirrups
Assuming spacing o f200 mm and using mild steel f =240 N/mm2
na na
A„ ~ b x s = — x 2 5 0 x 2 0 0 = 8 3 .3 3 mm2
f 240

Choose 5 <j>8/m'

98
 B5

17.00 m

3.25 3.25 3.25 3.25

13.00 m

Reinforcement details

99
 3<D16

i
2012

2012

40>20+
4022

300 300 1
Sec 2 in Beam B3 (longitudinal direction) Sec 1 in BeamBl (short direction)

Reinforcement details for beams B1 and B3

100
101
4
FLAT SLABS

Photo 4.1 Flat slab system

4.1 Introduction

Flat plates are one of the most commonly used structural systems in residential
buildings, hotels, commercial buildings, hospitals and office buildings. Flat plates are
solid concrete slabs of uniform thickness that transfer the load directly to the columns
without the presence of projected beams, drop panels or column capitals as shown in
Fig. 4.1. A. The ease of construction is one of the important aspects that make flat slab
systems a very attractive solution. Architects prefer this system because the flexibility
in the arrangement of columns and partitions with no obstruction of light. In addition,
the absence of sharp comers gives greater fire resistance, as there is less danger of the
concrete spalling and exposure of the reinforcement.

102
The major concern when using flat plates is shear transfer from the slab to the
columns. In other words, there is a danger that columns may punch through the slab.
Therefore, if live loads exceed 3 kN/m2, it is advisable to use drop panels at the
column locations as shown in Fig. 4.I.B. The use of the drop panels increases the
negative flexural capacity at locations of high negative bending and reduces the risk of
shear failure. Moreover, if the live loads exceed 6 kN/m2, it is recommend to use
column heads as shown in Fig 4.I.C. In case of excessively heavy live loads (>10
kN/m2) such as in the case of industrial buildings and warehouses, the use of drop
panels together with column heads is necessary as shown in Fig. 4.I.D.

A-Flat plate

C-Flat slab with column head

Fig. 4.1 Types of flat slabs

The use of drop panels and column heads is more acceptable in parking garages,
storage buildings, and similar structures.

103
4.2 Statical Equilibrium of Flat Slabs
The floor shown in Fig. 4.2 consists of individual concrete strips that form a slab. The
two beams support the concrete strips at their edges. Assume that the total load of the
strips including self-weight equals wu (kN/m2). The moment per meter at mid-span
(section A-A) equals
m ..............:........................................ (4.D
8
The total moment in X-direction for the entire slab equals

...............................................(4.2)
8
The reaction of the slab per meter is

R =W“ V' - 1- ..........................................................(4.3)

The moment at mid span of the beam in Y-direction is

................................... (4-4)
8

The total moment for both beams equals

..................... ............................... (4-5)

Fig. 4.2 Analysis o f individual concrete strips supported on beams

104
It is clear that the full load transferred by the concrete strips causes a moment in the
X-direction of the slab and the full load is transferred again by the beams causing
bending moment in Y-direction. This system of transferring the load is similar to a flat
slab system supported on four columns. The total moment in X-direction equals

(w , x £,,) x L 2
.(4.6)
8
and the total moment in Y-direction equals

(wu *L2) x L]
.(4.7)

It can be concluded that whether the structural system is slab-beam system or flat
slabs as shown in Fig.4.3, the load is transferred in both directions. By comparing
Equations 4.6 and 4.7, it can be noticed that the largest moment develops in the longer
span direction.

Fig. 4.3 Analysis of a fiat plate system

4.3 Minimum Dim ensions According to ECP 203

The Egyptian code requires certain minimum dimensions for different elements of the
flat slab system. These minimum requirements are summarized in Fig. 4.4.

105
Slab Thickness(ts)
150 mm

t. the bigger of'

Ll 32 without drop
L/36 with drop
where L is the longer span
Drop thickness (td)

Drop width (S)

underconsideration

_
Lz(smcdler
_
span)

Column width (b)

20
b the bigger of- y j (H =floor h e ig h t )

300 mm"
* The width of the column may be taken equal to 250 mm provided that detailed
column moment transfer calculations were performed
Column head width (D)
D<-
4
Column Strip width (Cs)
<45°
i without drop

Drop width (S) with drop

K
Field Strip width (Fs)
*Fs =f under consideration ~ C s

Marginal beam thickness (t)

t>3l*

Fig. 4.4 Minimum flat slab dimensions according to ECP 203

106
 Marginal beam Exterior column
t

-P =^F

Column strip

Exterior span
a ►
j
*J5 Field strip

!
Lj/4 L,/4

Interior span
w
U - L 2/2 L ,-W 2

Exterior span Interior span

Flat slab without drop panel

I
I

Exterior span
Field strip
c o lu m n s trip J
=drop width
txjz
£3-p_
-a?------
i-S
Interior span

L,-S, L,-S,

L, L, ~
Exterior span Interior span

Flat slab with drop panel

Fig. 4.4 Minimum flat slab dimensions (cont.)

107
4.4 Analysis of Flat Slabs
Flat Slabs may be analyzed and designed by any method that ensures that all the
strength and serviceability requirements of the ECP 203 are satisfied. When slabs are
supported on a rectangular grid of columns, the code offers two simplified methods
for analyzing the flat slab system. The first method is the direct design method and the
second one is the equivalent frame method. These two methods, which are mentioned
in section 6~2-5-3 of the ECP 203, will be discussed in detail in the following sections.
In addition, if the slabs have unusual geometric ,configurations or the columns are
spaced irregularly, neither of the code methods becomes applicable. For these special
cases, the designer may analyze the floor by using finite element analysis (computer
model), in which the slab is divided into small finite elements connected by nodes.
The stiffness matrix of each element is computed and the global stiffness matrix is
constructed. Having determined the deformation at each node, the element internal
forces can be evaluated (refer to Section 4.10 of this text).

4.5 Direct Design Method

4.5.1 Lim itation of the direct method
To ensure that the moments at the critical sections are adequate, the ECP 203 requires
that the following design conditions be satisfied:
1. A minimum of three continuous spans in each direction.
2. The ratio of the longer to the shorter span within a panel should not exceed 1.3
3. Successive span lengths in each direction should not differ by more than 10%
4. Non-Successive span lengths in each direction should not differ by more than 20%
4.5.2 Definition of column strip and field strip
The distribution of moment varies continuously across the width of the slab panel. To
simplify the steel arrangement, the design moments are averaged over the width of the
column strip.
The column strip width should be taken as Vi the short direction for flat slabs without
drop panels. In the case of flat slab with drop panel, the column strip width equals the
drop width. The width of the field strip equals the difference between span length and
column strip width as shown in Fig. 4.5.
4.5.3 Calculation of slab load
The calculation of the slab load is carried out in a similar manner like solid slabs.
However, since the brick walls are often distributed over the plan, an average wall
load wwis added to the design loads as follows:

w b» y'wal1 lenSth (4 iz )
area o f thefloor

108
The ultimate loads for flat slabs without drop is
w „ = 1.4 x (ts x Tz +w>on.„s +w „ ) +1.6 xw u ..........................(4.8.b)
In case of flat slabs with drop, the drop weight is considered by averaging the area of
the drop over the total area of the slab then multiplying by concrete weight as follows
S .x S 2
™top ................................................. (4.9)

The ultimate loads for flat slabs with drop is

= \A x{t, xyc +wllmp +w/looring +w „) + 1.6xwu ...............(4.10)

(yc =25 kN Im 3and ts in meters)

Clone direction.')
A. Flat slab without drop
Lz/2 field strip=Lr Lj/2 L2/2

Si-column strip width in the short direction.

S2=colutnn strip width in the long direction.
td= drop thickness

I
- i F- - S. •

§ ...
T
i.

i
i
- —drop panel i
r
1
I -J&—
I
p .. T
i
i
B. Flat slab with drop L. Clone direction1. _ J !
t

Si Field strip=Li- Si S,

Fig. 4.5 Definition of column and field strips

109
4.5.4 Statical Moment M„
The direct design method is an empirical procedure for establishing the design
moments at the critical sections. It is well known that the sum of the negative moment
at the supports and positive moment at midspan of a uniformly loaded beam is wuLz/8.
Accordingly, for a uniformly loaded slab with width L2, and span L|, the total statical
moment M0 equals

.(4.11)
To account for the effect of supports on the value of the bending moment, the code
gives the following equation for Ma calculations

M„ xfz,, - - *— | (long direction).............(4.12)

M a = — ■ ~ Lx f l 2- ~ ~ ~ | (shortdirection) ............(4.13)

where D is the smallest distance at the intersection between the column and the slab. If
a supporting element does not have a rectangular cross section or if the sides of the
rectangle are not parallel to the span, it is to be treated as a square support having the
same area, as illustrated in Fig. 4.6.
The total static moment M0 is divided into a negative moment at the support Mc and a
positive moment at midspan Ms as follows

M+M. = M „ .(4.14)
Both Mc and Ms shall be distributed again between column and filed strips as
described in section 4.5.5.

j— D

Fig. 4.6 Definition o f D for different flat slab systems

110
4.5.5 Distribution of the Statical Moment
To simplify the analysis of flat slab floors, many design codes, including the ECP-
203, approximate the actual distribution of the transverse moments by two regions of
constant moment. The center strip, where the moment is the smallest, is called the
field strip or middle strip, and the strip in the column zones, where the moment is the
largest, is called the column strip.

The distribution of the moments between column strip and field strip can be
explained by examining Fig. 4.7. Beam A represents the column strip while beams B
and C represent the field strip. Since beam A is rested directly on columns, beams B is
supported on beam A. If all of the beams are subjected to uniform load w, the
developed bending moment in beam A is larger than that in beam B. This is because
beam A carries the same uniform load w in addition to the reaction wL/2 from Beam
B. For an actual flat slab, the ratio of column strip moment to field strip moment is
variable and depends on the rectangularity ratio and the flexural stiffness of the
exterior beams (if any) along the building perimeter.

Fig. 4.7 Representation of column and field strips

The total statical moment Ma is divided into positive and negative moments according
to the rules given in ECP-203 sec. 6-2-5-5. In the interior spans, 60% of M0 is
distributed to the negative moment region and 40% to the positive moment region as
shown in Fig.; 4.8. This is approximately the case for a beam fixed from both ends and
uniformly loaded where the negative moment is (yvL2/12) 67% and the positive
moment is (wL2/24) 33% of the total moment of wL2/8.

Ill
The distribution of the negative moment between column strip and field strip varies
according to the stiffness of the edge beam. If the edge beam depth is less than three
times the slab thickness, only 25% of Ma is assigned to column strip as shown in Fig.
4.8.
In the case of floors that differ in spans (within 20% difference), the negative moment
section of the slab is designed for the larger of the two-moments unless a moment
distribution is carried out. Table 4.1 and Fig 4.9 give the distribution of M0 between
column and field strip according to the Egyptian Code.

With marginal beam

mb 25%
30%

10% 20% 15%

Field strip
A With marginal beam
20% 15%

Fig. 4.8 Distribution ofM„between column and field strip

112
Table 4.1 Distribution of M„between column and field strip
Strip type Marginal Exterior bay Interior bay
beam -ve moment +ve moment -ve moment -ve moment +ve moment
(external) (internal)
Column no beam 25 30 50 45 25
strip with 20
beam*
Field no beam 5 20 20 15 15
strip with 10
beam*

* the depth of the marginal beam should be at least =3 ts

Column strip -ve moment = 45%

Negative moment

Field strip-ve moment = 15%

Column strip +ve moment =25%

Field strip +ve moment = 15%

A: M om ent distribution in interior panels (with o r without m a r g i n a l beam)

Column strip -ve moment = (20%+50%)/2=35%

Negative moment
Field strip -ve moment = (10%+20%)/2= 15%

Column strip +ve moment =30%

Field strip +ve moment = 20%

B: Moment distribution in exterior panels with marginal beam

Fig. 4.9 Distribution Moment in flat slabs using the direct design method

113
4.5.6 Moment Correction
The distribution of M0 between the field strip and the column strip, as proposed by
ECP 203, is based on the assumption that the widths of the column strip and the field
strip are as shown in Fig.4.10a. If the field strip width is different from the ideal
length as shown in Fig. 4.10b, a correction needs to be made. The moment in the field
strip needs to be increased by multiplying their original value by the correction factor
given in Table 4.2. In addition, the moment in the column strip is reduced so that the
total bending is the same in either case as shown by the following equations.

A dual width o f F S .
.(4.15)
Ideal width o f F S .

M,C S.(corrected) ~ F S iid e d ) + ^ c s {Ueal) j M F S .{corrected)

< .(4.16)

where the actual width and ideal length are given in table 4.2

Table 4.2 Actual width and ideal length in field strip.

Direction Ideal width Actual width Correction factor
Long direction W2 L2-S2 L 2/2
(L2-S2)
Short direction L,-L2/2 L,-S, L, - L,/2
(L,-S|)

L,-S, S.
L,- L2/2 Lj/2
Long direction

a. Ideal b. Actual
Fig. 4.10 Moment correction for field strip in flat slabs with drop panels
114
4.5.7 Provision for Pattern Loading
If the slab is subjected to heavy live loads, negative moments shall form at midspan in
addition to the positive bending moments. If the live load ip) is greater than 1.5 the
dead loads (g), the negative bending in column strip in L] direction can be estimated
as follows

(4.17)

and negative moment in the field strip in Li direction is

(4.18)

where
Lj = span in direction 1 (refer to Fig. 4.5)
L2 = span in direction 2
D = width of the column at slab intersection (refer to fig. 4.6)
p = uniform live loads
g = uniform dead loads

4.5.8 Design Steps According to the Direct Design Method

The steps necessary to perform the designs are briefly summarized as follows:
1- Choose the appropriate flat slab system according to the intensity of the live
load and the architectural requirements.
2- Estimate the slab thickness according to code requirements
3- Calculate the total static moment to be resisted in the two directions.
4- Distribute the static moment between column strip and field strip.
5- Divide the resulting moments by strip width to obtain the moment per meter.
6- Design the sections to select the reinforcement.
7- Design the slab for punching shear.
Examples 1 and 2 illustrate the use of this method as applied to flat slabs with and
without drop panels. If the slab thickness is greater than 160 mm, an upper
reinforcement mesh should be provided to satisfy temperature and cracking
requirements by the code.

115
4.6 Reinforcement of Flat Slabs
4.6.1 G e n e ra l
Minimum bar extension requirements are given in Fig. 4.11 and Fig, 4.12. In addition,
to ensure the integrity of the flat slab floors, it is recommended that at least two
bottom bars in the column strip should run through the core of the column. The
minimum area of steel is given by

Photo 4.2 Menara Telekom, Kuala Lumpur, 310 meters, 55 stories, 2001
25th tallest building in the world

116
 Column strip_________________________________________________ Field strip_________ Column strip______ ________
Min distances limits B : Bottom reinforcement
T : Top reinforcement
b C d e L : Center line distance
Without drop panel
With drop panel___ _______ . ______ Ln/5 Ln/4.5 Ln/3.3 Ln/3 Ln :Clear distance

Fig.4-1 la Reinforcement layout of flat slabs using bars

117
 Column strip___________________________________________ . ____ Field strip_. _______ Column strip______ . _______ Fi
Bar length from the face o f the support B : Bottom reinforcement
Min length Max length T : Top reinforcement
C e L : Center line distance
Symbol b d f g Ln :Clear distance
Length 0.20Ln 0.22Ln 0.30Ln 0.33Ln 0.20Ln 0.24Ln
Without drop panel
.
With drop panel

Fig.4-1 lb Reinforcement layout of flat slabs using bent bars

118
 A Top reinforcement mesh
B Bottom reinforcement mesh
C Additional top reinforcement for column strip
D Additional bottom reinforcement for column strip

'I

. 0.25L 0.5L
-LQ1.
tf ? - 'I

(D) (D)
0.7L 0.2L 0.2L 0.6L
MV

(0.33-0.5) L 1
(A)
(A)
(A)
s(X
Min 75 mm
(B)
(B)

0.5L
J
0.25L
iQ — h h .
.£61___.
■f
►J _ J
o'
(D) (D)
(3
L% . 0.7L ..0.2 0.2L 0.6L

1 ■f
Wl

1C
J.

Fig. 4-12 Reinforcement layout o f flat slabs using mesh

119
4.6.2 Column Head Reinforcement
Column heads should be reinforced with bars in the directions 1 and 2 as shown in
Fig. 4.13. Closed stirrups should be provided to secure the reinforcement of the
column head in place. Column head reinforcement should be designed to resist
flexural moments resulting from either equivalent frame analysis or bending
transferred to columns. This reinforcement should not be less than 4% of the column
strip negative reinforcement per meter multiplied by the perpendicular span. In the
case of circular columns, the required reinforcement is the sum o f the two directions
and should be uniformly distributed along the perimeter.

span length =Li

Fig. 4.13 Reinforcement in column head

4
Area of reinforcement 1 =---- x A, / m 'x i , .............................................. (4.20)
100 * - ■
4
Area of reinforcement 12/ - 1 =----
A
xA,
s to ll
/m 'x
1
L . ................... ....................(4.21)'

120
4.6.3 Reinforcement at Openings in Flat Slabs
An opening of a size not more than 0.4 span length may be formed in the intersection
of the two middle strips as shown in Fig. 4.14 (zone A), provided that the total amount
of reinforcement required for the slab without the opening is maintained. However, at
the intersection of the two column strips, no more than one-tenth of the width of the
column strip in either span shall be interrupted by openings (zone C). Equivalent
amounts of reinforcement shall be added on the sides of the opening. In zone B, no
more than one-quarter of the reinforcement in either strip shall be interrupted by
openings. It should be noted that the ultimate shear capacity is reduced due to the
presence of the opening.

column strip, Csx field strip column strip, Csx

Fig. 4.14 Allowed opening dimensions and locations in flat slab systems
4.7 Punching Shear Strength of Flat Slabs
4.7.1 General
Punching shear strength is one of the most critical design aspects in determining the
flat slab thickness. There are two shear failure mechanisms that may be encountered in
a flat slab system. The first is the one-way shear similar to that in beams. This type
rarely controls the design of flat slab floors. The second is the two-way shear, in
which the failure surrounds the column forming a pyramid shape. Normally, the
stresses resulting from the two-way shear are much higher than that resulting from the
one-way shear.
Two-way shear failure mechanism is usually encountered in flat slab and footings.
Interior columns are generally subjected to shear with negligible moment transfer
from the slab to the columns. However, to ensure adequate shear strength, the
Egyptian code requires that part of the connecting moment be transferred between the
slab and the columns, resulting in additional punching shear.
The combination of shear and unbalanced moment is unavoidable at edge and comer
column locations and occurs at interior columns because of unequal spans and lateral
loads. Prevention of punching failure of column-slab connections transferring
moment depends on an accurate calculation of shear stresses produced by moment
transfer.
One of the most widely used analysis methods is based on summing the stresses
developed by vertical shear and the stresses developed by the unbalanced moments.
This detailed analysis is adopted by the ACI and the Egyptian code of practice.
However, the computational time required for such analysis is still costly and is not
suitable for routine design computations. The Egyptian code also offers a simplified
analysis method for calculating punching shear stress due to both gravity and moment
transferred to columns due to torsion. In this method, a magnification factor is used to
account for the portion transferred by the unbalanced moment

122
 1

4.7.2 Critical Sections

For both design methods, the critical section for punching shear is at d/2 from the face
of the column. Fig. 4.15 shows several examples of internal, external and comer
columns. If the openings are located less than 10 times the slab thickness, the code
requires that the critical perimeter be reduced as illustrated in Fig 4.16. In floors with
drop panels, two critical sections should be investigated as shown in Fig. 4.17.

a,=ci+d
ai=Ci+d

ai=Ci+d/2
I—-----------H

§
&

I critical shear perimeter

U=ai+ a2 +2 a3+2bl

Fig. 4.15 Critical shear perimeter for internal, exterior and corner columns

considered as
free edge

Fig.4.16. Critical sections for flat slabs with openings

123
 D+d D+d

cy-
'S T

Critical shear/ VCritical shear Critical shear/ , Critical shear

perimeter perim eter- perimeter perimeter

a ) F lat s la b w ith o u t d ro p b )F la t s la b w ith co lu m n

p a n e l o r c o lu m n head h e a d & w ith o u t d ro p p a n e l

P+d
c1+d1

J --------
t d1=d+td
Critical sh ear/ / \ \ Critical shear
perimeter 2 Critical shear/ c1 \ Critical shear perimeter 2
perimeter 1 ■ perimeter 1

c )F la t s la b w ith d ro p p a n e l
& w ithout c o lu m n h e a d

Drop width+d
D+d1

z . __r
90
d1=d+tc M
Critical s h e a r / ^Critical shear
perimeter 2 perimeter 2
Critical sheay VCritical shear
perimeter 1 perimeter 1

d )F la t s la b w ith d ro p p a n e l
& c o lu m n h e a d

Fig. 4.17 Critical shear perimeter in flat slab

124
4.7.3 Concrete Punching Shear Strength
The Egyptian code states that the smallest of the following three values represents the
concrete punching shear strength qcup

qmp =0.316 ( 0 . 5 + ~ ) x ^ .................................................. (4.22.A)

= 0.8 (~j~~ + 0.2) x ....... ...............................-........(4-22.B)

9cuP = 0.316 <1.6 N I m m 2 .............................................. (4.22.C)

where
a is the column dimension in the analysis direction,
b is the column dimension in the perpendicular direction,
a equals 4,3,2 for interior, exterior, comer column respectively.
b0 is the critical shear perimeter.

The applied shear stress, calculated using either the detailed analysis described in
section 4.7.4 or the simplified method described in section 4.7.5, should be less than
concrete punching shear strength qcup.

Photo 4.3 Flat slab and solid slabs during construction in Dubi

125
4.7.4 D e ta ile d A n a ly s is
4.7.4.1 Introduction
Concentric loading on flat slab systems as shown in Fig. 4.18, produces uniform
punching shear stress that can be calculated from Eq. 4.23

(4.23)

where
Qup is the ultimate design shear force.
b0 is the critical shear perimeter b0=2 [(a+d)+(b+d)]
d is the effective flat slab depth.

A Loaded area

A column
y'j critical shear
j perimeter

Fig. 4.18 Concentric shear stress calculations for interior column

The case of concentric loading is rarely encountered in real structures. Therefore, the
Egyptian code imposes a minimum amount of unbalanced moment that should be
transferred to columns. This amount varies according to the location of the column.
The moment transferred between slab and column, produce a complex behavior
involving flexure, shear and torsion.
4.7.4.2 C alculations of the Punching Stresses

Figure 4.19 illustrate the moment and shear transfer at interior and exterior columns,
where a shear and an unbalanced moment are transferred from the slab to column. A
fraction of the unbalanced moment transferred by flexure (yf Mj), where yf is
calculated from
1
(4.24)

in which

126
 Yf= fraction of the unbalanced moment transferred by flexure
c/= is the column dimension in the analysis direction
c2= is the column dimension in the perpendicular direction
d= depth of the flat slab
The moment transferred to the column by eccentric shear stress is (yq M f) where
rq=l-rf ....... ....................................... (4.25a)

r„x = 1 - r fx .(4.25b)

rw =l -r/y ............................................... (4.25c)

This moment causes additional shear stresses that have to be combined with those
resulting from the vertical shear. The code requires that the moment transferred be
taken as 50% and 90% of the negative bending of the column strip for the interior and
exterior columns, respectively. For an edge bay, the amount of. the negative bending
transferred is reduced by half.

ai=Ci+d

C cb

critical shear perimeter

a-Internal column
Qf, My r* c «
ai=c,+d/2 b xd J

Qp yv Qd
bxd ■4
critical shear perimeter

b-Edge column
Fig. 4.19 Punching stress distribution due to an unbalanced moment
127
 Critical section

Transfer of moment at comer column

Shear Stresses due to vertical loads

Shear Stresses due to Mx

<ly2
Shear Stresses due to Mv
& qyl

<lyi

Total Shear Stresses

<lB

Fig. 4.20: Punching shear stresses for a corner column

128
The case of comer column subjected to eccentric punching stress is illustrated in Fig.
4.20. The centroid of the critical perimeter lies closer to the inside face of the column.
Hence, shear stresses due to moment transfer are larger at the outside perimeter. If the
shear stress due to transferred moment is larger than shear stress due to gravity load qp
as defined by Eq. 4.26, a negative shear stress may occur at these points (comers A,
C). The punching shear stresses calculated using the code-detailed method is given in
Eqs. (4.27-4.30). These stresses should be added to the punching stresses caused by
the vertical loads. The final shear stress at each point for the comer column is
computed using Eqs. (4.31 -4.33).

The shear stress due to gravity loads is given by:

tfP = - ^ T ......................................... ................. (4-26)

b0 d
The shear stresses due to unbalanced moment My are given by:

. My Ygy CAB
lyX j ■(4.27)
cy

............................................. (4.28)
cy
The shear stresses due to unbalanced moment Mx are given by:

Mx CCB
qu = ’ J .............................................. (4.29)
cx

M , r„, C tn
qx l = f -..AD ............................................. (4.30)
J cx
The total stresses at column comer points equal to:

qA = qP+ qyi-qx2.................................................(4.31)
qB = qp + qxi + q yi.................... ............................ (4.32)
qc = qP+ q*i - qV2 .................................................(4.33)

These stresses should be checked against concrete shear strength given in Eq. 4.22.
where the properties CAB, Ccd, CCb,Cad, Jcy, and Ja for different column locations are
given by:

129
Case of interior column (Fig. 4.19)

C AB =C CD = —
2 CcB AD

Tr —d_x aJ3 4 . _i_____

a. x d 3 1____
d x a ^l x b ,1 .(4.34)
« 6 + 6 + 2 .

dxb3 x d 3 d xb* xa. ..(4.35)

=

Case of exterior column (Fig. 4.19)

r ai r -c L-
^ A S ~T,---- 1-----\ CB AD n
(d ,+ 2 x a ,) 2

CcD ~ a\ CAB

J - d x b x ^C A2B ^
J cy ~ a X D \ 3 3 .............(4.36)
6 ’

rf x 6 ,3 ( 6, x d 3 [ d x 6 2 x q , ...........(4.37)
“ ~ 6 6 2

Case o f corner column (Fig. 4.20)

c C = - A '_____
(2 x 6 ,+ 2 x a ,) 0 (2x6, + 2x«,)

CCo = a ,- C AB , CAD= b - C CB

J cy = rfx*1x C j , + ^ B - + ^ * - + 2 ^ ....................... (4.38)

xa, x C 2b + .................... (4 39)

130
4.7.5 Simplified Method
The Egyptian code offers a simplified design method for calculating the total
punching shear stress including shear stresses due to moment transferred to columns.
In this simplified method, the shear stress due to vertical gravity loads is magnified by
the factor p to account for unbalanced moment transferred to columns. The method
implies that the estimated additional increase in shear stresses due to moment
transferred from slab to column is 15%, 30%, 50% for the interior, exterior and comer
column, respectively.
The shear stress is given by

where
Qup is the ultimate design shear force
P = 1.15 for interior column
P = 1.30 for exterior column
P = 1.50 for comer column
b0 is the critical shear perimeter
d is the effective slab depth

Fig. 4.21 shows the critical shear perimeter and the loaded area for an interior column
in flat slab floor. According to this figure, the calculation procedure is as follows:

Q up = w u X { L i x L 2 - a , x b i} (4.41)

(4.42)

a, =a+d b, =b +d ba = 2a, +2bt

Table 4.3 summarizes the calculations of the critical shear perimeter and design shear
force for interior, exterior and comer columns.
 Fig. 4.21 loaded area and critical shear perimeter for an interior column

Table 4.3 Calculation of critical shear perimeter and design shear force

Type of column Interior Column Exterior Column C orner column

ai — i- ® - v - s rir.
I___ |b| tj/2
ai a,"' ' L>/2
l2
Shape j Sbjbi
L, L,/2

L,
ai a+d a+d a +d/2

b, b+d b+d/2 b+d/2

perimeter (b0) 2(a,+b,) aj+2 bj ai+b,

P 1.15 1.3 1.5

Qup wA Li -<*i *&,) X Lj ,^ ,lj\X [*2 , ,

wu( 2 Wu( \ « .XA)

132
4.8 One-Way Shear Strength
Stresses resulting from one-way shear are normally low, and usually do not control the
design. One-way shear stresses must be resisted by concrete strength only and without
any reinforcement contribution. The Egyptian code gives the following equation for
one-way concrete shear strength:

qcu= ° . l 6 ^ .......... ......................................... (4.43)

The critical section for one-way shear is taken at d/2 from the face of the column as
shown in Fig. 4.22. The calculated shear stress should be less than concrete shear
strength. For example, shear stresses for the interior column shown in Fig. 4.22 are
given by

........................................ <4.44,
L 2xd

w„ xL. xZ
% ' y .............................................. (4-45)
Lxxd

Fig. 4.22 Critical sections for one-way shear in interior columns

133
Example 4.1
It is required to design the Flat Slab Roof shown in Fig. EX4.1. Columns (500x 500
mm) are only allowed as shown. For architectural purposes, it is required that no drop
panels or columns’ heads to be used.

Data:-
Concrete Characteristic Strength 25 N/mm2
Steel Yield Stress 360 N/mm2
Live Load 4.0 kN/m2
Flooring 2.0 kN/m2
Equivalent wall loads 1.5 kN/m2
Floor Height 3.50 m

Solution:
The floor consists o f three equal spans in each direction, the span in the long direction
equals L| = 6.0 m and the span in the short direction L2=5.0 m
The system satisfies the requirements of the empirical method specified in the Code­
article (6-2-5-5)

The average length Lavg=5.5 m

Step 1: Dimensioning

■ Slab thickness (ts):-

150 mm
ts = bigger o f

I 32 32
Take ts = 200 mm

■ Column Dimensions (bxb)

300 mm
(3500-200)
= 220 mm
15

120 20

Thus b=500 mm is satisfactory

134
135
 • Marginal Beams (bbxtb)
Punching stresses are usually high in exterior and comer columns. Hence, a
marginal beam is considered with thickness tb a 3ts a 600 mm
Take tb = 700 mm & bb = 250 mm
• Column and Field Strips:-
Assume that width o f Column Strip = 'A Smaller side = 1/2x5.0 = 2.50 m ,
Width of Field Strip:-
For short direction = 6.00-2.50 = 3.50 m
For long direction = 5.00-2.50 = 2.50 m

Step 2: Minimum steel requirements: -

For fy = 360 N/mm2

As min(long ) = — x 1000 x (200 - 20) = 300 m m 2/ m '

360

A, mi„(short) = — x 1000 x (200 - 30) = 283 mm 2 / m '

360

Step 3: Load calculations

Dead Load, gs = Own weight + Flooring + Equivalent Wall Loads
= 25x0.20 + 2.0 + 1.5 = 8.5 kNIm1
Live Load, ps= 4.0 kN/mz
Since the live loads is less than 0.75 the dead loads
1-50 ( gs+ ps)
1.5 x (8.50+ 4.0)
18.75 kN/m2

Step 4: Design of Strips

Step 4-a: Long Direction
Step 4-a-i: Statical system and bending moment

As no column head is used D=b=0.50 m

136
 ,, 18.75x5f ^ 2x0.5'',
---------- 6.0--------- =376.3 kN.m

Percentage of moments is taken from Table 4.1

Column strip -ve moment=169.33 kN.m (45%)
Negative moment
■225.78 kN.m(60%)
Field strip -ve moment = 56.45kN.m (15%)
Mo=376.3

Column strip +ve moment =94.08 kN.m(25%)

Positive moment
150.52 kN.m (40%;

Field strip +ve moment = 56.45kN,m (15%)

Distribution of M0 for an interior bay

Step 4-a-ii: Design of sections

Since the width of the column strip is 2.5 m, the maximum negative moment at the
interior panel per meter equals
.. 169.33 . , . . ,
= ——— = 67.73 kN.ml m
2.5
M, 67.73 xlO6
R = - = 0.084
f cox b x d 2 25xl000xl802
For a =0.0 co=0.107
f 25
As = o > x ^ -x b x d = 0.107x— xl000xl80 = 1337 mm2/m'
fy 360
use ( 9 0 14 /m') as negative column strip reinforcement in the long direction
The design for the rest of the long direction critical section is given in the figure

Step 4-b: Short Direction:-

Step 4-b-i: Statical system and bending moment:-

M n^ .l k ( L 2xD

As no column head is used D=b=0.50 m

„ I8.75x6f c 2x0.5',
= ---- ;---- j 5.0------:— I = 306.25 kN.m

Percentage o f moments is taken from Table 4.1

137
Step 4-b-ii: Design of sections
Since the width of the column strip is 2.5 m, the maximum negative moment at the
interior panel per meter equals
137.81 = 55.12
M, = -------- c c t ' t kN.m/m
iM / '
2.5
since this is the secondary direction d=200-30=170 mm

* - .- " » - 7 = . 5S-12^ - 2 =0.076

fa .x b x d 2 25x1000x170

For a =0.0 ©=0.097

A =<»x— x i x r f = 0.097x -^ ~ x l0 0 0 x l7 0 = 1144 mm2 / m'

fy 360

use (6<B12/m'+34>14 /m') as negative column strip reinforcement of the short direction
The design for the rest of the short direction critical sections is given in the figure

Step 5: Design of edge column strip

Due to the presence of the marginal beam, the moment in the exterior strip/m' equal
half the moment in the interior strip/m'.
So, the reinforcement in the exterior strip/m equals half the reinforcement in the
interior strip/m'. (While considering the minimum steel requirements).

Step 6: Check for negative reinforcement in the field span

As gs >2/3 ps, no top reinforcement is required. However, since the slab thickness is
greater than 160 mm, shrinkage top mat is needed (use 6 <t> 10/m' in the long direction
and 5 <t> 10/m' in the short direction)

Step 7: Design for Punching Shear for Interior Column

Assume concrete cover of 20 mm
d = 200-20 = 180 mm
aj =b i=500 +180 = 680 mm
QuP = 18.75 x 5.0 x 6 - 18.75 x 0.68 x 0.68 = 554 kN
p =1.15 (case of interior column)

138
b0 = 2 x (680+680) =2720 mm

q = _Q2^—
P = -------------------
554x1000x1.15 -- 1, .3 N/mm 2
bc d 2720x180

qcup is the smallest of

1. ? = 0 .3 1 6 ,p L = 0.316. -1.29 N / m m 2 <l.6....jo.k

/1.5

2- =0.316 (0.5 + - ) x J ^ h . =0.316(0.5 + — ) x j — = 1.93 N/ mm1

** i |r « 500 V1.5

3. =0.8 (— + 0.2)x £ =0.8 (■— ^ ^ + 0.2)x =1.51 N/ mm2

p b0 y yc 2720 ; V1.5
Note : a =4.0 for interior columns

qcup=i.29 N/mm2

Since qu s , the slab is considered safe regarding to punching

a*=680

d/2=90 mm

critical shear perimeter

The punching strength o f the exterior and comer columns can be checked in similar
manner.

139
 Design of Long Direction

Column Strip (Width=2.50 m) Field Strip (Width=2.50 m)

JS l--------- ------------------------ 7 X .---------------- ■ -A:----- :---------------------------2ST

1. 6 .0 0 |. 6 .0 0 6 .0 0 \ 6.00

Mo==376.3 kN.m

% Mn 20% 50% 10% 20%

30% A , 25% XX 20% 15%

Mu 7 5.26 188.15 37.63 75.26

"■ A XX A
112.90 9 4.00 75.26 56.45

Mu 30.10 75.26 15.10 30.10

k N .m /n i ^ ..— XV. A
4 5 .1 6 3 7.60 30.10 22.58

d = 180 d=180 d = 180 d = 180 d=180 d= 180 d= 180 d = 180

R 0.037 0 .093 0.019 0.037

X l 0 .0 5 6 0 .046 0 .037 0 .028
'

o 0.045 0.121 0.022 0 .045

0 .0 6 9 A . 0 .057 0.045 0 .033
'

As 563 1513 27 5 563

mm'/m X ^ 8 63 713 XX 563 A 41 4

6014 3010
+3016 6^10 +3012
A s/m
3012 X i 3^10 A . 6010
6014
+ 3 # 14 +3012

140
 DesignofShort Direction

Column Strip (Width=2.5m) Field Strip (Width=3.50 m)

141
6.00

Reinforcement Details
Long Direction
LEGEND
--------------------- TOP

--------------------- BOTTOM

142
A
145
Cross sections inth
e short direction
 Field Strip Column Strip

Alternative reinforcement using mesh

LEGEND

Bottom

R e in fo rc e m e n t m e s h

146
Example 4.2
It is required to design the flat slab Roof shown in Fig. EX4.2. Columns (500x 500
mm) are only, allowed as shown.
Data*.-
Concrete Characteristic Strength = 25 N/mm2
Steel Yield Stress = 360 N/mm2
Live Load = 10.0 kN/m2
Flooring = 2.0 kN/m2
Equivalent wall loads = 1.5 kN/m2
Floor Height = 3.50 m

Solution:-
Since live load is relatively high and there is no architecture restriction, use flat slab
with drop panels.
The floor consists of three equal spans in each direction, the span in the long direction
equals L( = 6.0 m and the span in the short direction L2=5.0 m.
The system satisfies the requirements of the empirical method specified in the Code­
article (6-2-5-5).

Step 1: Dimensioning

* Slab thickness (t,):-

150 mm
ts = bigger of
6000
= 166.67 mm
36 36
Take ts = 200 mm
* Column Dimensions (bxb)

300 mm

b ~ bigger o f
. . (3500-200)
mm
15 15
A = -----=
—- 6 0 0 300 mm
120 20
Take b=500 mm

147
148
 ■ Drop Panel
-Dimensions of Drop panels S
;> L,/3
<; L2/2
Taking the Drop Panel Dimensions 2.00 x 2.00 (refer to roof layout)
■ Thickness of Drop Panel
Thickness of drop panel under the slab a ts/4 = 200/4 = 50 mm
Taking the total depth at drop panel = 200+50 = 250 mm
* Marginal Beams (bbxtb)
No marginal beam is provided
■ Column and Field Strips:-
Width o f Column Strip = width of drop panel = 2.0 m (in each direction)
Width of Field Strip:-
For Long Direction = 5.00-2.00 = 3.0 m
For Short Direction = 6.00-2.00 = 4.0 m

Step 2: Minimum Steel Requirement

For fy= 360 N/mm2

As min(lonS ) = —J—xlOOOx (200 - 20) = 300 mm 2 / m '

360

As,mln(short) = — x 1000 x (200 - 30) = 283 m m 2/ m '

fy
Minimum Steel Reinforcement at the location of drop panel

As miAiong ) = — x 1000x(250- 20) = 383 mm2l m '

360

Asmin(skort)=— xl0 0 0 x(2 5 0 -3 0 ) = 367 m m 2 /m '

360

Step 3: Calculation of Loads

There is additional weight due to the presence of 50 mm drop in the column strip

"W =25 x *(, x- ^ - = 2 5 x 0 .0 5 x — = 0 .1 6 6 7 kNIm 2

L ,xL 2 5x 6

149
Dead load, gs = Own weight + Flooring + Drop + Equivalent Wall Loads
= 25 x 0.20 + 2.0 + 0.167 +1.5 = 8.667 kN I m2
Live load, ps = 10.0 kN/m2
Since the live loads is greater than 0.75 the dead loads
wsu = 1.4gs+1.6ps
1.4x8.667 + 1.6x10
28.13 kN/m2

Step 4: Design of Strips

Step 4-a: Long Direction
Step 4-a-i: Statical system and Bending Moment

As no column head is used D=b=0.50 m

Percentage of moments is taken from Table 4.1

Step 4-a-ii; Moment Correction

Since the width of the column strip is less than Vi the short span and the flat slab is
with drop panel, moment correction needs to be carried out. The correction is applied
to the field strip and then the column strip moment is adjusted accordingly. The
correction factor equals to the ratio o f the actual width of the filed strip to the width of
the filed strip in case of no drop panel is used (ideal width). The ideal column strip
width equals 2.5 m and the ideal field strip width is given in thfe following table:

L o n g d ire c tio n

Actual width of filed strip Ideal width of filed strip correction factor
3 5'2.5=2.5 1.2

150
The calculation of bending moments in the longitudinal direction of an interior bay is
given in the following table:
Negative moment (kN.m) Positive moment (kN.m)
field strip column strip field strip column strip
(20% ) (% 50) (15% ) (25% )

before 1 1 2 .9 2 2 8 2 .3 1 8 4 .7 1 4 1 .1 6
correction
After 1 .2 x 1 1 2 .9 2 ( 112.92+282.31)- 1 .2 x 8 4 .7 2 2 5 .8 6 -1 0 1 .6
correction = 1 3 5 .5
135.5 = 2 5 9 .7 3 = 1 0 1 .6 = 1 2 4 .2

Step 4-a-iii: Design of Sections

Since the width of the column strip is 2.0 m, the maximum negative moment at the
interior panel per meter equals:

2 5 9 73
M = -129.86 k N j n / m '
2.0

R=^ - T = - . i g M ^ g l T = 0.098
feu x b x d 25x1000x230

For a =0.0 co=0.129

A = < ax£z-xbxd = 0.129x— xl000x230 = 2063 m m 1! m'

f y 360

Step 4-b‘. Short Direction

Step 4-b-i: Statical system and Bending Moment

wsux L , f r 2 xD
3

As no column head is used D=b=0.50 m

2M 3 ^ r 5_0 _ 2 x M y =45^ ^ M

Percentage of moments is taken from Table 4.1

151
Step 4-b-ii: Moment Correction
Since the width of the column strip is less than 'A the short span and the flat slab is
with drop panel, moment correction needs to be carried out. The correction is applied
to the field strip and then the column strip moment is adjusted accordingly. The
correction factor equals to the ratio of the actual width of the filed strip to the width of
the filed strip in case of no drop panel is used (ideal .width). The ideal column strip
width equals 2.5 m and the ideal field strip width is given in the following table:

Short direction
A c tu al w id th o f file d strip Id e a l w id th o f filed strip c o rre c tio n fa c to r
4 6-2.5=3.5 1.143

Step 4-b-iii: Design of Sections

Since the width of the column strip is 2.0 m, the maximum negative moment at the
interior panel per meter equals

M = ^ ^ = 108.3 kN .m /m '
2.0
The depth in the short direction=250-30=220 mm

* = -U > 1— - = 0.Q9
f■Jcu x b x d 2 25x1000x220

For a =0.0 oo=0.116

A = 0 } x L - %b x d = 0.116x— xl000x220 = 1773mm2/m '

fy 360

Step 5: Design of edge column strip

Due to the presence of the marginal beam, the value of the bending moments in the
exterior strip/m' equal to half the value of the bending moments in the interior
strip/m'.
Accordingly, the reinforcement in the exterior strip/m equals half the reinforcement in
the interior strip/m'. (While considering the minimum steel requirements).
Step 6: Negative reinforcement in the midspan
Since gs >2/3 ps (8.6>2/3 x 10=6.67), no negative moments will be developed at
midspan and no top reinforcement is required for such a reason. However, since the
slab thickness is greater than 160 mm, top reinforcement is needed to resist shrinkage
and temperature stresses.
Provide 6 O 10 /m' in both directions.

152
 Step 7: Design for Punching Shear for Interior Column
Since the floor is flat slab with drop panels, two critical sections should be
investigated as shown in figure.
Step 7.1: Section 1
d = 200-20 = 180 mm
a, =b i=2000 +180 = 2180 mm
Qup = 28.13 x 5.0 x 6 - 28.13 x 2.18 x 2.18 = 710 kN
13=1.15 (case of interior column)

a ,= 2 1 8 0
218Q _

1— TL JT
a
_D
180
\critical section I

~ i c i f—
c ritic a l s h e a r sec tio n 1
2000

b0 = 2 x (2180+2180) =8720 mm
Qup P _ 710x1000x1.15
= 0 .5 2 N/mm 2
9“ b0 d 8720x180
qcup is the smallest of

1. <7 = 0 . 3 1 6 ^ = 0 . 3 1 6 ^ = 1.29 N lm m <1.6

V To 1.5

2. 9 =0.316 (0 .5 + £ )x p s - =0.316(0.5 + — ) x , [ ^ = 1.93 N /m m 2

b \ yc 500 V1.5

3- 9w = 0 . 8 ( ^ + 0 . 2 ) x ^ = o , s ( ^ ~ + 0 . 2 ) x ^ = 0.92 N/m m 2

Note : a = 4.0 for interior columns

<lcup=0.92 N/irnn2

since qu<qcap, section 1 is considered safe

153
 Step 7.2: Section 2
Assume concrete cover o f 20 mm
d = 250-20 = 230 mm
ai =bi=500 +230 = 730 mm
Qup = 28.13 x 5.0 x 6 - 28.13 x 0.73 x 0.73 = 829 kN
P =1.15 (case of interior column)
b0 = 2 x (730+730) =2920 mm
2„„ P 829x1000x1.15
<7„ =' h d = 1 .4 2 N/mm 1
2920x230

qcup is the smallest of

1. = 0.316 = 0.316 J — = 1.29 N /mm 2

1 V yc \1.5

2. qcw = 0.316 (0.5+ - ) x j^S- =0.316 (0.5 + — ) x j — =1.93 N/mm 1

K b V yc v 500 V1.5

3. qc =0.8 + 0.2) x =0.8 (4 X23° + 0.2)x j ~ =1.68 N/m m 2

2920 VI.5

Note : a =4.0 for interior columns

qcup= 1.29 N/mm2

Since qu>qcup, the slab is considered unsafe

a ,= 7 3 0 730

P
d / 2 = J 15 m m

d=230

'>critical sec tio n 2

I b-
500
c ritic a l s h e a r p e rim e te r

154
One of following solutions can be followed

1. Increasing concrete compressive strength to 30 N/mm2 will increase qcup to

1.42 N/mm2
2. Increasing column dimensions to 600x600 will decrease qu to 1.24 N/mm2
3. Increasing drop panel thickness to 70 mm will decrease qu to 1.27 N/mm2

155
156
 Design of Short Direction

Column Strip (Width=2.0m) Field Strip (Width=4.00 m)

[ 5.00 \ 5.00 [ 5.00 |. 5.on

% M n^25% 50% 5% 20%

30% 25% 20% 15%

Mo=459.5 kN.m

Mu 114.88 229.76 22.98 91.9

kN.inyv ....... A
137.85 114.88 91.9 68.93

Mu 111.-6 216.63 26.26 105.03

k N .n iy y ...... - A
124.72 105.03 105.03 78.77
corrected

Mu 55.8 108.31 6.56 26.26

KN.in/iiyv '
62.36 52.52 26.26 19.69
A

d=220 d=170 d=220 d=170 d=170 d=170 d=170 d=170

R 0.046 0.090 0.009 0.036

0.086 0.073 0.036 0.027

ffl 0.056 0.117 0.010 0.043

0.111 0.092 0.043 A 0.032

As 856 1788 118 508

1310 1086
■3

508 378
f

6^16
As/m W14 +3016 6010 6012
3016 6016 6012 6010
+3^18

157
158
161
Example 4.3
Using the code simplified method, check the safety against punching failure of a
comer column (0.4 x 0.4 m) in a flat slab system without marginal beams of a typical
panel (6.5m x 6m). The total ultimate loads is 17 kN/m2, ts=200 mm and f cu=25
N/mm2 .
Solution
Assume concrete cover of 20 mm
d = V20 = 180 mm
a, =b|=400 +180 /2 = 490 mm
Qup = 17 x 6.5/2 x 6/2 - 17 x 0.49 x 0.49 = 161.7 kN
P =1.5 (case of comer column)
b0 = 2 x 490 =980 mm
QIIP P 161.7x1000x1.5
1.374 N/mm
b„d 980x180
qcup is the smallest of

1. q =0.316 ^ = 0.316./— = 1.29N /m m z < l. 6 ....j0 .k

p Vrc 11.5

2. qr, =0.316 (0.5+ - ) x = 0.316 (0.5 +— )x J — = 1.93 N /m m 2

Hcup v b \ rc 400 V 1.5

3. = 0-8 ( ~ ~ + 0.2) x —z- - 0.8 (2- X- - + 0.2)x, — =1.85 N /m m 2

b„ V r, 980 VI.5

qcup=1.29 N/mm2
qup>(\cup, punching strength of the comer column is unsafe . To increase the punching
strength of the slab one of the following solution may be adopted:
1. Increase the compressive strength of concrete
2. Increase the dimensions of the comer column
3. Increase the thickness of the slab
4. Use drop panel or column head if such a solution meets the acceptance of the
architect. aj=490

critical shear section 1

162
Example 4.4
Redesign the previous example using the code-detailed method

Solution
Stcpl: Calculate the unbalanced moments
MoX= 17 x 6 x (6.5 -2 /3 x0.4)2/ 8 = 495 kN.m
Moy = 17 x 6.5 x (6.0 - 2/3 x 0.4)2 /8 = 454 kN.m
% o f column strip moment = 40% (no edge beams)
M-ve column strip in x-direction (My) = 0.4 x 495 = 198.2 kN.m
M-ve column strip in y-direction (Mx) = 0.4 x 454 = 181.6 kN.m
Moment transferred to column in x-direction (My)= 0.9 x 0.5 x 198.2 = 89.2 kN.m
Moment transferred to column in y-direction (Mx)= 0 .9 x 0 .5 x 1 8 1 .6 = 81.7 kN.m

0.6

Yqx=yqy = 1- 0.6 0.4

=

Moment transferred by torsion in x-direction My= 0.4x 89.2=35.7kN.m

Moment transferred by torsion in y-direction Mx= 0.4x 81.7=32.7kN.m
Step 2: Calculate section properties
at=Ci+d/2=0.4+0.18/2=0.49m
b,=c2+d/2=0.4+0.18/2=0.49m
a[_____ 0.49
= 0.123 m
(2 xA ,+ 2xa| ) 2 x 0.49 + 2 x 0.49
Li=6.5 m

© I_ J It j ____
e r a s e r j"57123
My
bi=0.490 m

Comer column notations

163
Ccd=Cad= 0.49 -0.123 =0.368 m

J =J =0.18 x 0.49x0.123 +
2 0.18x0.3683.0.18x0.1233.0.49x0.183=0.00465m
4
• jS 3 12

Step 3: Calculate shear stresses

The ultimate shear force equals
Qup = 17 x 6.5/2 x 6/2 - 17 x 0.49 x 0.49 = 161.7 kN
The shear stress due to punching of the gravity loads equals to:
Qu, 161.7x1000
V, = b d =0.917 N / m m 2
980x180

iy ! =0.944 N / m m 2
0.00465x1000

K Yqy ) CCD 35.7 x 0.368

ly 2 =2.82 N / m m 2
Jy, 0.00465x1000

{M x r* ) 32.7 x 0.123
=0.86 N / mm
0.00465x1000

K )C AD 32.7 x 0.368
2 =
= 2.58 N / m m 2
Ja 0.00465x1000

Qa = qP + %i - Qx2= 0.917 + 0.944 -2.58 = -0.723 N/mm2

qB = qp + qxi + qyi = 0.917 + 0.86 +0.944 = 2.717 N/mm2— *>qcup (unsaf)
qc = qp + qxl - qy2= 0.917 + 0.86 -2.82 = -1.043 N/mm2
Therefore, the maximum shear stress is at comer B with a value of 2.717 N/mm2. The
value of the shear stress obtained using the simplified method (1.375 N/mm2) is
extremely low when compared to the value obtained using the detailed method. This
leads to a conclusion that the values of P given in the simplified method of the

164
4.9 The Equivalent Fram e Method
4.9.1 Introduction
The Equivalent frame method was first introduced in 1948. It is intended for use in
analyzing moments in any practical frame building. The method is more general than
the direct design method, which is subjected to limitations described in section 6-2-7-
5-A in the ECP. Thus, if the buildings do not satisfy the loading and geometrical
conditions required by the code or if lateral loads due to wind or earthquake exist, the
ECP 203 requires the building to be analyzed by the equivalentframe method.
The equivalent frame method for design of the flat slab system is a more rigorous
method of analysis when compared with the direct design method. The building is
represented by a series of two-dimensional frames, which are then analyzed for loads
acting in the planes of the frames. In the direct method, the statical moment, M„ is
calculated for each span and divided between positive and negative moment regions
according to the code coefficients given in Table 4-4.
The main features o f this method can be summarized as follows:

1. Moments are distributed among the critical sections by employing an elastic

analysis. Cases of loading have to be considered for the most critical loading
conditions.
2. There are no limitations on loading or dimensions.
3. The variations in the moment of inertia such as drop panel have to be considered
in the analysis.
4. Lateral analysis can be performed during the computations of the equivalent
frame.
5. The total statical moment calculated using this method need not exceed the
moment Ma required by the direct design method.

4.9.2 Structural Analysis

The slab is divided into a series of equivalent frames running in two perpendicular
directions. These frames consist of the slab, drop panel, projected beams, and the
columns above and below the considered floor. These frames are in turn divided into
column and middle strips. The live loads should be placed at the locations that
produce maximum moment for the members.
In the case of analyzing vertical loads, the moment of inertia for the slab is calculated
using the total strip width. While in the case of performing lateral load analyses, the
moment of inertia for the slab is calculated using column width plus three times the
slab thickness from each side (not exceeding span/3).
When a lateral analysis is carried out, the full height of the building should be
modeled to account for the variation of wind or earthquake forces at each level. If the
analysis is limited to gravity loads, calculations can be greatly simplified by analyzing
each floor and its attached column separately. The column ends are assumed to be
fixed at the intersection with the floor above and below as shown in Fig. 4.23.

165
 Fig. 4.23 Elements of the equivalent frame method

The moment o f inertia of columns may be based on the gross area uncracked concrete,
allowing for variations due to changes in column cross section along the length of the
column.

Fig. 4.23 illustrates the different elements of the equivalent frame for a flat slab
system. The column provides a resisting moment Mt equivalent to the applied
torsional intensity M,. Therefore, the exterior ends of the slab strip rotate more than
the central section because of the torsional deformation. To account for the
deformation and rotation, an equivalent column replaces the actual column and the
transverse slab strip. The flexibility of the equivalent column is equal to the sum of the
flexibilities of the actual column and the slab strip.

I
-----= ~l -----+
l — ............................................ ,...(4.46)
K* 2 X Kt
Recalling that the stiffiiess of a member is the inverse of the flexibility of that
member, the previous equation can be rewritten as

..................... ..........................(4.47)
i+ -L K c
K,

166
Where:
'r 4x£cx^
K- — i—
The form of the previous equation can be explained by making an analogy between
the equivalent column and the system of two springs. The total deformation of both
systems equals the sum of the two individual displacements. If the two springs are
replaced by a single spring with an equivalent stiffness Kec, the second system must
deflect similar to the original system when identical load P is applied at the end.
Equating the deflection of system 1 to that of the equivalent system 2 gives

A = A, + A2 ...................................................(4.48)
Since the relation between force and displacement for a spring is P=KA, where K
equals spring stiffiiess, Eq. 4.48 can be expressed in term of the applied load P and the
stiffness as
P P P
— — ............................................. (4.49)
K. K. K

dividing both sides with P gives

— +— =— ............................................ (4.50)
■K. K,

Code equation 6.16 is similar to Eq. 4.50 but includes a summation sign to account for
the possibility of contributions from columns above and below the slab.
An approximate expression for the stiffiiess of the torsional member, based on the
results of three-dimensional analysis of various slab configurations is given by

9E - C
.(4.51)
/ \ \
^2
1-
V UJ )
Ec is the modulus o f elasticity of concrete.
C2 is the transverse dimension of the column, equivalent column, capital or bracket.
L2 is the center to center distance measured perpendicular to the analysis direction as
shown in Fig. 4.23
An expression for C, which is a cross sectional constant to define torsional properties,
is given by:

1-0.63 — x ------ .(4.52)

t j 3

167
where b and t are the shorter and the longer dimensions respectively for the member.
It the torsional member consists of beam and slab, the section can be divided into a
number of rectangles.

Table 4.4 Distribution of column and field strip in equivalent frame method

Moment type Percentage of moment form total moments

Column strip Field strip
negative moment in
75 25
interior panel
negative moment in
80 20
exterior panel
positive moment 55 45

b-Two springs system c-Equivalent spring system

Fig. 4.24 Equivalent column and analogous spring system

Fig. 4.25 Column and field strips in the equivalent frame method.

Photo 4.4 Flat slab system during construction

169
Example 4.5
Evaluate the effective stiffness for exterior column shown in figure below. The floor
consists of an 200 mm thick slab supported on a marginal beams that are 300 mm
wide and 600 mm deep.

ill
'$!')& iili1 i
,200 mm

3001 400

Solution
Step 1: Compute column stiffness
The equivalent column stiffness equals

k.= -
2X

K' y
The stiffness of each column equals
4 x£, x/„
K=-

The height center to center of the column varies from one floor to the other.
hi=4500 mm and h2=4000 mm. The moment of inertia for the column is taken about
axis parallel to the edge of the slab
r 500 x 3003 , , ,
/„ = ------------ = 1.13x10 mm
8 12

4x£t x / 4x£ x / 4 x £ xl,13xl09 4 x £ xl,13xl09

> K = ---------- - + ---------- - = ----- 5------------- + ------ 5-------------
^ \ h2 4000 4500

= 2.125xl06 Ec

170
Step 2: Compute the torsional member properties
According to the BCP 203 the attached torsional member is divided in two parts. The
dimension of the slab portion equals (b,=200, tt-400) and that for the beam equals
(b2-300, t2=600). The torsional constant C equals

i1-0.63— x------
b3 xt

t) 3

c =[ f l - 0 . 6 3 2 ^ 2003 x 400
+ 7,1 - 0n. 6^ 3 ---
3 0 0 l 3003 x 600
x ----------------- = 4.43x10 mm
I 400, r 3 I 600J 3
Since torsion arms of the proportions exists on both sides o f the column, two identical
terms are included in the determination of K, as follows

9E-C
L2 -{l-{c 2 /L2)y

9Er -4.43x10s
K, = 2x =17.25xio6 £
6000 1-f— 1
Uoooj

Step 3 Compute the Equivalent column stiffness Kel

2.125x10 Er
K„=-
2.125x10 Ec
1+ I X 1+
K, 17.25 xlO6 £

171
4.10 Computer Model of Flat Slabs
Flat slab can be modeled using shell or plate bending elements, while the beams are
modeled using frame elements.
When flat slabs are modeled using thin shell elements and beams are modeled using
frame elements, the eccentricity of the slab from the e.g. o f the member should be
considered. However, the common practice is to neglect such an effect.
The effect of the torsional moment mxy must be considered when analyzing the results
of finite element programs as shown in Fig. 4.26. In case o f using uniform
reinforcement arranged in two perpendicular directions, the bending moment in any
strip can be obtained using the following equations

= W + K < y|.............................................(4-53)

=W +K<y| ............................... ^
4'54^
where
mdmy are the maximum bending moments per meter in x and y directions,
respectively. The design moment mx or my need not exceed 1.5 the average moment in
the strip.
|mjand|mr | are the absolute value of the bending moment in the strip
jm^l is the absolute value o f the torsional bending moment in the strip

In the case of modeling the columns as points restrained in the vertical direction, the
design moment is taken at the perimeter of the columns. It should be noted that the
finite element method usually overestimates the negative bending moment over the
supports and underestimates the positive bending moment at midspan.
It should be mentioned also that deflections obtained using analysis that based on
linear elastic finite elements should be modified to take into account the effect of
cracking.
According to the ECP 203, the main reinforcement can be arranged in the direction o f
the principal tensile stresses with a maximum deviation of ± 15 degrees. Otherwise,
the reinforcement should placed in two perpendicular directions.

ffiy
Fig. 4.26 Internal moments on a slab element.
172
An example o f the results obtained from modeling the flat slab using plate elements is
shown in Fig. 4.27. One can notice the intensity of the moment contours over the
column locations.

I - ‘A £ U I*"- *

Is
%
' 1
% w '

1 \
H 1
1
4I& m is - 1
'
!& 1 m
;
■5f

1
Is
I
< b mI
P
,
1 11
11 1 1i

W
* - ■ - &
w s
“ j

$5

$
V^jj ';K1 35? SS m n m (? * L m
;s;sa
iS h i(S m 5S] [W p p 10

shell/plate element j \ | stress concentration at

column locations
Fig. 4.27 Computer model of flat slab system

When designing the top reinforcement of the flat slab one should use the value of the
bending moment at the face of the column (Sec. 1-1 and Sec. 2-2) as shown in Fig.
4.28. In other words, the contour line located inside the columns should be ignored.

Fig. 4.28 Moment contours at column locations

173
5
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRS

Photo 5.1 Spiral staircase at Area showroom, USA.

5.1 Introduction

Reinforced concrete stairs are essential elements in buildings to transfer people from
one level to another. The staircase consists of landings and flights. The flight is an
inclined slab that consists of risers and treads (going), while the landing is a horizontal
slab. The flights and the landings are supported on broken, inclined or horizontal
beams and columns as shown in Fig. 5.1.
 hand rail
flight

Landing

supporting beam floor beam

hand rail
flight

Fig. 5.1 Details of landings and flights for a staircase

The stair consists of risers and treads {going). The height of the riser (r) is about 150-
200 mm, while the width of the going (tr) is about 250-300 mm as shown in Fig. 5.2.
The higher the riser the shorter the going. It is common practice to form the height of
the riser at 150 mm and the width of the going at 300 mm. A good design of the stair
should comply with the following role of thumb
2 r + tr =600-620 m m .......................................................(5.1)

To achieve comfort, landing has to be formed every 10-14 steps. Landing maybe also
needed when a change in the direction of the stairs is required.

Landing

The width of the stair in each direction usually ranges from 0.9-1.5 m and the space
{stairwell) between each flight ranges from 0.3-0.6 m. Thus, for residential building
with a height of no more than 3 m, the total space for the staircase is approximately
3x6 m as shown in Fig 5.3. For proper geometric design, care should be given to the
details C and D in Fig. 5.3.

175
Fig. 5.3 Typical 2-flight staircase in residential buildings
176
 5.2 Structural System s of Stairs
From the structural point of view, the types of stairs can be classified into five
categories as follows:

1. Cantilever type.
2. Slab type.
3. Slab-beam type.
4. Spiral type
5. Free-stranding type

The main differences among these types are the way through which the flights and the
landings transfer their loads to the supporting beams and columns.

Photo 5.2: Cantilever reinforced concrete stair

177
 Since the flight is inclined, the self-weight o f the flight is normally calculated in the
horizontal projection. Thus, the vertical distance t is used in the weight calculations of
the loads as shown in Fig. 5.4.

1 1.0 m '
t =
I 1.. L J L L i

w = / c x (b x tx 1)

✓ ^ rx ttx ix l) _
w (H .P ) = ——--------- - = r „ x (b x t xl)
cos 6
Fig. S.4 Calculation o f the flight self weight

5.2 Cantilever Type

In this type, the flights, the landings and the stairs act as a cantilever slab supported on
a beam or a wall as shown in Fig. 5.5. Care should be taken to the correct placing of
the main reinforcement in the stairs and inside the beam during construction time.

landing
hi
hand rail
i
i
■ * RC wall 1
s
i s
landing s. s
i \ s
i
supporting i 1
beam____ il— s
hand rail s
i —^ '
i
f
1 -11

Sec A-A
Sec A-A

Fig. 5.5 Examples of cantilever stairs

178
The staircase is designed by taking one-meter width of the flight or the landing with an
effective depth davg. The effective depth is taken as the average depth of the section.
The main reinforcement is placed in the top of the stairs and anchored to the
supporting beam as shown in Fig.5.6. The selected reinforcement is normally two bars
preferably placed at the middle of the stair and at the stair edge as shown in Fig. 5.7. In
this case, an additional bar is placed at the other edge. The bending moment developed
in the stairs is transformed into torsion on the beam. The amount of the developed
torsion is quite large and should be investigated. A light reinforcement mesh is placed
in the bottom face to resist cracking and shrinkage.
i

Pu
wall
Wu

'----1
beam — V ..
\ Main reinforcement

Fig. 5.6 Cross section in a cantilever stair

Live loads (3-4 kN/m2) are applied in form of uniform loads on the stairs in the
horizontal direction and a concentrated line load (P„=l-1.5 kN) on the free edge as
shown in Fig. 5.6. The uniform loads wu is the summation of the (slab+stair)
weight(using tavg), covering material (0.8— 1 kN/m2), and live loads. The effective
span Lejf is taken as
Lejr= m m lA**-+t
.\d™ , ............................................. (5.2)
[edge to CL

' * =COS#
- 4 ........................................................(5-3)

riser (r)
................................................. (5-4)

Stair total self weight =tavg * yc ....................................(5.5)

wu= 1.4 wDL+ 1.6 wLL............................................... (5.6)

wu=1.4 [tavg x Yc + covering material(0.8-»l)]+ 1.6 wLL(3—>4) ...............(5.7)

179
The main reinforcement should securely anchored in the supporting beam with a
m in im u m distance equal to tension development length (Ld) as shown in Fig. 5.6.

main
reinforcement

t =-
cos#

= ' +- y -

Fig. 5.7 Reinforcement placement in a cantilever stair

Photo 5.3 Cantilever stair during construction

180
Example 5.1
The staircase shown in figure below is a cantilever type for a floor height of 3.0 m.
The live load is 3 kN/m2, the characteristic strength of concrete is fcu =35 N/mm2 and
^,=400 N/mm2. The weight of the covering material is 0.8 kN/m . Design and draw
reinforcement details for the staircase and the supporting beams.

3.0 1.6

floor slab

floor beam
I- ' 250x600
wall

stair beam

Sec A-A
1
i
i
Architecture Plan

Solution

Step 1: Design of the flight

Step 1.1: Load calculations

Assume the riser height is 150 mm and the going width is 300 mm, the slope of the
stair equals

^ =tan- . f i ^ L ) =tan- . W = 26.56»

\g o in g J 1^300

181
Assume ts=140 mm
To calculate the loads on the horizontal projection, use the vertical thickness t*
t, 140
t =- ■—156.5 mm
cos(<9) cos(26.56)
To include the weight of the stairs (goings and risers) in the dead load calculation (in
the horizontal direction), one has to calculate the average vertical thickness
. riser 150 _
t„ „ -t + ------= 156,5 + -----= 231.5 mm
2 2
Stair total self weight =tavg x yc = 0.2315 x 25=5.7875 kN/m2
wu= 1.4 wDl +1.6 wLL= l .4 (self weight +covering material)+ 1.6 wLL
w„=1.4 x (5.78 + 0.8) + 1.6 x 3 = 14.02 kN/m2
Taking a one-meter strip then w„= 14.02 kN/m'
An additional concentrated live load (Pedge)of 1.5 kN/m' is assumed at the free edge.
K = 1.6Pedge=1.6xl.5 = 2.4 kN lm '

Step 1.2 Bending moments

The effective span is given by

■ • /(1.6 + 0.231 = 1.831 m

L = mm { = nun <
eff ledge to CL [1.6 + 0.125 = 1.725 m
Leff= 1.725 m
1
1 tf=0.231m

Ldear 1 -6 IT1

f— 0.125

P„=2A kN
w„=14.02 kN/m'

lm h h i a i ( n t n
Letr~1-725 m
M„=25 kN.m

182
The maximum bending moment on a 1.0 m strip of the stairs is

wuxLlff +Pr,„ x Lr . = ---------------

M = —----— 14.02xl.7252+ 2.4x1.725 = 25 kN.m

Step 1.3: Design of stairs

Assuming 20 mm concrete cover, the effective depth equals
d = tavg - cover = 231.5 - 20 = 211.5 mm
Recalling that we base the design on a strip of 1.0 m (b=1000 mm)
25 xlO6
= 0.016
f^bd 2 35x1000x211.52
Using the R-co curve —>—+—+ co=0.019

A, & ^ - b d = 0.019x— x 1000x211.5 = 346 mm2

fy 400

=M W . 0.6
-xl000x211.5=317 mm2<As
— fy 400
Aj/step =ASx step width(going)=346 x 0.3 =104 mm2
Choose 2 0 10 (157 mm2)/step

Step 2: Design of landing

Step 2.1: Load calculations
The thickness of the landing is taken equal to the thickness of the flight =140 mm
Landing self-weight = ts x yc = 0.14 x 25=3.5 kN/m2
Wuf= 1.4 wDL+ 1.6 wLL=1.4 (self weight +covering material)+ 1.6 %
w„/=1.4 x (3.5+0.8) + 1.6 x 3 = 10.82 kN/m2
Taking a strip of one meter
wuf= 10.82 kN/m'
The landing is a slab that is supported on two sides. The exact analysis of such slabs
involves a lengthy calculation procedure. However, since this slab is supported on two
beams, the amount transferred in each direction can be approximated by dividing the
load between them. Thus the load transferred to each direction equals
wur 10.8212 =5.41 kN/m'

J/

183
Step 2.2 Design of sections

= -j r ^ , 5.4 l * l . 725- , 8 „ 5 |W m
2 2
Assuming 20 mm concrete cover, the effective depth equals
d = t - cover = 140 —20 = 120 mm
8 .0 5 x l O 6
R =- = 0.0159
f^bd 2 35x1000x120
Using the R-co curve—►
—> co=0.019

A = eo ^ - b d = 0.019x-^-x 1000x120 = 196 mm1

fy 400
Choose 5 <$ 10/m' (393 mm ) >AS,„

Additional 1010

Step 3 -. Design the supporting beam

Step 3.1: Calculation of loads
Assume the beam cross section is 250 x 800 mm
To obtain the weight in the horizontal projection, calculate the vertical thickness t*

t 800
- = 894.4 mm
cos(0) cos(26.56)

184
 floor beam 250x600

* / / / \sta irb e am

Calculation o f wall load

Self weight = 1.4 x yc x b x t*b

Self weight=1.4 x 25 x 0.25 * 0.8944 = 7.83 kN/m' (Horizontal projection)
The height of the wall is variable along the beam, however for simplicity an average
height will be used throughout the beam. This average height is conservatively
calculated as follows:
hw= 3-floor beam-tVl-5/2=3.0- 0.6 - 0.89 - 0.75 = 0.755 m
wall load = 1.4 * yw * b x hw=1.4 x 1.2 x 0.25 x 0.755=3.17 kN/m'
w„4/= self weight + w„ x flight width + wall load + edge live load
wm = 7.83 + 14.02x 1.6 + 3.17 + 2.4 = 35.84 kN/m'

wall wall Pj-2.4 kN

wUi=5.41 w„=14.02
rn m i 1 1 I I I I M
beam beam i
l l
i 1.60 m i 1.60 m
i i
t
* —----0.25 m i 1—— 0.25 m
|^ 1.725 m |. 1.725 m
Loads on landing Loads onflight

185
The loads transmitted to the beam at the level of the landing wu b 2 equals to
wuW= self weight + wui x landing width + wall load
wuh2 = 7.83 + 5.41x1.6 + 3.17 = 19.6 kN/m'
Note: The reader should observe that the average wall load previously calculated is
conservatively used for the whole span.

=35.84 kN/m' w„u=19.6 kN/m'

Loads

=84.7
Bending
moment

The reaction R1 equals

35.84x3x(1.5+1.6)+ 19.6x1.6x0.8
jRl = - = 77.9 kN
4.6

R2 = ^ I x Li + l^ x l ^ x Q t O^ =
4.6
Step 3.2: Design for flexure
The maximum moment occurs at point of zero shear (x')

, Rl 77.9
- = 2.17 m
wllbx 35.8

= 77.9x2.17-35.84 x ^ - = 84.7 kN.m

2
Note: Since the beam is inclined with respect to the reaction, Rl will produce shear
and normal force on the beam.

186
This section has positive bending (84.6 kN.m), but we shall neglect the contribution of
the stairs and design the beam as rectangular section

.^ 10- - 2 =0.017
fjb d 2 35x250x750

Using R-co curve —>—>co=0.02

A = a > ^ b x d = 0.02 — x250x750 = 330 mm2

fy 400

0.225 J # 2
--------- -b a = ---------- —x 250 x 750 = 623 mm
A s min = smaller o f fy 400
1.3/4 =1.3x330 = 430mm2 J

Ag^A^rojn, use As ASimin 430 mm

use (3 ® 16, 603 mm2)

Step 3.3: Design the beam for shear and torsion

Step 3.3.1: Shear stresses
The critical section for shear and torsion is at d/2 from the face of the support.
Assuming that the column width is 600 mm, the vertical force at the critical section
equals

Q = 7 7 . 9 - 3 5 .8 x 0 ^ + ^ p j = 53.7 kN

This vertical force produces shear and normal force because the beam is inclined. The
normal force is normally small and neglected (<0.04 f cub t )and the shear force equals

Qu = Q x cos(0) = 53.7 x cos(26.6) = 48. IkN

Q„ 48.1x1000 2
qu = - = -------------= 0.256 N I mm
bxd 250x750

Step 3.3.2: Shear reinforcement

The concrete shear strength qcu equals
35~ 2
qa = 0.24^|— =1.16 M/mm
Since the applied shear stress (0.256) is less than qcu (1.16), thus shear reinforcement is
not needed.

187
 hw- 35.84 kN/m' w„()3=19.6 kN/m'

Loading for Shear and shear force diagram

Step 3.3.3'- Torsion stresses

Assume the distance from the concrete cover to the stirrup center line is 40 mm
Xi = 250 -2 x 40 = 170 mm
yi = 800 -2 x 40 = 720 mm
ph =2x(pci +y{) = 2 x (170 + 720) = 1780 mm

4,* =170x720 = 122400mm2

A0 =0.S5Aoh =0.85x122400 = 104040 mm 2

xi=170 mm

188
The torsional moment (Mlu) applied to the beam equals the bending moment developed
in the stairs (=25 kN.m) and equals 8.05 kN.m at the landing level.

Pu=2.4kN
wu= 14.02
m m m
beam
1
i 1.60 m
1
h-— 0.25 m M,u =25 kN.m

1.725 m ,

The torsional moment is distributed along the length of the beam as shown in figure.
All these moments are horizontal projection and in the vertical plane.

M1U2=8.05 kN.m

The torsional reaction RT1 equals

25 x3x (1.5+ 1.6)+ 8.05x1.6x0.8

R„ =---------—------- --------------------= 52.8 kN
n 4.6
The critical section for torsion is at d/2 from the face of the support, thus the vertical
torsional moment at the critical section equals to:

T = 5 2 .8 -2 5 x ^ + ^ - j = 35.9 kN.m

This vertical torsional moment produces torque and out-of-plane bending moment
(My) because the beam is inclined. The out-of-plane bending is usually small and can
be neglected and the torque equals to:

M,u =T xcos(9) = 35.9xcos(26.6) = 32.1 kN

The shear stress due to the torque is given by:

189
 1 1 lu J > Z .1 X 1 U 2
q ------------- ---------------- ------- = 2.24 N/mm
VfU 2x Aa xt e 2x104040x68.76

Mtui-25 kN/m' Mtu2=S.05 kN/m'

Step 3.3.4: Check adequacy of the concrete dimensions

<?max=0 -7 0 ^ - = 0 .7 0 x ^ |^ = 3.38 <4.0 N / m m 2

q,max= 3.38 N/mm2 •

+tl l - 9 max

A/0256r +Z245r = 2.26 <3.38..... a k

Thus, the concrete dimensions of the section are acceptable for shear and torsion.

190
Step 3.3.5: Torsional reinforcement

= 0.06 E = 0.06M = 0.29N/ mm 1

VYc V1.5

Since qtu>qtumin, torsional reinforcement is required. According to the ECP-203, the

torsional concrete strength is neglected, and the torsional stresses must be carried by
reinforcement
Assuming spacing of 100 mm, the area of one branch Astt equals

xS 32.1x10 xl00
A,„ =- = 73.97 mm2
2 x i „ x / / ys 2x104040 x 240/1.15

A,r * Pk / « 73.97x1780(^240^ nnn. 2

Asl = ■-------------- ---- =790 mm
U J 100 V400)
Calculate the minimum area for longitudinal reinforcement AS|itl

0 .4 .r -^ A cp , \
A str XPh J yst
Asl .irtin
fy'T c \fy J

A b
There is a condition on this equation that ——> -------
•s 6 x f ys
73.97 ^ 250
------ > ---------...o.k
100 6x240

0 . 4 ^ | x 2 5 0 k 8 0 0 7 3 9 1 x „ m ( 2 i 0 , n -

A si,min ------------------------------------------------- = 320 mm

400/1.15 • -.100. 1 400 j
Since As| > .. .o.k
Choose 8<|>12 (904 mm2)

191
Step 3.3.6 Reinforcement for combined shear and torsion
Since it was previously computed that no shear reinforcement is needed (Ast=0), the
area of one branch for combined shear and torsion equals
Astr + AJ2= 73.97 + 0 = 73.97 mm2
Choose <j) 10 mm (78.5 mm2)

A : = Q ^ -b x s = ^ - 2 5 0 x 1 0 0 = 4 1 .6 7 mm2
■ f 240

Total area = 2 As,r + As, > Asl mia .

= 2 x 73.97 + 0 = 147.94 mm >41.67 mm ....... o.k.

Final design use <j>10 @ 100 mm .........

. '5<p8/m'
2 <l>1 0 /ste p

3<D12

2<t>12
1 0 <j)1 0 /m '
5(j)8/m'

2012 5(ji8/ni'

3020

250 1600

sta ir m a in rft. 2 0 1 0 /ste p

Stair reinforcement details

192
 3012

<j>10/100 mm
10/100 mm
. -i- 2012

2012
8012
2012
+

3016 :3016+2012
■-=3020

Flexural Shear & torsion Flexure, shear & torsion

reinforcement reinforcement reinforcement

Beam reinforcement details

193
5.3 S la b T y p e
In this type, the main supporting element is the slab itself. The flight could be
supported on the landing, which is in turn supported on the supporting beams. From
the structural point of view, it is better that the main supporting element is spanning in
the short direction. However, this depends on the surrounding beams. If the beams
exist around the perimeter of the stair well or at least along the long sides, solution A
in Fig. 5.8 is more economical. If the supporting beams are only at the short side,
solution B is the only valid structural system.

E3-
main slab

-Q
W
G)
tiO
Cl
CL
3
oo

& tfnh t(i7b

Solution A Solution B
Fig. 5.8 Proposed structural systems for a slab-type staircase
The applied live loads are based on the plan area (horizontal projection), while the
dead load is based on the sloped length. To transform the dead load into horizontal
projection the average vertical thickness is used tavg (Eq. 5.11) as shown in Fig. 5.9.
However, the depth used in design (d) is perpendicular to the slope (Eq. 5.9) as shown
in Fig. 5.9. Slab thickness ts is taken as (1/25 to 1/30 from the slab span).

............-........................................(5.8)
s 25-30
d = ts -cover ...................................................(5.9)

...................................................... (5.10)
cos 6

t =,* + ™ ................................................(5.11)
mg 2

Stair total self weight =tavg x yc ..................................(5.12)

194
 Fig. 5.9 Effective depth and reinforcement in a slab type staircase

The uniform loads w„ is the summation of the (stair +slab) weight (using tavg), covering
material (0.8—>1 kN/m2), and live loads. The effective span Leg is taken as

w„= 1.4 wDL+ 1.6 wLL............................................. (5.13)

mv=1.4 [tavg x yc + covering material(0.8—>1)}+ 1.6 wLL(3—>4) .............(5.14)

If the slab thickness exceeds 160 mm, a top reinforcement mesh must be supplied to
control shrinkage and temperature. However, this reinforcement is only required at the
landing level as the stair reinforcement acts as shrinkage reinforcement as shown in
Fig. 5.10.

shrinkage reinforcement

195
Since the landing and the stairs are not straight, internal forces are generated in these
sloped elements. The two tensile forces T[ and T2 generated at the kink, producing a
third outward force F as shown in Fig. 5.11. This force tends to cause splitting cracks
if the produced stresses exceed concrete tensile strength. Thus, tension reinforcement
should be extended from each side so that no outward force is generated.

Fig. 5.11 Internal forces developed in the landing and the sloped slab

196
Photo 5.5 Cantilever staircase

197
Example 5.2
Design the staircase shown in figure below as slab-type. The live load is 4 kN/m2, the
characteristic strength of concrete is f cu =30 N/mm2 and steel yield stress is f/=280
N/mm2. The weight of the covering material is 0.75 kN/m2 for the stairs and 1.8 kN/m2
for landing. Floor height=3.3 m and yw is 12 kN/m3

S tcp l: Staircase layout and loads

Assume the riser height is 150 mm

xr u f • 3.3x1000 „ .
Number of goings = —-j-—— = 22 going,

Using three flights with tread width of 300 mm as shown in figure

B1 at floor level
B3 at landing level
G> r~ ©
B2 landing level

S3.
floor level i . ij

■ 0

~T" 1.70 3.0 1.70

6.40

198
The slope of the stair equals

G= tan' 1

Assume the slab thickness X = ^H . = ^22® = 1 5 6 7 ~ jgo

30 30
160
t =- =178.9 mm
cos(0) cos(26.56)

t
«•* = t ' + ^ 1
2
= 1 7 8 .9 + —
2
= 2 5 3 .9 mm

Stair self weight =tavgx yc = 0.2539 x 25=6.347 kN/m2

Step 2: Design of Slab SI

Step 2.1: Calculation of loads
wu= 1.4 wDL+1.6 wll=1.4 (self weight +covering material)+ 1.6 wLL
w„=1.4x (6.347+0.75) + 1.6 x 4 = 16.34 kN/m2
Taking one meter then wu= 16.34 kN/m'
Slab SI is supported at the centerline of slabs S2 and S3

16.34 kN/m'

u n m m iD

199
The reaction at each end (R) equals
w„x3 16.34x3
R - = 24.5 kN
2 2

Step 2.2: Design for flexure

The maximum bending moment is at the middle and equals
1 52 1 52
M = R x (0.85 + 1.5)-w x —— = 24.5 x 2.35-16.34 x ———= 39.2 kN.m
v ' " 2 2
Assuming concrete cover of 30 mm for the secondary direction and 20mm for the
main direction
d = 160 - 30 = 130 mm (secondary direction slab S2)
d = 160 - 20 = 140 mm (main direction slab SI)
39.2 xlO6
R -- = 0.0773 ft)=0.098
fc b d1 30xl000xl302
f 30
A = 0 ) ^ b d = 0.098 x — x 1000x130 = 1365 mm2
/, 280

=— £x<f = — 1000x130 = 325 mm2<As

100 100
Choose 6 <|> 18/m' (1527 mm2)

Step 2.3 Design for shear

According to the ECP 203, concrete shear strength of slabs equals to:

If fy)
<7 =0.16 =0.16-/— =0.715 N/ mm 2
V 1.5 V1.5
QU=R=24.5 kN

<2„ 24.5x1000
4„ = = 0.188 N/ mm2
1000x130

200
Step 3: Design of Slab S2

Step 3.1: Calculation of loads

Slab S2 is supported on the beams located on axis 1,2 at the floor level. The reaction
o fth eslab S l is applied at the centerline of the slab S2. Since the width of S2 is 1.7 m,
the reaction R will be distributed along this width. Thus the load per meter (R') equals

R' = = j i i i = 14.4 kN lm '

B 1.7

Or /?' =---------------%<?'"'>--------------- = 24-- X1-7 =14.4 kN lm '

/ntersection area between S, and S2 1.7 x 1.7
Landing self weight =t x yc = 0.16 x 25=4.0 kN/m2
wu= 1.4 wDL+ 1.6 wLL=l .4 (self weight +covering material)+ 1.6 wLL
The weight of the covering material for the landing is given as 1.8 kN/m2
w„=1.4x (4.0+1.80) + 1.6 x 4 = 14.52 kN/m2
Taking one meter width of the slab (b=1000 mm), then
ws„= x 1 = 14.52 x 1.0 =14.52 kN/m'

R'=14.4 kN/m' R'=14.4 kN/m'

O ')iin 11 m ~ m ir
wso= 14.52 kN/m'
rt i n t n 11 m m i i r
R2=53.55 kN*
[ R2=53.55 kN
1.70 m P-601? 1.70 m
4.0 m

Step 3.2 Design for flexure

W x4 14 S ? y 4
R2 = -&---- + R x i.7 = i 2 i i —I + 14.4x1.7 = 53.54 kN
2 ■ 1
The maximum moment is at mid span

M =R2x2- Ws “ X 2 --- ^ 'x l.7 x (— + 0.3)

2 2 '

M = 53.55 x 2 - 1452x 2— 14.4 x 1.7 x (— + 0.3) = 49.9 kN.m

2 2
d = 160 - 20 =140 mm —>(main direction)

201
 49.9 xlO6
£ =■ 0.085
fmbd2 30x1000x140
Using the R-to curve —►
—*<a=0.11
f 30
A , =<vJ-^-b d =0.11x-^r-x l0 0 0 x l4 0 = 1650 mm2
/v 280

A mi = — 6 x d = — 1000xl40 = 350mm2<As
sm l" 100 100
Choose 6 <j>20/m' (1885 mm2)

Step 3.3: Design for shear

According to the ECP 203 clause 4-2-2-1-6-d, concrete shear strength equals

<7 = 0.16 = 0.16 J — = 0.715 N/ mm 2

Hc“ VI.5 V1.5
Qu= R=53.55 kN
Qu _ 53.55x1000
=0.38 N / m m 2 <qcu...o.k
bxd 1000x140

Step 4: Design of slab S3

Slab S3 is supported on the beams, the reaction of the slab SI is applied at the middle
of the slab
Landing self weight = ts x yc = 0.16 * 25=4.0 kN/m2
w„=1.4 x (4.0+1.80) + 1.6 x 4 = 14.52 kN/m2
The weight of the stairs equals = 16.34 kN/m' (same as slab SI)

R-14.4 kN/m' R'=14.4 kN/m'

o n r rrn 11 n 11 rrt
wu=\6.34 kN/m'
wm=14.52 kN/m'l T i l I X f F f T T h m -T I IT ! “W-14.52, kN/m'

1 .7 0 m
|).6Qnji 1.70 m

4.0 m

Comparing the loads acting on slab S2 with slab S3 reveals that they are almost the
same, thus the same reinforcement used in slab S2 is used in slab S3
Choose 6 <j>20/m' (1885 miii2);’ ' >»■

20:2
203
Step 5: Design of supporting beam 81 on axis 1
The supporting beam B1 exists at the floor level and beam B3 exists at the landing
level as shown in the figure below. Beam B1 supports the slab S2 while B3 supports
the slab S3.
Step 5.1: Calculation of loads
The beam at the landing level B1 carries its own weight, stair load and wall load.
Assume beam size is 250x700 mm
Self weight of the beam= 1.4 x yc * b * t=1.4 * 25 x 0.25 x 0.7 =6.125 kn/m'
slab load equals to the reaction of the slab S2 (wsu) = 53.55 kN/m'
Wall load = 1.4 x Yw x b x hw= 1.4 x 12 x 0.25 * (3.3/2-0.7) = 4 kN/m'
w„6=6.125+ 4.0 = 10.125 kN/m'

column column

Elevation of beams on axis 1

Step 5.2: Reactions and bending moments

A? 1 72
10.125x — + 53.55x —
/? = ----------- 2-------------- — = 44.45 kN
6.4

Rl = 10.125 x 6.4 + 53.55 x i .7 - 44.45 = 111.3 kN

204
 ws„=53.55 kN/m'
I.t i I J U \
^=10.125 kN/ra'

r
[t t t t i m i n i t i i n r n fT T T i n

‘ Rl=J11.3
4 Rr=44.45

1.70 m , 4.7 m
1
6.4 m
i xm=4.395
1

Mu,max 97.6

44 45
Point of zero shear from the right support =x,„ = — :— = 4.395 m
m 10.125
x 4 3952
M« = r r x x ,„ x— = 44.45 x 4.395-10.125 x———- = 97.6 kN .m
d = 700- 50 = 650 mm

Since some part of the beam is not connected to slab, it shall be designed as
rectangular section
97.6 xlO6
R 0.031
fm bd2 30x250x650
From the R-co curve —>—►co=0.037
f "SO
A,, = a> d = 0.037 x— x 250 x 650 = 644 mm2
fy 280

As.mm 250 x 650 = 715 m m 2 <As~* use Asmin

Jy
Choose 4 <(>16 (804 mm2)

Step 5.3 Design for shear

qcu = 0-24 = 0.24 = 1.06 N/ mm 2

Q u .m a x = R R = H 1 . 3 k N

205
The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support. The column width
(c) equals 0.25 m, thus

fi. = - (" „ + "U )x (§ + f ) = 111 -3 - (5 3 .5 6 + 1 0 .1 2 5 ) x + ° | * ) = 8 2 .6 2 WV

qu = = 8-2 -62 X1000 = 0.508 N/ mm 1 <qcu ...o.k

“ £x<f 250x650

provide minimum shear reinforcement

°-4-xx 6u xx j =
= -T
—— x 250 x 200 = 71.43 mm 1 fo r two branches
f7 y 280
Choose 5 (j) 8 /m'

4<P16

Beam elevation

2<tl2

5<^8/m'

4 < tl6

250
S e c 1-1

Beam reinforcement details

206
Example 5.3
Design the staircase shown in figure knowing that
fcu =25 N/mm2, f y=360 N/mm2 and f ySf=280 N/mm2
The weight of the covering materia! is 1.0 kN/m2. The live loads on the stair may be
taken as 4 kN/m2

supporting beam (Bl)

e
o * "
column 0.3x0.3

Floor beam
supporting beam
I-
6.15 m

3.0 m 4.5 m

section A

section B

207
Solution
Step 1: Design of the flight
Step 1.1: Load calculations
Assume the riser height is 150 mm and the tread width is 300 mm, the slope of the
.stair equals
0 =tan- ( ^ =tan-.(l5O) = 26.56'
Vtread ) V300

Assume slab thickness ts equals to 150 mm

150
■= 167.7 mm
cos(0) cos(26.56)

t»vS = t' 2 = 167.7 + —2 = 242.7 mm

Stair self weight =tavg x yc = 0.2427 x 25=6.068 kN/m

wu= 1.4wDL+ 1.6wll=1.4(self weight +covering material)+ 1.6wLL

wu=l.4x (6.068+1) + 1 . 6 x 4 = 16.29 kN/m2
Taking one meter then w„= 16.29 kN/m'

Step 1.2: Flexure design

Assuming that the supporting beam width is 300 mm, then the effective span for the
stairs is given by .

T
L — nI 1 variable

1350 mm

|-«— 300 mm
1500 mm

208
 (1.35 + 0.24 = 1.59 m
L^r - nnin •{~amr ' "« = min <
11 Iedge to CL 11.5

Leff= 1.5 m
Assuming an edge live load of 1.5 kN/m'. P„=1.6 x 1.5 = 2.4 kN/m'
The slab is assumed fixed in the beam and the bending moment in the slab equals

P„=2.4kN
w„=16.29 kN/m'

fguiiiniiiniii'

The structural system for the sla is cantilever slab form

M =
2 ‘* . + p • xL <€ = I 6'2—2 1:50 + 2.4x 1.50 = 21.9 kN.m
Thus, assuming 30 mm concrete cover, the effective depth is vertical distance in the
slab thickness which is connected to the beam as shown in figure below
dms = tm - cov er = 2 4 2 .7 -3 0 = 212.7 mm

21.9x10
R= = 0.019
ffcu
c u b davgj 25x1000x212.7
From the R-ra curve (o=0.0228

209
 A = a > ^ - b d = 0.0228 x— x 1000 x 212.7 = 337 mm1
fy 360

A , min = —— b d = - ^ - x ! 0 0 0 x 2 1 2 . 7 = 3 5 5 mml >A s — ►u s e A s mi„

s' fy 360

As / step = 0.3 xA s =0.3x355 = 101 mm2

Choose 2 O 10/step (157 mm2)

Step 2: Design of the landing

The thickness of the landing is the same as the stairs =150 mm
Landing self weight = tx y c = 0.15 x 25=3.75 kN/m2
w„j= 1.4 wDL+ 1.6 wLL=1.4 (self weight +covering material)+ 1.6 wLL
w„/=1.4x (3.75+1.0) + 1.6 x 4 = 13.05 kN/m2
Taking a strip of one meter
w„f= 13.05 kN/m'
Assuming an edge live load of 1.5 kN/m'. Pu=1.6 x 1.5 = 2.4 kN/m'

P„=2.4 kN
I w „ = 1 3 .0 5 k N /m '

liru-Hi.in-iiiiiXilK\
i ______Lef^l.50 m________ ^ |
VIU- 1 8 .3 k N .m

, ». « £ _, '.y 4xl s , 18,3tNjn

2 2
•Assuming 30 mm concrete cover, the effective depth equals
d = t - cover = 150 - 30 = 120 mm

* =- £ - ,= ...——0.05!
f cu b d 2 25x1000x120

From the R-cd curve

(o=0.062

A, =<jt>^-b d = 0 .0 6 2 x - ^ - x 1 0 0 0 x 1 2 0 = 518 mm1 > A,j,nnn

fy 360
Choose 5 <J> 12/m' (565 mm2)

210
 1®10 (straight)

^300^
Section A-A
2 0 10/step

I---------------------------” -------- ----------- ----- ------------- ---------~ l

5<t>8/m'

Stair main reinforcement

211
Step 3: Design the supporting beom (Bl)
Step 3.1: Design for flexure
Step 3.1.1: Calculation of loads
Assume the beam cross section is 300x800 mm
The horizontal projection weight can be obtained from

t t - t s 800-150
t = ------- = ------ —= ----------- = 726.7 mm
cos(&) cos(0) cos(26.6)
Self weight = 1.4 x yc x b x t'
Self weight=1.4 x 25 x 0.30 x 0.7267 = 7.63 kN/m' (H.P.)

The beam load (wub,) equals (in the stairs part)

wubi~ ow. + wu x flight width + 2 x hand rail live load
wM =7.63 + 16.29x3 + 2x2.4 = 61.3 kN I m'

P„-2.4 kN Pu-2.4 kN Pu=2.4 kN

wu= l6.29 kN/m' wu=13.05 kN/m'
l U T T j IT f T IL 3Ji n n n i i n i>inr
1.350 m 1.350 m t’

H I h*— 0.30 m H — 0.30 m

3.0 m ---------------------- 3.0 m ----------------------

Stairs loads Landing loads

212
The beam load (wuW) equals (in the landing part)
wub2= ow. + wu x flight width + hand rail live load
o.w = 1.4 x yc x b x (t-ts)=l .4 x 25 x 0.30 x (0.8-0.15) = 6.825 kN/m'
wa42 = 6.825 +13.05x 3 + 2.4 = 48.375 kN/m'

wub2=48.375 kN/m' ______________________wubl=61.3 kN/m'

HMurrnilHtlHHHIimKH

|—-------- X t I

Step 3.1.2: Calculation of bending moments

^ _ w ubl x 4 .6 5 x ( 4 .6 5 /2 + 1 .5 ) + w „ t2 x 3 x z e/t> _ 61.3 x 4.65 x ( 4 .6 5 / 2 + 1.5) _ ^ ^ fcpj
1~ 6.15 ~ 6.15

&i =wui,i x3+woi)Ix4.65- R l = 48.375x3+61.3x4.65-177.3=252.9kN

Point o f zero shear = =-2.69 m

x2 2 892
M*m = Ri* xy - w „ x i - = 177.3x 2.89 -61.3x ± y - = 256 kN.m

213
Step 3.1.3: Design of the critical sections

Section 1
This section has positive bending (256 kN.m), but we shall neglect the contribution of
the stairs and design the beam as rectangular section
Using R-w curve
d = t - 50 mm= 800- 50= 750 mm

R = M-“ - = — ?56xl0— 006l

f cubd 25x300x750
From the curve it can be determined that ©=0.075

f 25
As = G>±2Lbxd = 0.075---- X300 x 750 = 1179mm2 >As,min
360

° 2-25- '- *300 x 750 = 703m m 2 J < A , o.k

= smaller o f fy 360
1.3A, =1.3x1179 = 1532 m m 2

use (5® 18, 1272 mm2)

Section 2
,, 48.375x1.5
= 54.4 kN.m
Using R-w curve

fjb d 2 25x300x750:
From the curve it can be determined that a>=0.015

As = a ^ - b x d = 0.015 — x300x750 = 235mm2 < A ‘min

fy 360

1.3x235 =305 mm2 J> A , ok

Use A s=A s,min=305 m m 2

Choose (2 <t>20)

214
Step 3.2: Design the beam for Shear
It should be mentioned that the case of loading that causes the maximum bending
moments in the beams results in no torsional moment. However, it produce the
maximum shear
Step 3.2.1: Check the adequacy of the concrete dimensions
The critical section for shear and torsion is at d/2 from the support.
x (j+ f

Qu = 252.9-48.375 x 0 ^ + ^ j = 227.5 kN

Qu 227.5x1000 2
q„ = -=*- = -------------- = 1.01 N/mm
bxd 300x750

^.max = 0.70 pfesu- _=a0.70,

' t a / 2 5 _ ^ o hr i ___ 2
— = 2.8 NI mm
V Tc V1-5

since qu< qumia, the concrete dimensions are adequate.

Step 3.2.2: Design of the transverse reinforcement

qm = 0.98 N I mm1

Since the applied shear is greater than qcu shear reinforcement is needed

qs =qu - ^ - = 1.01-— = 0.52 N /mm2

2 2

Assume spacing of 100 mm

<7S„--------=
Aa = m x b x s -------------------=
0.52x300x100 64 mm 2
f ys, / 1.15 280/1.15
use 10 <j) 10 /m

Step 3.3: Check the case of loading that produces shear and torsion
Step 3.3.1: Calculate shear and torsion stresses
The unsymmetrical loading of the flight produces combined shear and torsion as
shown in figure below. For simplicity, the loading of the landing is taken the same as
the flight (conservative).

215
A. Torsion Stresses

M ,= 1 . 6 I X x ~ ~ + P u x 1.5 + (1 .4 DL-0.9 D L ) x ~ -

LL = 4 kN/m2 and DL=(6.068+1)=7.068 kN/m2

1 5J 1 52
= 1 .6 x 4 x + 2 . 4 x 1.5 + (1.4 x 7 . 0 7 - 0 . 9 x 7 . 0 7 ) x = 14.78

1.6 LL
n T r r m T
Pu=2.4kN
0.9 DL 1.4 DL

i 1.3S0 m
i
i
—— —— 0.30 m M,
B=3. 0 m

Load case that produce maximum torsion on beam

216
 7-652 7.652
M, x ------ 14.78 x ------
=70.3 kN.m
6.15 6.15

The critical section is at d/2 from the face of the column (300x300 mm)

M lu = M ,ol- M ^ | + | j = 7 0 . 3 - 1 4 . 7 8 x ^ + ^ j = 62.5 kN.m

Assume the distance from the concrete cover to the stirrup center line is 35 mm
Xi = 300 -2 x 35= 230 mm
yi = 800 -2 x 35 = 730 mm
p h = 2x(xl + yi) = 2x(230 + 730) = l920mm

Ach = ^ . y ,= 230 X 730 = 167900 mm2

Aa = 0.85Ao/l =0.85x167900 = 142715 mm2 Aoh

A, 167900 „
t = ——= --------- = 87.4 mm
ph 1920
62.5 xlO6
- = 2.5 A//mm2
2x A„xt„ 2x142715x87.4 x i=230

B. Shear Stresses
The critical section for shear is at d/2
wu2 =o.wll„lmae + l.4xD Lx(BI2) + l.6xLL x(B l2) + Pu + 0.9x£>Lx(B/2)
wul =7.63 + 1.4x7.07x1.5 + 1.6x4x1.5 + 2.4 + 0.9x7.07x1.5 = 44.01 kN/m'

R - w «2 x(6.15 + 1.5)2/ 2 44.0 1x (6.15 +1 -5)2/ 2 =2Q94kN

6.15 6.15
wu2=44.01 kN/m'
m ill]
Qu = 209.4-44.01 x | 1= 186.3 kN

Qu 186.3x1000
<lu = 0.828 N/mm
bxd 300x750

R=209.4 kN

11.5 m 6.15 m

217
Step 3.3.2: Check the adequacy of the concrete dimensions

o~nux =0.70 in
=0.70x,j—
\/11.5c = 2.86<4.0 N Imm
V
q,max= 2.86 N/mm2

-?raax

Vo.8282 +2.5? =2.63 <2.86.....

Thus, section dimension is acceptable for shear and torsion

Note: Since the section is very close to the maximum values, it is advisable to increase
the beam cross-section. However, from the architectural point of view, smaller depth is
preferable.

Step 3.3.3*. Reinforcement for shear

The concrete shear strength qcu equals

Since the applied shear is less than qc„ shear reinforcement is not needed

Step 3.3.4: Reinforcement for torsion

Since qtu (2.5)>qtumin (0.24) then reinforcement is required, and torsional concrete
strength is neglected. Assuming spacing of 100mm, the area of one branch A ^ equals

Mwx ; _ 62.5x 10* x 100

A,'sir

Calculate the minimum area for longitudinal reinforcement Asi,mi„

218
 A
There is a condition on this equation that —— >

0.40J — x 300x800
V1.5_________
1.5 90x1920
360/1.15 100
SinceAs, > AS|,min ...o.k
Choose 8^16 (1600 mm2)

Oo

300

Step 3.3.5: Reinforcement for combined shear and torsion

The area for two branches=2^j/r + A„ > Aslmm, or the area of one branch for combined
shear and torsion equals
Astr+Ast/2=90+0=90 mm2
Choose (j) 12 mm (113 mm2) (one branch)
04 04
As, min = —^ b x s = — 300x 100 = 42.85 mm1 (two branches)
fy 280

Ast,min(one branch) = 42.85/2=21.4 mm2 <113 mm2 ..... o.k

219
Step 4: Design of column (Refer to Chapter 8)
The column is subjected to compressive force in addition to bending resulted from the
torsion load case of the beam.
Pu= 2 09.4 kN

M,ui=70.3 kN

Madd=6.02

Additional moment Original column

The column is considered as case 1 (tbeam>f;coiumn) at the top and case 3 (foundation) at
the bottom in the in-plane and out of plane directions
HCoiumn =2.1= m, From Table 6-10 in the code for unbraced columns k= 1.6

H= k x HCoiumn =1-6 * 2.1 = 3.36 m

„ H, 3.36x1000
= 11.2 > 10—>additional moment is developed
b 300

X2xb 11.22x0.30
8= = 0.0188
2000 2000
M om =Pux &= 209.4x 0.0188 =3.94kN.m
+Mm,„ =70.3+3.94 = 74.24 kN.m

^tot(out of plan) ^ u + ^add “ 0 + 3.94 3.94 kN.m

P„ 209.4x1000
Rb =f cux b x t = 0.093
25x300x300
The column is subjected to biaxial bending, from code Table 6.12.a with Rb=0.1—>p=0.8

M ' = M +P\ — |M „ = 74.24 + 0.8x [ — 1x3.94 = 77.39 kN.m

•' H\ b ') y v270y
M[ 77.39 xlO6 on5
f^xbxt2 25x300x3002

Using interaction diagram with uniform steel, f y=360 N/mm2 and £=0.8—►—»p = 8.0

fj = p x f a xlO"4 = 8.0x25x10^ = 0.02>nmi„

220
As ,ol„, = /uxb x t = 0.02x 300x 300 =1800mm:

Choose 8® 18 (2035 mm2)

300 mm

Photo 5.6 Cantilever stairs from a middle beam

221
 >—
r --------- --------3
2016
e-
N
o

2016
ia 5020

Flexure rft. shear and torsion rft. Flexure, shear,

and torsion rft.
S ec 1-1

Beam reinforcement details

222
SHORT COLUMNS SUBJECTED TO
CONCENTRIC COMPRESSION

Photo 6.1 Reinforced concrete columns in a shopping center

6.1 Introduction
Columns are the most important structural element in buildings. A great number of
structural failures are attributed to column failure. A plain concrete column can carry
compression forces, however its ultimate Capacity is greatly enhanced by adding
vertical bars. For normal ratios of reinforcement, the increase in strength due, to the
addition of vertical reinforcement can range from 15-40 percent o f the total carrying
axial capacity. Lateral reinforcement or ties are added to provide support to the
longitudinal bars and decrease the tendency of the bars to buckle out. They also
prevent the concrete from expanding laterally due to Poisson’s effect and accordingly
increase the concrete ultimate strain. Reinforced concrete columns are classified as
tied or spiral depending on the lateral confinement type.

223
In actual practice there are no perfect axially loaded columns. Some percentage of
eccentricity will occur due to the reduction of the size of the column from one floor to
another or the misalignment of the column. Hence, a minimum longitudinal
reinforcement ratio has to be provided to account for any stresses resulting from the
eccentricity.
Reinforced concrete columns are usually classified as short or long depending on the
length to width ratio and end restraint conditions (refer to Chapter 7). The discussion
in this chapter is limited to short columns either subjected to axial loads.

6.2 Axially Loaded Tied Columns

6.2.1 Behavior and Strength

The failure of .the tied column is usually initiated by the spalling (falling) of the
concrete cover followed by the buckling of the longitudinal bars due to the lack of the
lateral support provided by the cover. The failure of axially loaded reinforced concrete
columns is brittle with little or no warning. Up to approximately 80% of the total load,
no sign of cracking appears. Suddenly vertical cracks start to appear with concrete
cover failure leading to the collapse of the column.
Since failure of columns is often sudden with a high potential for loss of life, columns
are designed with a much higher safety factor than beams. Because perfect straight
columns subjected to pure axial loading are subjected to the brittle failure mode, the
Egyptian code increases the strength reduction factors for concrete and steel tol.75
and 1.34, respectively.

0.67 x f cu/yc

Fig. 6.1 Strain and stress distributions for columns under axiai loads

When a column is subjected to axial loads, longitudinal strain develops in both

concrete and steel. Because of the perfect bond between steel and concrete, the strains
in the concrete and steel are equal. The total carrying capacity of the column is the
summation o f concrete and steel contributions. At failure, all the steel reinforcement is
assumed to reach yielding. Applying the equilibrium equation for the section shown in
Fig. 6.1 gives

224
 P _ ° '67f ~ b t | A- * f y (6.1)
Yc Ys

p“ = ~ M '1 = °-383/c“Ac+oj5Asc f y .............(6-2)

Where, Ac is the area of the concrete and Aic is the total area of the steel reinforcement.

The previous behavior is applied for perfect straight columns, which are practically
almost do not exist. Even for concentrically loaded columns, most codes impose a
minimum eccentricity to be considered in column design to account for dimensional
inaccuracies and uncertainties in the line of action of axial loads. The ECP-203
minimum eccentricity is given by Eq. 6.3 as follows

f0 .0 5 1
e . = bigger o f < ..................................................(6.3)
ss J [20 mm

The existence of moments leads to a reduction in axial load capacity. Thus the code
imposes a further reduction on the column strength by reducing the capacity by about
10% giving the following equation

Pu =0.3'5/cu Ac +0.67 f y Asc ............................................ (6.4)

Photo 6.2 Olympic stadium in Berlin

225
6.2.2 Code Provisions for Tied Columns
■ For short tied columns, the minimum vertical reinforcement is 0.8% of the
required cross sectional area but not less than 0.6% o f the chosen concrete
area.
* The maximum reinforcement ratio in columns is
• 4% for interior columns
• 5% for exterior columns
• 6% for comer columns
* The minimum vertical bar diameter is 12mm
* The minimum column dimension is 200 mm for both circular and
rectangular columns. However, in practice, column dimensions are usually
not less than 250 mm.
■ Intermediate bars should be added if the column width is greater than 300
mm as shown in Fig. 6.2.
• The maximum distance between two bars supported by ties is 250 mm.
The maximum distance between unsupported bars and supported bars
is 150 mm as shown in Fig. 6.2.
• The maximum vertical distance for ties is 15*the smallest longitudinal
bar diameter but not more than 200mm as shown in Fig. 6.3.
■ The minimum stirrup diameter is one quarter of the longitudinal bars but not
less than 8 mm
* The minimum stirrups volume is 0.25% of the concrete volume for one
meter o f the column.
0.25
V, = n x A sp
,n xprimeter > — — xfexixlOOO........................ ..(6.5a)
100

Vs = nxA sp xprimeter >2.5xb x t (mm1) ................................(6.5b)

where Asp is the area of the stirrups and n is number of stirrups per meter.

226
 300mm
< 250 mm < 250 mm
300 mm

(m—S ip 'S
II
.................... .................... ....................

< 250 mm < 250 mm < 250 mm

n11 •J _ J
•
.

< 250 mm < 150 mm

< 300mm

Ii I

r
H----- H
< 250 mm < 300 mm

< 300 mm < 150 mm

M
s—• -v •<!
ii •
r J t_ £ _ • _ • ! I
< 250 mm

Fig. 6.2 Column Reinforcement Details

227
 t

Fig. 6.3 Stirrups spacing requirements

Photo 6.3 Bridge column failure due to lack o f lateral reinforcement

228
6 .2 .3 S p lic in g o f V e rt ic a l R e in fo rc e m e n t
For columns that are not used as a part of a lateral load resisting system, the
reinforcement is spliced above each floor. Figure 6.4 shows lap details o f the most
widely used types in Egypt. The requirement for lap splice depends on the state of
stress at ultimate state. If the column is subjected to combined bending and axial loads,
tensile stress may occur and tension lap splice should be provided. For concentrically
load columns, the ECP requires compression lap splice of 40 <3>for high grade steel
and 35 <f>for mild steel.
Column cross sections might change from one floor to another due to change in the
axial applied force. Thus, the longitudinal bars may be discontinued or laterally
displaced. The maximum allowable slope for the bars is 1:6 as shown in Fig 6.4.A. If
the slope exceeds this limit the detail shown in Fig. 6.4.B-C should be followed. For
columns subjected to high lateral forces such as those used in seismic regions, the
splice is made at the mid-height of the column as shown in Fig. 6.4.D.

A: Slope less than 1:6 B: Slope more than 1:6 C: Slope more than 1:6

150mm

Sec. A-A

Spliced bars ©
Column reinforcement •

Fig. 6.4 Column lap splice requirements in structures with limited ductility
229
 500 mm
La = bigger o f Clear height / 6
Column bigger dimension (t)

^column ^

8<t>longintudnal
.s' = smaller of
^striuups

150mm

Fig. 6.4 Reinforcement of columns in ductile structures subjected to

large lateral force
230
Design steps for short columns (dimensions are not known)
1) Assume Asc= 0.01 A
Calculate Pu = 1AP[iL +l.6PLL
Solve the column equation to find Ac
Pu = Ac(0.35 f cu + 0.0067 f y )

2) Calculate reinforcement area Asc

Asc 0.01 AcreqUjred --> 0.006 Afc chosen
3) Design the stirrups diameter ds and spacing s
Check that 4 ^ 8 mm > dbar/4- (biggest bar diameter)
Check that s < 200 mm <15 dbar (smallest bar diameter)
4) Check that stirrups volume > 0.25%
nx Asp x primeter > 2.5 xb x t (mm1)

Note: In some cases, and due to architectural requirements, the cross-section of

the column could be limited to certain dimensions. Accordingly, the designer
has to provide the amount of longitudinal reinforcement that satisfies the
strength requirement. If such amount might case a difficulty in casting the
column, the designer could specify a higher concrete strength.

Design steps for short columns (dimensions are known)

1) Solve the column equation to find Asc
Pu = 0.35 f cu Ac +0.67 f y Asc

2) Check that
Asc^ Ascmi„ and Asc^ Ascmax
3) Design the stirrups diameter ds and spacing s
Check that ds > 8 mm > dbar/4 (biggest bar diameter)
Check that s < 200 mm <15 dbar (smallest bar diameter)
4) Check that stirrups volume > 0.25%
n x Aspx primeter > 2 . 5 x b x t (mm3)

231
Example 6.1
Design a tied column that is subjected to the following axial compression loads
PDL = 1057 kN
Pu = 400 kN
The material properties are as follows:
f cu = 35 N/mm2
fy =400 N/mm2

Solution
Step 1: Calculate column dimension
Calculate the ultimate load
p„ =1-4 PDL +1.6 Pu = 1.4x1057 + 1.6x400 = 2119.8AJV
Assume Asc= 0.01 Ac
Pu = Ac(0.35 f m + 0.0067 / , )

2119.8 x 1000 = Ac(0.35 x 35 + 0.0067 x 400 )

Ac = 141982 mm2
Assume column width b of 250 mm, then column thickness t equals

t= 600 mm

Step 2: Calculate reinforcement area

Ase =0.01 Ac,required >0.006 Ac,chosen

Asc =0.01x141982 = (1419 mm2) > 0.006 (250 x 600) o.k.

Choose 8 0 16 (1608 mm2)

232.
Step 3: Calculate stirrups
Chose stirrup diameter of 8 mm (>16/4) and spacing of 200 mm <(16 x 15)
Choose 5 <j>8 Jm'
Assume concrete cover of 25 mm from each side, the dimensions of the stirrups equal:
Stirrup A (200 x 550) Stirrup B (200 x 250)
The perimeter of the center line of the stirrups
p = 2 x (200 + 550) + 2 x (200 + 250) = 2400 mm
The volume of the stirrups in 1 meter equals
Noting that we have 5 stirrups per meter and Asp for (j) 8mm =50 mm2
Fsmia =2.5x250x600 = 375xl03 mmi

Vs =nxA x p =5x50x2400 = 600x103mm3 >Vsmi„...... o k

fifin mm
25 mm to CL of bar

25 mm cover

^ *
i

A
f- B .

233
Example 6.2
Calculate the maximum and the minimum loads that an interior column can carry
according the following data:
Column cross section (250 mm x 800 mm)
fa, = 30 N/mm2
fy =360 N/mm2

Solution
Since the column dimensions, material properties are given, the only variable is the
reinforcement area.

The maximum area steel for interior column is 4% thus Asc equals

^.max = ^ x 250x800 = 8000 mm2 ->• (18 <D25)

Pu = 0.35fa, Ac + 0.67 f y Asc

Pumav = —!— {0.35x30x250x800 + 0.67x360x8000} = 4029.6 kN

10001 1

The minimum area o f steel for a column is 0.8% of the required area

= ~ x 250x800 = 1600mm2 - ( 8 0 16)

Pu = 0.35 f CMAc + 0.67 f y Asc

pu {0.35 x 30 x 250 x 800 + 0.67 x 360 x 1600} = 2485.92 kN

• 1000 ’

Column with maximum reinforcement Column with minimum reinforcement

234
6.3 Axially Loaded Spiral Columns
6.3.1 Behavior and Strength
Tied columns are commonly used in buildings and structures in non-seismic regions.
Occasionally, when ductility or higher strength is required, a continuous circular steel
reinforcement in the form of a spiral is used instead of individual stirrups. This type of
column is called a spiral column.

Photo 6.4 Spiral reinforced concrete column

The main advantage of using the spiral reinforcement is the enhancement of the
concrete confinement developed by the closer spacing of spiral reinforcement as
shown in Fig. 6.5.

235
The closely spaced stirrups of the spiral and the vertical bars confine the concrete veiy
effectively. As a result, the concrete cover will spall off but the core will continue to
carry loads larger than the initial load that caused spalling (falling). This is due to the
enhancement of the compressive strength produced by the spiral. The spalling of the
cover gives a warning o f failure, and shortly after that the column will reach another
maximum load but under very large deformations.
Recognizing the difference between the failure modes of tied and spiral columns, the
ECP 203 specifies (refer to Eq. 6.6) an additional increase o f approximately 14% in
the ultimate load capacity than regular tied columns Eq. 6.4.

Fig. 6.6 Spiral reinforcement details

The ECP 203 states that the ultimate load a spirally loaded column is the smaller of
two values. The first value given by Eq. 6.6 is based on the axial capacity of the
concrete gross area Ac. The second value given by Eq. 6.7 considers the confining
effect of the spiral on the core strength

^ = 0 . 4 / . ^ + 0 . 7 6 / , 4 , ............................................ (6.6)

Pu = 0 .3 5 /^ A k + 0 .6 7 /, Asc +1.38x/J, Vsp ............................(6.7)

where
Ak is the area of concrete core enclosed by spiral stirrups
is the spiral reinforcement ratio
p is the pitch o f the spiral stirrups
f yp is the steel yield strength of the stirrups
Asc is the area o f the vertical steel

Dk =(D -cover)

236
 n A,„ Dk
V sp = ——— — >V “* sp,min .(6.8)

Asp is the area of the spiral.

P is the pitch o f the spiral (30—>80mm)

fa --1 .(6.9)
ftp. min = 0-36
VA yp
but
_ Vsp,mm . ( 6. 10)

ff \
J
V * * =0.36
Cj
[Ac ~ A k ] ............................................... (6.11)
\fyp J

The designer assumes a cross sectional area for the rebar used as spiral (8mm or
bigger diameter) and computes the required pitch. The pitch used must be within the
limitations o f the ECP 203 of 30 mm to 80mm. If the required pitch is less than 30
mm, a bigger diameter should be assumed. On the other hand, if the calculated pitch is
greater than 80mm, a decrease of the spiral diameter or the use of the same diameter
but with spacing of 80 mm should be considered.
The minimum area of the longitudinal steel for spiral columns is more than that for a
tied column, and is related to both the gross and core cross sectional areas of concrete,
and is given by

0.01 Ac (gross area)

A,•s.min
m= = the maximum of . ( 6.12)
0.012 A, (core area)

6.3.2 Minimum Spiral Reinforcement

The ability of the confined concrete to carry additional loads is attributed to the lateral
pressure developed on the concrete core by the heavy coils of the spiral. Experimental
tests proved that concrete axial compressive strength increases to the order of 4.1 times
the applied lateral pressure. The spiral column is designed so that the increased
capacity of the core due to spiral lateral pressure f 2 equals the loss that may occur if the
concrete cover spalls off as shown in Fig. 6.7. Thus, the capacity of the column
without applying the strength reduction factor equals,

4 .1 /2x ^ = 0.67 x / cu(Ac - A k) .(6.13)

237
 concrete core(Ak)

concrete
lateral cover
pressure

concrete
core

Spiral stirrup
spiral
pressure

Fig. 6.7 Lateral pressure developed in spiral columas

From the free body diagram shown in Fig. 6.8, and by equating the force in the steel to
the pressure on concrete, it can be concluded that

f 2x p x D k = 2 x A spx f ysp (6.14)

y _ ^ ysp
(6.15)

Fig. 6.8 Analysis of forces

Substituting in with expression 6.15 into Eq. 6.13 gives

(6.16)

238
Noting that A(c= n D2k/4

4 p X /g P 0r Dk ) = 0.33x/„, ) (6.17)
px

Rounding some numbers, Eq. 6.17 can be put in the following form

(6.18)

or

(6.19)

The previous equation is the ECP 203 equation for minimum stirrups.

6.3.3 Code Provisions for Spiral Columns

• The minimum area of steel is 1 % of the gross sectional area but not less than
1.2 from the core area.
• The minimum spiral bar diameter is 8 mm
• The maximum pitch for a spiral column is 80 mm and the minimum is 30 mm.

M in im u m s p ira l
p= 30-80 m m d ia m e te r is 8 m m

(2 0 0 m m ) m in

Fig. 6.9 Spiral column code requirements

239
D esign Step s
/. Assume ASC= 0.01 Ac
2. Solve the first equation to find Ac
Calculate Pu = \APDL +1.6 PLL
Pu =Ac(Q A fcu+Q M 76fy )

3. Solve the second equation to get Vsp

Pu =0.35 f a Ak + 0.61f y Asc +1.38 x f yp V
if Vsp =-ve use Vspmin
4. check Vs„min

=0.36 [4 -^ ]

5. calculate the pitch (p) using

X Asp Dk
P=

if p > 80 mm use p = 80 mm
if p< 30 mm increase spiral area (Asp) and recalculate p

Note: In some cases, and due to architectural requirements, the cross-section of

the column could be limited to certain dimensions. Accordingly, the designer
has to provide the amount of longitudinal reinforcement that satisfies the
strength requirement. If such amount might case a difficulty in casting the
column, the designer could specify a higher concrete strength.

240
Example 6.3
Design a spiral column to support an unfactored dead load of 1500 kN and an
unfactored live load of 700 kN. The material properties are f cu=25 N/mm2 , f y = 240
N/mm2 ,j$p=240 N/mm2

Solution
Step 1: Determine cross section and Asc
pu =1.4Po t+1.6Pu =1.4x1500 + 1.6x700 = 3220 kN
The most economical percentage of steel p. is 1% to 1.5%. Assume that ji= 1%,
substitute in equation to find the area of the cross section as first trial.
P. =0.4 f a Ac +0.76 f , A x

3220 x 1000 = 0.4 x 25 x Ac + 0.76 x 240 x (0.01 Ac)

Ac = 272327 mm2

AC= ~ D 2
c 4
D = 588.84 mm
The nearest round number is 600 mm. Assume that the concrete cover is 25 mm then
the core diameter Dk equals
Dk=600-50 —550 mm

The area of the concrete, A. = —D2 = —6002 = 282743 mm2

c 4 4

The area of the core, A = —D} = —5502 =237583 mm2

’ * 4 4
„f0.01Ac =0.010x282743=2827 mm2
A r . = the maximum of ,
1^0.012 At =0.012x237583 = 2850.mm2 J

Asc= 0.01 Ac = 2827.43 mm2 <Asmil, u s e Asc=Asmin

y4sc=2850 mm2
Choose 12 18 (3053 mm2)

241
Step 2: Determine spiral reinforcement
Applying in the second equation to determine the volume of the spiral (Vsp)
Pu = 0 .3 5 .4 Ak + 0 .6 7 /, Asc + 1.38x/J?) Vsp

Note that A,c chosen will be used

3220 x 1000 = 0.35 x 25 x 237583 + 0.67 x 240 x 3053 +1.38 x 240 x Vsp
Vjp = 1963 mm2
Check that Vsp > V sp,m,„
tf
=0-36 J c [Ac - Ak] = 0.36 [282743 - 237583]
I'P >

Vsp,mm = 1693 mm < Vsp .o.k

600 mm

550 mm

Step 3: Design of spiral

Assuming that bar diameter of the spiral is 8 mm, Asp= 50 mm2.Use the following
equation to determine the stirrup pitch p

. 71 AsP At

x x 50x550 . . „
p = --------------= 44.2 mm
1962
Round to the smallest pitch p=40 mm
p <80 mm and p >30 mm .. ..o.k.

242
Example 6.4
Determine the ultimate load that can be supported by a spiral column having a cross
section of 800 mm with minimum area o f steel required by the code. The spiral
reinforcement is <j>10 every 50 mm. The material properties are f cu-2>Q N/mm2 , f y =
360 N/mm2 ,fyP=240 N/mm2

Solution
Step 1: calculate section properties
Calculate the cross sectional area of the column

A = - D 2 = —8002 = 502655 mm2

c 4 4
Dk=800-50 =750 mm

4* 4
The area of the reinforcement equals

JO.OI Ae 0.01 x 502655 = 5026 mm1

sc = bigger o f i n n „ 1 c™, 2
[0.012 4 0.012x441786 = 5301 mm1 J

y}„=5301 mm2

Step 2: calculate ultimate load

Substitute in the first equation
Pu =0.4/^, Ac +0.76 f y Asc

Pu = (0.4 x 30 x 502655 + 0.76 x 360 x 5301) /1000

Pu= 7482 kN
o m ro l -fXt* ml A m m _
Calculate the volume of the spiral,
i/aIik tia r t f
for <|>10 mm Asp=
*sp_ 78.53 mm2
n A,„
sp Dtk

„ 7c x 78.53 x 750 2
Vm = ----------------- = 3701 mm
,p 50

Applying in the second equation to determine the second ultimate load

Pu = 0.35/„ Ak +0.67/,, Asc + I 3 ^ f w Vsp

243
Pu 0.35x30 x 441786+ 0.67 x 360 x 5301 +1.38 x 240 x 3701 P„=7143kN
Pu is the smaller of the two ultimate loads, thus
P„= 7143 kN

Choose 12 $ 25 (5890 mm2)

800 m m

<|> 10 /50 mm

Photo 6.5 Circular reinforced concrete columns supporting a bridge

244
6.4 D esig n o f C o m p o site C olu m n s

The use of composite columns has become increasingly popular in high-rise buildings
construction due to several advantages such are:
1- Significant saving in material and construction time.
2- Smaller cross section and higher strength to weight ratio than conventional
reinforced concrete columns.
3- Inherent ductility and toughness that can be useful in resisting lateral loads.
4- Higher load carrying capacity due to the composite action of steel and concrete.
Furthermore the confinement of the outer shell in case of in-filled columns,
increase the compressive strength of concrete.
Composite columns can include concrete' filled into FRP shell (fiber reinforced
plastics) or into steel pipe. The ECP-203 defines composite columns as compression
members reinforced longitudinally with one of the following (refer to Fig. 6.10):
1- Internal structural steel shapes.
2- External steel pipe.
3- External steel tubing.

6.4.1 D esign G uidelines

1. Forces required to be resisted by concrete in the composite member shall be
transmitted to concrete through direct bearing on concrete. Bearing strength
should be checked in accordance to clause (4-2-4-1) or clause (5-6) of ECP-
203. All forces not directly transmitted to the concrete should be transmitted to
the steel section through connections attached to the steel sections.
2. Interaction diagrams for composite columns subjected to eccentric compression
force can be developed in a manner similar to that followed for regular
reinforced concrete columns.
3. All axial load strength not assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be
developed by direct connection to the structural steel shape, pipe, or tube. This
achieved through welding of shear connectors (small steel pieces) to the steel
shape or pipe before casting the concrete.
4. The maximum yield strength of the structural steel core shall not exceed 350
N/mm2.
5. Spiral reinforcement pitch and diameter should confirm to that mentioned in
non-composite reinforced concrete columns.
• p = 30 —80 mm
• </>>&mm

245
 6. The ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement (ju) shall not be less than 1% and
not more than 6% o f the net area of the cross section as follows:

u = - Asc >1%
A ,-A ,
< 6%

~ASC+ASS

Where Ag is the gross cross sectional area, Asc is the area of the reinforcement
and Ass is the structural steel area.
7. The moment of inertia of the longitudinal reinforcement may be added to the
structural steel moment of inertia as follows

Isc =moment of inertia of the longitudinal steel.

Iss = moment of inertia for the structural steel about the centroid.

8. The slenderness ratio of the composite column may be evaluated using the radius
of gyration given by the following equation:

(6.20)

Ag = gross area of the cross section

At = total area of steel (Asc+Ass)
Ec = Young’s modulus of concrete —*EC= 4400
Es = Young’s modulus of the structural steel (=200000 N/mm2)
Ig = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the centroid neglecting the effect
o f the reinforcement
It . = moment of inertia of the structural steel and reinforcement (Jsc+Iss)
In reinforced concrete columns subject to sustained loads, creep transfers some of the
load from the concrete to the steel, increasing the steel stresses. In the case o f lightly
reinforced columns, the load transfer between concrete and steel may cause the
compression steel to yield prematurely (too early), resulting in a loss of the effective
El due to creep in both steel and concrete. However, For heavily reinforced columns or
for composite columns in which the pipe or structural shape makes up a large
percentage o f the cross section, the load transfer due to creep is not significant.
Accordingly, in Eq. (6.20) only the term E l of the concrete is reduced for sustained
load effects.

246
 p r^ n r

1
<7
to_______ *
' A

I*____J L

a)External tube + steel reinforcement b)External pipe + steel reinforcement

c)Internal I-beam + steel reinforcement d)Internal angles + steel reinforcement

Fig. 6.10 Examples o f composite columns.

247
6.4 .2 T yp es o f C om posite Columns
6.4.2.1 Structural s t e e l confining c o n c r e te co re
Structural steel confining concrete core should have a wall thickness large enough to
reach yield stress before buckling outward. The ECP-203 requires that for a composite
member with concrete encased by structural steel tube or pipe, the thickness of the
steel wall shall be not less than:
For rectangular column with width b, the minimum thickness for each face as shown
in Fig. 6.10 is given by

(6.21)

For circular columns with diameter D

Where Es is the modulus of elasticity of external steel casing.

* Capacity of columns with ordinary stirrups

The capacity o f the encased concrete columns subjected to axial load with
minimum eccentricity (e < e„,j„) equals to:

P» =0-35 / „ Ac +0.61 A . +0.67 f ysc Ax ...................... (6.23)

Where:
f yss = Steel yield strength of the outer steel tube or pipe.
f ysc = Steel yield strength of internal steel vertical reinforcement.
Ass = Cro^s sectional area of the outer steel tube or pipe.
Asc = Cross sectional area of the internal vertical reinforcement.

248
* Capacity of circular columns with spiral reinforcement
The capacity of circular composite columns that are laterally confined is given
by:

Pu =0-40/„ Ac +0.67 f ys! Ass +0.76f ysc Asc ................... (6.24)

Where:
f yss = Steel yield strength of the internal structural steel shape.
f ysc = Steel yield strength of internal steel reinforcement.
Ass = Cross sectional area of the internal structural steel shape.
Asc = Cross sectional area o f the internal reinforcement.

In such a case, the amount of the spiral reinforcement should satisfy the
minimum requirements given by the following equations:

y, —j z A sp
m D kk ^jr/
................................... (6.25a)

V iyO.m.in =0.36 [Ac ~ A k\ ................................(6.25b)

f : yp J

Ac = j D 2 A k = ^ D 2k D.k =(D - cover)

where
Ac is the gross cross sectional area of the column.
Ak is the area of concrete core enclosed by spiral stirrups.
Asp is the cross sectional area of the spiral stirrups.
VSp is the spiral reinforcement volume.
p is the pitch of the spiral stirrups.
f yp is the steel yield strength of the stirrups.

249
6.4.2.2 Concrete surrounding Structural Steel Core

To maintain the concrete around the structural steel core in composite columns, it is
reasonable to require more lateral ties than needed for ordinary reinforced concrete
columns. The yield strength of the structural steel core should be limited to prevent
separation of the concrete. It has been assumed that axially compressed concrete will
not separate at strains less than 0.0018. According to the ECP-203 yield strength of
350 N/mm2 represents an upper limit o f the useful maximum steel stress.

The axial capacity o f the composite column with concrete surounding the structural
steel core may be calculated according to the type of ties as follows:

• Ordinary stirrups surrounding structural steel core

In case of using ordinary stirrups, the following requirements should be

satisfied:
1. The diameter of stirrups shall not be less than 8 mm and shall completely
surround the structural steel core.
2. Stirrups shall have a diameter not less than 0.02 times the greatest side
dimension of the composite member but not more than 16 mm.
3. Vertical spacing of stirrups shall not exceed (16<t) longitudinal bar diameters.
4. A longitudinal bar shall be located at every comer of a rectangular cross
section, with other longitudinal bars spaced not more than one-half the least
side dimension of the composite member or 150 mm.

The ultimate carrying capacity of the column is calculated by

P„ =0.35/c„ Ac + 0 . 6 7 Ass +0.67f ysc Asc ................... .......(6.26)

Where:
f yss = Steel yield strength of the internal structural steel.
f ysc = Steel yield strength of the longitudinal steel reinforcement.
Ass = Cross sectional area o f the internal structural steel.
Asc = Cross sectional area of the longitudinal reinforcement.

250
• Spiral reinforcement surrounding structural steel core

Concrete that is laterally confined by spiral reinforcement has increased load-

carrying strength.

In case of using spiral reinforcement, the capacity is given by:

Pu = 0 .3 5 /, Ak + 0 . 6 7 Ass +0.67/,sc Asc +1.38/„, Vsp ............ (6.27)

Where:
f yss = Steel yield strength of the internal structural steel shape.
f ysc = Steel yield strength of internal steel reinforcement.
f yp = Steel yield strength of the spiral stirrups.
Ass = Cross sectional area of the internal structural steel shape.
Asc - Cross sectional area of the internal reinforcement.
Vsp = Spiral reinforcement volume.

The amount of the spiral reinforcement should satisfy the minimum

requirement given by the following equation:

Vsp y D-k > vso,min...........................................(6.28)

v /
p
Where Vspmi„ is determined from Eq. 6.25.

The designer assumes a cross sectional area for the rebar used as spiral (8mm or
bigger diameter) and computes the required pitch. The pitch used must be
within the limitations of the ECP-203 (30 mm—>80mm). If the required pitch is
less than 30 mm, a bigger diameter should be assumed. On the other hand, if the
calculated pitch is greater than 80mm, a decrease of the spiral diameter or the
use o f the same diameter but with spacing of 80 mm should be considered.

251
Example 6.5
Design a rectangular composite column with an internal BPE No. 300 if the column is
subjected to the following axial compression loads
PDL = 1450 kN
Pu = 760 kN
The material properties are as follows
fa, =35 N/mm2
f ysc =360 N/mm2
fyss =300 N/mm2

Solution
Step 1: Calculate column dimension
Calculate the ultimate load
pu =l-4Poi +1.6 PLL = 1.4 x 1450 +1.6 x 760 = 3246 kN

The cross sectional area of IPE 300=5380 mm2

The axial capacity of a composite column is given by
P„ = 0.35/„ Ac + 0.67fyx Asc +0.67/,B Ass

Assume Asc= 0.01 Ac, thus

Pu =Ac\Q-35fcu +0.0067f ysc )+0.67 f yss Ass

3246x 1000 = Ac(0.35 x 35 + 0.0067 x 360 ) + 0.67 x 300x 5380

Ac = 147635 mm2
Assume column width b o f250 mm, then column thickness t equals
, Ac 147635 . . .
t = —- =-------- = 590.5 mm
b 250
t= 600 mm

Step 2: Calculate longitudinal reinforcement area

^ = 0 .0 1 ^

Asc = 0.0 lx 147635 = 1476 mm 2

Choose 16 3> 12 (1810 mm2)

The maximum horizontal spacing between the vertical bars equals

250 _j25 mm <i5omm 0k

2 2

252
 The ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement (i. should not be less than 1% and
not more than 6% from the net cross section
A-“- > 1%

<6%
_
I scjcftosen4-/4 ss

M= -------— -------= 1.27% > 1%.....o k .

250x600-7190
< 6% ....ok

Step 3- Calculate stirrups

In this type of composite columns, more lateral ties is required than for ordinary
reinforced concrete columns.

>8mm
The minimum stirrup diameter >t 150 = 600/ 50 = 12 mm
<16 mm

The vertical spacing between the ties should be less than 16 times the vertical bars
Chose stirrup diameter of 12 mm and spacing of 167 mm <(16 x 12=192 mm)
Choose 6 (J) 12 /m'

600 mm
25 mm to CL of bar
125 i 125 125 J2 5 J
25 mm cover

253
Example 6.6
Design a spiral composite column (D=600 mm) with internal IPE 330 to support
unfactored dead load o f 1940 kN and an unfactored live load of 1620 kN.
The material properties are as follows
fa, = 25 N/mm2
f ysc =360 N/mm2
f yp =240 N/mm2
f yss =400 N/mm2

600 mm

Solution
Step 1: Determine cross section and Asc
Pu =\.4Pdl +1.6Pll = 1 . 4 x 1 9 4 0 + 1 .6 x 1 6 2 0 = 5 3 0 8 ^

The area of the concrete, A. = —D 2 = —6002 = 282743 mm2

4 4
Dk=600-50 =550 mm
The area of the core,/!. =—D 2 = —5502 =237583 mm2
4 4
Assume that ji.= 1% -*-* Asc= 0.01 Ac = 2827.43 mm2
The chosen Aso is less than 1.2% otAk (2850 mm2 ), thus take Asc=2850 mm2
Choose 12 (j) 18 (3054 mm2)

254
 • The ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement n should not be less than 1% and
not more than 6% from the net cross section

u= A*~ >1%
A„ -A ,
+ Ass = 3054 + 6260 = 9314 mm

< 6% ....ok

Step 2: Determine spiral reinforcement

Applying in the column equation to determine the volume of the spiral (Vsp)

Note that f yss =400 N/mm2, however, according to the ECP-203, the maximum usable
structural steel yield strength is 350 N/mm2 f yss =350 N/mm2
5308 x 1000 = 0.35 x 25 x 237583 + 0.67 x 350 x 6260 + 0.67 x 360 x 3053 +1.38 x 240 x Vsp

Vsp = 3094 mm2

Check that Vsp > VsPitnin

f
V**. = 0.36 J-ss- [Ac
=°-36 ]= 0.36[282743-237583 ]
ftp )

V, = 1694 mm1 <Vsp ......o.k

600 mm

550 mm

255
Step 3: Design of spiral
Assuming that bar diameter of the spiral is 10 mm, Asp= 78.5 mm2. Use the following
equation to determine the stirrup pitch p

_ * K Dk

;rx78.5x550
p = ---------------- = 43.8 mm
3094
Round to the smallest pitch p=40 mm
p<80 mm andp >30 mm ....o.k.

256
Example 6.7
Design a spiral composite column with an external pipe to support an unfactored dead
load of 2400 kN and an unfactored live load of 1500 kN.
The material properties are as follows
f cu = 25 N/mm2
f ysc =280 N/mm2
f yp =240 N/mm2
f yss =350 N/mm2

Solution
Step 1: Determine cross section and Asc
p u = i A P DL +l -6Pu = 1.4 X 2 4 0 0 + 1 .6 x 1 5 0 0 = 5 7 6 0 kN

According to the ECP-203, the minimum thickness of the pipe equals

Thus minimum area of the pipe equals

Assume that the reinforcement ratio p. for the vertical bars= 1%

Pu =0.40f m Ac +0.67 f yss Ass +0.76/,Jc Aa
5760 x 1000 = 0.4 x 25 x Ac + 0.67 x 350 x 0.059 x Ac + 0.76 x 280 x (0.01 Ac)

A. = 221850 mm2 A = -D
4
D = 531 mm ■D=550 mm
Assuming that concrete cover is 25 mm then the core diameter Dk equals
Dk=550-50 =500 mm
The area of the concrete, Ae =—D 2 = —5502 = 237583 mm2
4 4

The area of the core, A, = —Dl = —5002 = 196350 mm2

4 4
Asc= 0.01 Ac = 2376 mm2 >1.2% o f ^ (2356 mm2 )....ok
Asc=2376 mm2 Choose 12 16 (2413 mm2)

257
Step 3: Determine the Pipe thickness

7T_, = 8.13ww Take t= 9 nun

D,l8E. 550 ^8x200000

=7cDt = ;rx550x9 = 15551««:!

• The ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement (//) should not be less than 1% and
not more than 6% from the net cross section
u= ---g - >1%

4 = ^ sc +/(„ =2413 + 15551 = 17964 mm2

2413
= 1.1% S 1%..../j*.
237 5 8 3 -1 79 6 4
< 6% .....o J f c

Step 3: Determine spiral reinforcement

The used spiral should be greater than the minimum spiral reinforcement specified by
the code
J CL
r*** =°-36 f
\y w y,
^sp.mm ~ 1546.3 m m

Assuming that bar diameter of the spiral is 8 mm, Asp= 50 mm2. Use the following
equation to determine the stirrup pitch p

x Dr
V,.,

wx 50x500 „ „ Steel pipe ot

p = --------------= 50.8 mm
1546.3
Round to the smallest pitch p=50 mm
p<80 mm andp>30 mm .. ..o.k.

550 mm

258
6.5 Calculation o f Axial Loads on Columns
The axial load on a column is the sum of the total loads that comes from all structural
elements such as beams, slabs, and walls. There are two approaches for calculating the
axial loads on columns namely, the area method and the reaction method.

6.5.1 Area Method

The first method is the area method in which the column is assumed to carry loads
acting on an area bounded by the centerline of the previous bay to the centerline o f the
next bay in both directions as shown in Fig. 6.11. This method is very effective in
calculating loads on columns with a symmetrical layout or on columns with flat slab
floors.

! ! ! !

This method can be used for floors containing projected beams. The reaction is
calculated by ignoring the effect of continuity and treating every beam as a simple
span. This method should be limited to plans with nearly equal spans. The effect of
continuity at point B can be implemented by multiplying the reaction by 1.1 as shown
in Fig 6.12.

259
 L, ---------- J - --------- £,,

w L i/2 w ( L 2+ L i) w L 2/ 2

Fig. 6.12 Effect of continuity on the calculation of column load

However, this method may lead to serious errors in buildings where large differences
exist in the adjacent spans either for flat slabs or slab beams floors. This is attributed to
neglecting the effect of continuity especially for unequal spans. For example, the
reaction on column B (shown in Fig. 6.13) when calculated by the area method gives
80 kN whereas the reaction obtained from the structural analysis equals 126 KN (about
57% eiTor)

20 kN/m' 20 kN/m'
T T T T T T T T rr r ix m n iE ix
A jM t'b A iQr Mfr B

2m 6m 2m Cmi

20 kN 80 kN 60 kN 14 kN 126 kN 4S kN
(tension)
Area method Exact analysis

Fig. 6.13 Comparison between area method and exact analysis

(where the use o f area method is not recommended)

260
6.5.2 Reaction Method
This method depends on the exact structural analysis of the structure either using a
computer analysis program or classical structural analysis. The reactions are calculated
from the shear loads. When using the computer, the whole structure is modeled and the
reactions are obtained from the final solution. For hand calculations, the structure is
divided into individual beams and the reaction of each beam should be added to give
the final column load.
The self-weight of the column should be added to these reactions or can be estimated
as 5-10% of the column load.

Photo 6.6 Column reinforcement placement in a high-rise building

261
7
DESIGN OF SECTIONS SU BJECTED TO ECCENTRIC
FORCES

Photo 7.1 The bridge over Suez canal

7.1 Introduction
This chapter deals with the analysis and design of cross sections subjected to axial
loads and bending moments. Concrete sections may be subjected to eccentric
compression or eccentric tension. The eccentricity of the load could be in one
direction “uniaxial" or in two directions “biaxial".
The behavior of the sections under combined axial compression loads and bending
moments depends on the magnitude o f the moment Mu and the axial force Pu. If Mu is
relatively small compared to Pm the eccentricity e will be small and the section will be
subjected to a small eccentricity. In this case, most of the section will be in
compression and column behavior will dominate. On the contrary, if Mu is large the
eccentricity e will be large enough so that the normal force will be outside the cross
section and the section will be subjected to a big eccentricity. In this case, the near side
of the section will be subjected to compression and the far side will be subjected to
tension, and beam behavior will dominate. The combination of an axial load Pu and
bending moment Mu is equivalent to a load Pu applied at eccentricity e =MU/Pu as
shown in Fig. 7.1.

M„

P u “ p,.
Mu

(a) Axial load and moment (b) Eccentric Load (c) Eccentric Load

Fig. 7.1 Representation of axial load and bending moment

263
7.2 In tera ction D iagram s
7.2.1 Definition
The interaction diagram or “the failure envelope” of a reinforced concrete cross-
section contains the different combinations of M u arid Pu that result in the failure o f the
cross section as shown in Fig. 7.2. Thus, an interaction diagram is a graphical
representation of all possible combinations of axial loads and bending moments that
cause failure for a given cross-section. In order to develop the interaction diagram, one
has to know the concrete dimensions of the section, the longitudinal reinforcement,
andfy.

Developing the interaction diagram of a reinforced concrete cross-section can be

achieved through the application of:
1. Compatibility o f strains.
2. Equilibrium of forces and moments.

Fig. 7.2 Interaction diagram o f a reinforced concrete cross section

264
7.2.2 Modes of Failure
Fig. 7.3 presents a series of strain distributions and the resulting points on the
interaction diagram. The state of stress developed in the concrete and steel controls the
type of failure. These modes are explained as follows

7.2.2.1 Compression failure mode

Point A corresponds to the case of pure axial loading and point A' represents the case
of axial loading with code minimum eccentricity (i .e. e/t=0.05). Point B represents the
case o f compression failure mode where the concrete reaches its ultimate strain of
0.003 and the tension steel does not yield. This failure mode is brittle, as the column
fails as soon as the concrete compressive strain reaches 0.003 without large
deformations or sufficient warning. Accordingly, the Egyptian code increases the
strength reduction factors for concrete and steel for such modes of failure.
This mode of failure belongs to columns with a relatively small bending moment.
0.002

Fig. 7.3 Modes of failure for a section subjected to eccentric forces

265
7.2.2.2 Balanced Failure Mode
At this point the concrete reaches its ultimate strain of 0.003 at the same time that the
tension steel reaches (/J/1.15) (point C). The maximum bending moment capacity for
the section occurs at this point (Mub). Loads larger than the balanced load Pub cause
compression failure and loads smaller than the balanced load Pub cause tension failure.
The position of the neutral axis cb can be obtained from the following equation:

690
(7.1)
690 + fy (iV /m m 1)

7 .2 .2.3 Tension failure mode

This is represented by point D on the interaction diagram. The strain in the steel is
larger than the yield strain and the steel will reach the yielding stress. This is a ductile
mode of failure since the section will crack and develop large deformations before
failure, thus giving sufficient signs of warning before the complete collapse. This
behavior is similar to that of beams rather than columns. If the axial force is equal to
zero, the section will reach the case of pure bending represented by point E. Both the
axial loads and moment capacities increase in this zone up to the balanced point.
Point F corresponds to the section axial tension capacity. The part E-F represents the
section capacity under the combined axial tension and bending. The modes of failure
and steel stress can be established from Eq. 7.2 and Table 7.1 as follows:

Compression Failure
f s <f y IYs (steeI did not yield )
c >ch
if > p »b 1e < e b (7.2a)

M u < M uh
ys >1.15 and yc >1.50

Tension Failure
f s =fy / r s (steel yields)
c< cb
ifP „ < P ub (7.2b)

< M ub
ys =1.15 and yc =1.50

266
Table 7.1 Steel stresses according to the type of failure

Type of failure Tension steel stress Compression steel stress

yields,/' = / / 1.15,or
Tension failure yields, f s- f y/1.15
Pu<Pub does not yield f ' = 600° ^
c
Compression yields,f's = f y/%, or
d c
failure does not yield, •/, = 600------ c d f
C does not yield, f ' = 600------
P„>Pub c

7.2.3 D evelopm ent o f th e Interaction Diagram

In this section the relationships needed to calculate different points on the interaction
diagram are derived using the principles of strain compatibility and equilibrium of
forces. The procedure followed to obtain a point on the interaction diagram is as
follows:
• Concrete strain at the outermost stressed fiber of the section is assumed to
be equal to 0.003.
• Because it is difficult to solve the equilibrium equations for a specific axial
load and bending moment, the neutral axis distance c is usually assumed and
the developed forces and moments in the concrete and steel are evaluated as
shown in Pig. 7.4a. Incrementing the neutral axis distance for enough points
gives the interaction diagram as shown in Fig. 7.3.
• According to the ECP-203, the strength reduction factors change depending
on the applied eccentricity (mode o f failure) and are given by

''• -‘' K l - f - ) " 1'5 ......................... :(7'3)

y , = 1 . 1 5 x ^ - ^ - j * 1 . 1 5 ......................................(7.4)

Note: if elt >0.50 then Ys=1.15 and yc =1.50

Fig. 7.4a Strain and stress distribution eccentrically loaded sections

267
 • Steel strains in both compression and tension steel are calculated using
similarity of triangles. The developed stress using the computed strain is
checked to ensure the yielding of the steel. Noting that Young's steel
modulus equals 200,000 N/mm , the stress in the tension steel is obtained
using the following compatibility equation

f - E x 0.003 x - —- = 600-——< — (tension if positive)..........(7.5)

c c ys
d —c f
\fs = 600-——<-i-
c ys

Similarly, the stress in the compression steel equals

c -d ' f
k ' = 600~— (compression if positive) ■(7.6)
c -v

The values of strength reduction factors and steel stresses are illustrated in
Fig.7.4b. It is clear from this figure that f =fy/1.15 if the point is in the ductile
failure mode (below the balanced point) and Eq. 7.5 should if the point in the
brittle failure zone (above the balanced point).

Fig. 7.4b Calculation o f tension steel stress(/j) In developing interaction diagram

268
The equivalent stress block distance (a) is assumed to be equal to 0.8c as
permitted by the code, and the corresponding concrete force is evaluated. The
total axial capacity is given by the following equilibrium equation

P„=Cc + C ,-T ............................................ .......(7.7a)

j> +A, x /. ........................... (7_?b)

• For symmetrical sections, the bending moment capacity of the section is

obtained by taking the moment of the individual forces about the c.g as
follows

• It should be clear to the reader that the corresponding bending moment can
be computed at any point in the cross-section similar to the case of pure
bending, but with one major difference in that the axial load is located at the
c.g along with the bending moment. Thus, if the bending is calculated at any
point rather than the c.g (or plastic centroid in case of unsymmetrical
sections), the normal force should be included. For example, the bending
moment at point “o” in Fig. 7.4 equals

M „ = P x i - :°-67/™ b (0-ScK ^ A : x f s'x d ' + As x f s xd ..... (7.9)

2 Yc 2

An example of an interaction diagram obtained using the aforementioned

procedure is shown in Fig. 7.8.

269
7.2.4 Plastic Centroid
Most of reinforced concrete columns are symmetrically reinforced. However, in the
cases where the eccentricity is large, it is more economical to place most of the
reinforcement on the tension side. In reinforced concrete sections with unsymmetrical
reinforcement the load must pass through a point known as the plastic centroid. The
plastic centroid is defined as the point of application of the resultant force(p„p)when
the column is compressed uniformly to the failure strain. Eccentricity must be
measured with respect to the plastic centroid as shown in Fig. 7.5. The strength
reduction factors yc and ys are taken as 1.75 and 1.34 receptively
For symmetrically reinforced sections, the plastic centroid coincides with the center of
gravity. The procedure for calculating the plastic centroid is illustrated in example 7.2

0.67 x fa, /1 .75

A's
U C s- A 'sfy/1.34

Cc
c-g

C T = A sf y / l .3 4

Plastic centroid

Fig. 7.5 Plastic centroid for sections with unsymmetrical reinforcement

Photo 7.2 Unconventional support for a Multifamily Building -Warsaw

270
Example 7.1
Calculate the balanced load and balanced moment for the section shown in figure
knowing that the material properties are
fcu=35 N/mm2
fy=400 N/mm2

50 mm

A's= 1800 mm

A s= t8 0 0 mm

5 0 mm

Solution
Step 1: Calculate Cb
The position of the neutral axis position at balanced failure is given by
690 . 690
ck =— — - a -800 = 506.42 mm
690 + / 690 + 400

ah = 0.8 xc =0.8 x 506.42 = 405.14 mm

Assume that yc=1.5,ya=1.15 (e/t>0.5) (will be verified later)

/ ; = 600 ^ = 600 5 0 ^ 5 0 = 540.76 N/mm2 » ...... steelyields

Ct, 506:42

f , 400
1 1.15
Step 2: Calculate the forces

0 . 6 7 xixaj 0.67x 35x 300x 405.14 1

C = = 1900.1/ciV
1.5 1.5 1000

400 1
C, - A' x ^ - = 1800x =626.1 kN
1 1.15 1.15 1000

T = A x-—^ = 1800x— x — = 626.1 KM

1.15 1.15 1000

271
Step 3: Calculate the bending moment
Computing moment at plastic centroid (e.g. in this case)

Muh =Cc( ± - ^ ) + Cs{ l - d ') + T(±~d')

l9O 0 . l ( ^ - i 2 | l l j + 626.1^ _ 5 0 ) + 6 2 6 .l[M _ 5 0 ' = 8 9 2 .2 1 kNm

1000

e 892 21
— = ---------:-------= 0.552 > 0 .5 0 ... ( o u r a s s u m p t i o n t h a t yc= l.5,ys= l . 15 i s c o r r e c t )
t 1 9 0 0 .1 x 0 .8 5

Note: The bending moment can be taken at any other point as long as the ultimate load
Pu is considered, thus

1
= 1900.lx — -1 9 0 0 .lx _ 62 6.lx 50 + 6 2 6. Ix 800 = 8 9 2 .2 1 kN m
2 2 1000
(same as before)

272
Example 7. 2
Locate the plastic centroid for the section shown in figure, knowing that
f cu =25 N/mrn2 mm I
fy =400 N/rnm2 • • 400 mm

yuu m m

h
• • • 1500 m m

Solution
To find the plastic centroid, the entire section is subjected to compression force, thus
yc=1.75 and ys=1.34. Assume 50 mm concrete cover
50 m m 0 .6 7 x 2 5 /1 .7 5
A 's= 4 0 0 m m 2 1— Cs= A 'J y/1.34
i
i
j a
Em.
1500 m m '
Cr=A, fjl.3 4
Plastic centroid > —I
300 mm

=4 0 0 x ^ x - 1 =1 1 9 .4 kN
1 .3 4 1 0 0 0

„ M 7 x ^ _ x j x / = 0.67x 25x 300x 900^ _ 1 _ _ ^

1 .7 5 1 .7 5 1000

CT =A, x f y =1 5 0 0 x — x 1 4 4 7 . 7 6 kN
ys 1 .3 4 1 0 0 0
The resultant of the three forces Pup equals
Pup ==CS +Cc +CT = 1 1 9 .4 + 2 5 8 4 .2 8 6 + 4 4 7 .7 6 = 3 1 5 1 .4 5 kN

Computing the moment of all forces at point o (bottom fibers)

Pup xXp =C, x850+cc x450+Cr x50
v 1 1 9 .4 x 8 5 0 + 2 5 8 4 .2 8 6 x 4 5 0 + 4 4 7 .7 6 x 5 0
X ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 0 8 .3 2 mm
' 3 1 5 1 .4 5

The distance of the plastic centroid to the c.g (ep) equals

e =--X„ = - - 4 0 8 . 3 2 = 4 1 .6 8 mm
p 2 2

273
Example 7.3
Construct the interaction diagram for the section shown in figure knowing that the
material properties are
f cu =30 N/mm2
J y - 400 N/mm2
50 mml

• .. 1 ) A 's= 1 5 7 5 m m
T
50mrr

_L • mm A s= 1 5 7 5 m m

b=250 mm

Solution
Point 1 (Pure axial compression)
The entire section is under axial compression and the neutral axis is considered at
infinity. The strain distribution is uniform at the ultimate strain and all the steel has
yielded in compression. Summing all the forces gives the total section capacity

0.67 x 30 /yc

b=250 mm

rc /s r,
Since the section is in pure compression e=0 thus yc=1.75 and ys=1.34

274
n 0.67x30x250x700 „ „ r 400 , „ r 400
Pu ------------------------- + 1575x----- + 1575x----- = 2950kN
1.75 1.34 1.34
Since the column has symmetrical reinforcement Mu=0
However, the ECP-203 does not permit the use of this capacity and assumes that any
column will be subjected to a minimum eccentricity o f (emin=0.05 t). Thus, use the tied
column equation
P„ = 0.35 f cuAc +0.67 Asc f y

Pu = 0.35 x 30 x 250 x 700 + 0.67 (1575 + 1575) 400 = 2681 kN

M » = pu-emi» = 268 lx (0.05x700) = 93835 Kn.mm = 93.84 kN.m

Point 2 (compression failure)

The compression failure occurs when the depth of the neutral axis is greater than its
depth at the balanced position. In this situation the tension steel stress is below the
yield stress and for the purpose of simplicity, the neutral axis position is chosen at the
tension steel location (c=d). Thus, the developed force in the tension steel is equal to
zero.

c=650 mm and a= 0.8 x c= 520 mm

To estimate the strength reduction factors Ys and yc, assume that e/t=0.2 (will be
verified later), thus

Since c=d thus, f s=0 and T=0

275
/ ' = 600-—— < —
c rs

r = 600^ 0 = 5 5 3 .8 5 > - ^ -
Js 650 1.265
rt f y 40 0 / n J.T / 2
/ ; = - ^ - = — — = 3 1 6 .2 N / m / n
' ys 1265

C = A 'x / ' =1575x316.2x-L- = 498 kN

1000

C = g P -6 7 x 3 0 x _ 2 5 0 x 5 2 0 ^ = ^
^ 1.65 1000

Pu= Cc + Cs - T = 1583.6 + 498 - 0 = 2081.6 kN

Computing moment at plastic centroid (the e.g. in this case)

Mu =Ce( ^ - | ) + C5(^ -rf') = [l583.6x(350-260) + 4 9 8 x (3 5 0 -5 0 )]^ ^ = 291.92Mjn

Check strength reduction factors

M “ 29L92=0.14
P„ 2081.6

yc = 1 . 5 x ^ - ^ l j = 1.68 « 1.65... o.k

ys = 1 . 1 5 x ^ . - ^ j = 1.288 * 1.265. ..ok

Point 3 (balanced point)

By definition at the balanced point the strain in the tension steel equals Sy/1.15. Thus,
the stress in the tension steel equals f / 1 .15.

276
 690 , 690 , . ...
ck = ——---- —d = - ------ — x650 = 411.47 mm
690 + f y 690 + 400

a= 0.8 c= 329.17 mm
Assume that e/t>0.50, thus yc=1.5 and ys=1.15 (will be verified later)

T = As x = 1575 x — = 547.83 kN
s 1.15 1.15

/; = 6oo— —
c rs
411.47-50
/ ; = 6oo = 527 > —
411.47

= — = 3 4 7 .8 3 N /m m 2
s Y,. 1-15
C, = 4 x f i = 1575 x 347.83 = 547.83 kN

C 0■67xfc« x b xa 0.67x30x250x329.17 M
Yc 1-50
Pu~ Cc+ Cs—T = 1102.72+547.83-547.83=1102.72 kN
Computing moment at plastic centroid (i.e. c.g due to symmetry)

M u =Cc( ± - l ) + Cs(± - d ') + T (± -d ')

329 17
Mu = 1102.72 x (350-----— ) + 547.83 x (350 - 50) + 547.83 x (350 - 50) = 533.16 kN.m

Check strength reduction factors

e I 'm . ) 533.16
=0.69
t I Pux t 1102.7x0.7
Since e/t > 0.5 our assumption that yc=1.5 and ys= 1.15 is correct

277
Point 4 (tension failure)
For tension failure to occur, the neutral axis should be less than the balanced point. Let
us assume the neutral axis position at c=2/3 cb (position for maximum reinforcement in
case of pure bending)

c = - c h = - x 411.47 = 274.31 mm ->a= 0.8 c= 219.45 mm

3 3
yc=1.5 and ys=1.15 (no need to check this assumption, because it was valid at the
balanced point)
The point is below the balanced load thus / = — = = 3 4 7 .8 3 n / mm2
rs 1 . 1 5
T = As x f s = 1575x347.83 = 547.83 kN

f ’ = 600 27431-50 = 490.6 > ^ -

274.31 rs

.-. / ' = L l = i5®. = 347.83 N / mm2

r s i.i5
Cs = A's X f's = 1575 X 347.83 = 547.83 kN

C °-67x fcu*b * a 0.67x30x250x219.45 _ ?3g ^ m

yc 1.50

Pu= Cc+ Cs- T = 735.16+547.83-547.83=735.16 kN

Taking moment about plastic centroid (i.e. c.g due to symmetry)

=C4 ~ f )+ Cs(2 ~ ‘f ) +r ( 2 ~ rf')

219 45
M u = 735.16 x (350 - — ) + 547.83 x (350 - 50) + 547.83 x (350 - 50) = 505.34 kN.m

278
Point 5 (Pure bending)
In the case of sections subjected to pure bending, locating the neutral axis must be
' performed by applying the equilibrium equation
Pu= 0 = C - T
yc=1.5 and ys= 1.15 (no need to check this assumption, because at the balanced point
this assumption was valid). Assume that compression steel did not yield.

/ ; = 600-—— = 600-——
c c
Cc+ C s- T = 0 or Cc+ C s- T

0 67/q, x b x a As x f y
1.5 + A X/* ~ T l 5 “

0.67 x30x250x(0.8xc) __ c -5 0 1575x400

—----------------- 1-------- + 1575 x 600-------= -------------
1.5 c 1.15
Hie previous equation is a second order equation in c, its solution results in
c=77.96 mm —»■—»a=0.8 c = 62.37 mm

/ / = 600-—— = 600- —— = 215.18 < ^^-...o.k ( did not yield as assumed)

c 71.96 1.15
T = As x f s = 1575x347.83 = 547.83 k N ''

C, = 4 x / , ' = 1575x215.18 = 338.90A/V

C - 0 - V x f ~ x b x a . 0-67x30x250x62.37 m
Yc 1-50

279
Com puting m om ent at the c.g.

M = C ( —~ - ) + Cs( - - d ') + T (- - d ’)
c 2 2 s 2 2

= 208.93 x (350 - ^ 1 ) + 338.90 x (350 - 50) + 547i83 x (350 - 50) = 332.63 kN.m

Ptt= C c+ C s- T = 0

Point 6 (pure axial tension)

The final loading case to be considered in this example is the concentric tension. The
strength o f the concrete is completely neglected and the steel is in pure tension. Noting
that the tension force is negative, P„ equals
- f
P„
u =—
U 5V{A, + A ')

-400
P. = (1575 + 1575) = -1095.7 kN
1.15
Mu- 0 because the section is symmetrical
The interaction diagram for the previous column is drawn in the following Figure.

Moment (Mu), kN.m

Interaction diagram for Example 7.3

280
7.3 Sections Subject to Eccen tric Com pression Forces
To design an eccentric section, one has to know the applied forces, moments and
material properties as shown in the frame below.

Design Problem
Given : PU) MUJ fcu, fy
Required : b, t, As, A's -

Assume : b, t
Determine: As, A's

Three approaches are available for the design of sections subjected to eccentric
compression force:
1. Interaction diagrams
2. Musapproach.
3. Design using curves

A trial section (b, t) is assumed and the reinforcement areas (As, A's) are determined.
Selecting a trial cross section for members subjected to eccentric forces is not an easy
task. However, when the eccentricity of the member is small, an approximate trial area
can be established by designing the section as if it is subjected to axial loads only. On
the other hand, when the eccentricity of the member is large, the trial area can be
obtained by designing the section as if it is subjected to bending moments only.

281
 P h o to 7.3 E ccen trically load ed section in a rein fo rced c o n c rete to w er

7.3.1 Design Using Interaction Diagrams

Interaction diagrams can also be used as design tools when prepared in special forms.
The horizontal axis in the design interaction diagrams represents normalized (non-
dimensional) bending moment M Jfcub t2, while the vertical axis represents the
normalized axial load P Jfcu b t. These interaction diagrams are valid for designing
members subjected to eccentric compression forces, whether it fails in compression or
tension. However, they were prepared for sections with compression steel of more
than 40% of the tension steel (i.e:a= 0.40, 0.60, 0.80, 1). Thus if the designer need to
use lower ratio of the compression reinforcement (especially in tension failure zone),
the use of the interaction diagram is not attainable.

282
The interaction diagram is usually divided into four zones as follows (refer to Fig. 7.6)
1- Zone A (e/t<0.05): In this zone, the design of sections is attained by
applying the equation for tied columns and the applied moment is
ignored.
2- Zone B (compression failure Pu>Pb): The design of sections in this zone is
performed by using the interaction diagrams directly.
3- Zone C (tension failure P„<Pb) : The design of sections can be performed
according to the ratio of the compression reinforcement as follows:
a) If the ratio o f the compression steel is equal or greater than 0.4, the
use of interaction diagrams is preferred.
b) If the ratio of the compression steel is smaller than 0.4,
(1)approximate methods (AOcan be used (as explained later) or
(2) eccentric design charts. The use of the approximate methods
(Mm) should be limited to sections subjected to relatively small
compression forces otherwise it may lead to unsafe designs (as
explained in the next section).
4- Zone D (PJfcu b t <0.04): In this zone, the compression force is completely
ignored and the section may be designed as if it is subjected to moment only.

*-2xcover d -d '

Zone A
Design as a
tied column As
Zone B
use interaction diagram

balanced load

Zone C
use the interaction diagram if
a>0.4, eccentric design charts, or
approximate method (Mus
approach)
M Jfcu b t2

Fig. 7.6 Using interaction diagrams and design zones

283
The use o f the interaction diagrams can be summarized in the following steps

1) Estimate the cross section dimensions if not given using a trial section
2) Determine the required diagram with the given f y, a and C,
if —< 0.2 use uniform steel chrats
Q
i f —(0.2 - 0.5) use top and bottom steel a = 1
g
.if—> 0.5 use top and bottomsteel a = 0.4-1
3) Calculate the following terms
P..
feu &t ’ fa, b t 2
4) Locate the reinforcement ratio p, and interpolate if required.
5) Calculate area o f steel using
/* = p x / a , xl0 '"> As = /ix b x t or A„uul = p x b x t
6) Compute the area of the compression steel (case o f top and bottom steel)
A's =aAs
7) Check that the total area o f steel is higher than code minimum requirement
A's +As > 0.008 ft x / (columns)

As >0.225 y j f ^ I f y b x d and (1.3 As) (beams)

If the point falls inside the interaction diagram (point a), the minimum area of steel
should be used as shown in Fig. 7.7. If the point falls within the diagram (point b), the
design of the cross-section should be carried out normally. However, if the point falls
outside the boundaries of the interaction diagram (point c), this indicates that the cross-
section dimensions are inadequate and must be increased.

Fig. 7.7 The use of the interaction diagram

284
Appendix B contains interaction diagrams that can be used in design of eccentrically
loaded sections with top and bottom reinforcement. An example of such diagrams is
shown in Fig. 7.8. Appendix C contains interaction diagrams for sections with uniform
reinforcement.

Steel yield stress

f^ x b x t2

Fig, 7.8 An example o f an interaction diagram with top and bottom

reinforcement(Appendix B)

285
Example 7 .4
Design a reinforced concrete column using interaction diagrams knowing that it is
subjected to the following straining actions
Pu=1400 kN.
Mu=295 kN.m
The material properties are
f cu =30 N/mm2 | 250 rnm^
fy =280 N/mm2 ~~j

Solution
Step 1: Determine the suitable design interaction diagram
e M 295
l = = ---- _ ---- = 0.32
t P x t 1400x0.65
since e/t =0.2—>0.5 use a=1.0
Assume cover=40 mm

£.. = ------------------------------
r-2xcover 650-2x40 = 0.9 . _
t .650
Using chart in Appendix B with ^=0.9, fy=280 N/mm2

Step2: Calculate the non-dimensional terms

P„ 1400 xlO3
=0.287
f m bt 30x250 x650
295 x 106
■= 0.093
f^ b t1 30 x 250 x 650

S tep 3‘- Calculate As, A's

Locating the point in the chart and determining p =2.8, (compression failure)
H = p fcu 10-4 = 2.8 x 3 0 x lO"4 =0.0084
As = (x b t = 0.0084 x 250 x650 =1365 mm2 -»(4<|>22)
A's = a As = 1 x 1365 = 1365 mm2 ->(4<j>22)

286
Step 4: Check Asmin
The minimum area steel for short columns is 0.008
Asjnin = 0.008x&xi = 0.008x250x650 = 1300 mm2

As,total- As + A's =1365 + 1365 = 2730 mm2 >As,min........ o.k

j 250 mm ^

4 $ 22

E #---------* 2^12
E
o
in
co
2#12

• 4#22

287
7.3.2 Design Using Mus Approach

If the eccentricity of the applied compression load is relatively small (above the
balanced point), the tension steel does not yield and the section lies on the
compression failure zone as shown in Fig. 7.9.a. However, all points lower than the
balanced failure point represent a case in which the section is partially cracked and the
strain in the tension steel is greater than the yield strain as shown in Fig 7.9,b. This is
defined as the tension failure zone. Although it is possible to derive a family of
equations to evaluate the strength of sections subjected to combined bending and axial
force, these equations are tedious to use and cumbersome. Interaction diagrams can be
used to design sections in the tension failure zone. The available interaction diagrams
were prepared for sections having equal amounts of steel on both sides or with a
maximum difference of 40 percent between area of tension steel and compression
(a=A's/As=0.4). For sections in the tension failure zone, it is more economical to place
most of the reinforcement in the tension side.
There is analytical method for designing such type of sections called the Mus approach.
The approximation in this method comes from neglecting the compression steel
contribution in the calculation.

Fig. 7.9 Strain distributions o f sections subjected to eccentric compression

288
In the Mus approach, the moment is taken about tension steel and called Mus as given in
Eq. 7.10. It should be emphasized that the balanced load has to be evaluated to verify
that the type of failure is a tension failure.

Referring to Fig. 7.10, the external moment about the tension steel equals to:

M m ~Pu *es .....................................................(7.10)

where

es =e + ~^~cover ............................................. (7.11)

or alternatively Mus can be written as

M us- M u +Pu ( i - c o ver) ................... ............... (7.12)

Taking moment of the internal forces about the tension steel and equating it to the
external moment Mus

Mm = ^ b ° (d - - ) + A', (d - d') ..................(7.13)

1.50 2 J 1.15

Fig. 7.10 Design o f sections subjected to tension failure

289
Equilibrium o f internal forces gives

A Ay
0-67f mb a Ay
-Pu+A 1.15 (7.14)
1.50

Substituting with M„s expression in the previous equation gives

(7.15)

To simplify the previous expression, the third term in Eq. 7.15 is neglected

The first term in the equation can be determined using design curves for section
subjected to pure bending such as (Cl-J or R-co).
Equation 7.16 (MJ)gives the same solution as the strain compatibility in case of A's=0.
Furthermore, equation 7.16 gives a very close solution if the applied compression
force is relatively small (Pu«P„b) and consequently the values of a are usually small.
On the other hand, as the applied compression force increases and gets closer to the
balanced load, the assumption of ignoring the effect o f the compression reinforcerpent
in Eq. 7.15 becomes unconservative especially with high ratios of compression steel.
Figure 7.11 presents the ratios of the required area of the steel when using the Mus
approach and those when using of strain compatibility method. It is clear that the
calculated area of tension steel using the Mus approach is much less than that
calculated using the strain compatibility method; leading to unconservative results.
The area of the tension steel using the Mus approach can be lA that of the strain
compatibility method (interaction diagram). On the other hand, the area of the
compression steel obtained using the Mus approach can be as high as three times that
obtained using the interaction diagrams. Thus, the use of M us approach should be
limited to sections with relatively small compression forces in which the values of a
are usually very small.

290
It is clear from Fig. 7.11 that deviation between the area of steel obtained using Mm
approach and the interaction diagrams increases when the load level increases.

Load level (P,/fcu b t)

.Fig. 7.11 Comparison between area of steel calculated using the M us approach and
that calculated from the interaction diagram for sections in tension failure zone

Photo 7.4 Bridge column during construction

291
Example 7 .5
Design the concrete section shown in figure below if it is subjected to an ultimate
compression force of 220 kN and ultimate bending moment o f 150 kN.m
f cu =30 N/mm2 f y =360 N/mm2 a=0.2

250 mm
A's

* "1

• • ...«

Solution
Step 1: Assume failure condition
Since we do not have the area of steel we have to assume the failure condition.
Assume that Pu<Pb... .tension failure (the bending moment is relatively high)
M u 150
e = ——= ---- = 0.682 m
Pa 220

Step 2: Determine area o f steel

Using the approximate method (tension failure), calculate the moment about tension
steel Mur Assume that the concrete cover is 40 mm

d = t-cover = 500-40 = 460 mm

Mm = Mm+ P (--c o v e r) = 150 + 220xf — -4 0 jx —L - = 196.2 kN.m

" 2 V 2 J 1000

e =e +—-cover=0.682+-^^-0.04 = 0.892 m
2 2 Another method to calculate Mm
M »s =pu xe* = 220x 0.982 = 196.2 kN.m

196.2 x I06
- = 0.1236
f mb d2 30x250 x 4602

292
Using simple bending curves with compression steel in Appendix A, with (a=0.2) and
d'/d = 0.1, it can be determined that:
oj = 0.16
f P
A = a > b x d - --------- 0.16 — 250 x 4 6 0 -—° X— -° = 830.56 mm1
f, f y /r , 360 360/1.15

f 30
A' = a <o b x d = 0.2 x 0.16 — x 250 x 460 = 306.67 mm2
/, 360

Note: The strain compatibility method (calculations not shown) gives

As=841 mm2 and A's=310.5 mm2, Which is very close to the approximate solution
because the applied load is small and far from the balanced load and the compression
steel ratio a is small.

Step 3: Verify failure condition

C = - 690 d = — — — 460 = 302.285 mm

690 + /,, 690 + 360
Applying the equilibrium equation
0.67 x / m b (0.8 c6) A \x fy As x f y
uh 1.5 1.15 1.15

_ 0.67x30 x 250 (0.8x302.285) 306x360 830x360 „

Puh =------------------ i— :---- :------^ + ------------------------ = 645 kN > P„
1.5 1.15 1.15
Since Pu<Pub, This it is a tension failure mode as assumed.

293
7.3.3 Design Curves For Eccentric Sections
As mentioned before, M m approach for designing eccentric compression sections
should be limited to sections subjected to tension failure and with relatively small
compression force. This section presents new design charts prepared based on the
strain compatibility principle and the equilibrium of forces and can be used to
accurately design sections subjected to tension failure whatever the value of the
compression force.
The following procedure is adopted to develop the charts. The neutral axis depth is
first assumed and the corresponding strain in the steel is calculated for a concrete
compressive strain of 0.003. To achieve equilibrium, a trial and adjustment procedure
is performed. If the summation of the tension and compression forces is not equal to
the desired load level, another value for the neutral axis depth is assumed and iteration
is performed. This procedure is continued until the equilibrium is achieved.
Consider the design interaction diagram shown in Fig. 7.12.a which were prepared for
certain value off y and a , C,. Each curve in the chart is equivalent to cutting the design
interaction diagrams by a horizontal line at a certain load level (Rt,=Pu/fCu b t). This
gives a group of points with different values of the normalized moment (Mu/fcu bt2)
and the reinforcement index p. The normalized moment values were plotted on the
vertical axis and the corresponding values of co are plotted on the horizontal axis and
are calculated using the following relation.
(0 = p x f y xlO^*

These charts fill the gap that was not covered by the interaction diagram (from a=0 to
a=0.6).

Fig. 7.12.a Development of the design charts

Appendix D contains design charts that can be used in the design of eccentrically
loaded sections. An example of such diagrams is shown in Fig. 7.12.b.

294
 00
Fig. 7.12.b Eccentric design curve for load level of 0.2 (Appendix D)

The design steps for section subjected to eccentric forces in the tension failure zone
using the proposed charts can be summarized in the following steps

D esign ste ps fo r using e c c e n tric design ch a rts

1. Determine the appropriate design curves by calculating the load level R

P„ is positive for compression force and negative for tension force

2. Enter the chart with the applied normalized moment capacity (M Jfcu b t2)
and choose the appropriate value for a
3. Locate the steel index value co (interpolate if necessary)
4. Calculate As and A ' from

A = <o bt and A'. = a At

f.

295
Example 7 .6
Design a reinforced concrete section if it is subjected to an eccentric compression
force using
A- Interaction Diagram
B-Approximate method (Mus approach)
C-Design curves for eccentric sections
Data
Mu=250 fcN.m Pu=700 kN b=250 mm t=700 mm
fcu=25N/mm2 fy =360 N/mm2 £=0.9 a=0.6

Solution
A-Interaction Diagram
Using interaction diagram for fy=360 N/mm2 , a=0.6, and ^=0.9
The point is below the balanced point, thus it is a tension failure
_ S _ = _ J Q 0 x j c g _ ai
f m b t 25x250 x700
- 2 5 0 x 10^- 0^
f a b t2 25x250 x7002
Locating the point in the chart and determining p =1.30
H = p fcu 10'4 = 1.3 x 25 x 10-4 =0.00325
As = jj. b t = 0.00325 x 250 x 700 =570 mm2
A's= a As= 0.6 x 570 = 341 mm2

296
B- Approximate Method (Mus)
Since it is a tension failure mode the approximate method (M ^can used
1- £ 1-0.9
cover = — —x t ---------x 700 = 35 mm
2 2

d = 700- 35 =665 mm
t 250 0 7
e - e h----- c o v e r = -------1- —1— 0.035 = 0.672 m
2 700 2
Mus =puxes= 700 x °-672 = 470.5 kN.m

p.17
2 25x250 x6652

—= = 0.05
d 655
Using simple bending curves (Rl-co) in Appendix A, with compression steel (a=0.6)
and d'/d=0.05 -*-*& = 0.21

As - w ^ - b x - d ---- 5 i _ = o,21 — 250 x 665 - —— —— = 188 mm1

f, f,ly , 360 360/1.15

A' = a o) b x d = 0.6 x 0.21 — x 250x665 = 1455 mm1

fy 360
It can be concluded from this example that the approximate method did not give a
valid reinforcement area of steel solution as the compression reinforcement is greater
than the tension reinforcement, and the area o f the tension steel (188 mm2) is less than
obtained from the interaction diagrams (570 mm2). The main reason for this big
difference is that Rb (0.17) is very close to the balanced load level1 (0.20)

C-Using Design curves for eccentric sections

f cit b t 25 X 250 X 700

M„ 250 xlO6
=0.082
f^ bi1 25x250 x700J

1Obtained from the interaction diagram (refer to the figure in the previous page)

297
 Using charts in Appendix D with fy= 360 N/mm2, (a=0.6)
For load level Rb=0.1 and Rb=0.2, to can be obtained as follows:
®Rb=o.i= 0.058 and ®Rb=o.2= 0.040
Using interpolation coRM16= 0.0472

A, = a > A s - b x t = 0.0472— 250 x 700 = 574 cm1

fy 360
A's= a As= 0.6 x 574 = 344 cm2
It is clear from Fig. 7.13 that the area of steel calculated from the charts is exactly as
the interaction diagrams and the approximate method (Mus) gives unconservative
tension area o f steel.
1600
s Approximate
1400 EEJ Interaction
s Load lews! curves
1200

1000

800
a 600
<
400

200

0
Tension Steel Com pression steel

Fig. 7.13 Comparison between the approximate method, interaction diagram and
Eccentric load curves in examnle 7.6

298
I
7.4 S e c tio n s S u b je cte d to E c c e n tric T e n sio n F o rce s

Sections subjected to tension force are some times encountered in frames, and tension
members. The design of these types of members depends on the amount of the
eccentricity. The ECP 203 states that concrete strength must be completely ignored if
the applied tension force is inside the cross section. In this case the tension force is
carried solely by the reinforcement as shown in Fig. 7.14.a. However, if the tension
force, Tu, lies outside the cross-section, part of the section will be subjected to
compression as shown in Fig. 7.14.b.

a- Small eccentric tension b- Big eccentric tension

^d -d ' ^ d -d '
e< ------- e > -------
2 2
See section 7.4.1 See section 7.4.2

Fig. 7.14 Sections subjected to eccentric tension force.

299
7.4.1 Sections Subject to Small Eccentric Tension Forces
In members subjected to small eccentric force, the whole section is subjected to tensile
strain and the concrete strength is completely ignored. The eccentricity o f the applied
tension force and moment must be within the cross section, or
d - d '
e .(7.17)

Only the steel reinforcement act against the applied tension force with no concrete
contribution as shown in Fig. 7.15. The developed force in each layer o f steel is
calculated according to its distance from the applied load and is given by

d - d '
.(7.18)
'~ 2
d - d ’
■+e .(7.19)

Calculate the developed tension forces h and T2 (Ti is always > T2). To calculate T,,
take moment o f forces about point o in Fig. 7.15 as follows:

^ r e ­ .(7.20)
d - d '

1T 1 —T
1 u - 1T 1 ..... •(7.21)
calculate AsI, As2
A - Ti .(7.22)
S' fy /I-15
T
,.(7.23)
f ,/1.15

Fig. 7.15 Equilibrium o f a section subjected to a small eccentric tension force

300
Example 7.7
Calculate the reinforcement required for a concrete section of (250x600 mm), if it is
subjected to M„=30 kN.m and Tu= 300 kN. Knowing that fy=400 N/mm2 and Xu=30
N/mm2

Solution
Step 1: Calculate esi and e s2
M« = ----
e = —- 30 = 0.1 m
Tu 300
Assume that the distance from the centerline of steel to concrete is 50 mm
d'=50mm
d=600-50 = 550 mm
d-d'=550-50=500 mm=0.5 m

since e < < 0-25, (small eccentric tension)

Since the member is small eccentric section, concrete strength is completely neglected
and all the tension force is resisted by the reinforcement.

e 2 = ——— + e = + 0.1 = 0.35 m

2 2

301
Step 2 Calculate the developed tension force

T =T x _f£i_ = 300x.— = 210 kN

" d -d ' 0.5

f2 = Tu - T, =300-210 = 90 AW

Step 3: Calculate A suA ^

T, 210x1000
= 603.75 mm2 (3<£16)
A,'~ f y 11.15 ~ 400/1.15

j =—£--=90x1000=258 7 5 wwz (2016)

s2 f y t 1.15 400/1.15

0.225V30
250 x 600 = 462 mm
400
»= smaller of =462 mm2 <AS)
1.3x603 = 783 mra2

2 016

o
oVO

3 016

Final design

302
7.4.2 Sections Subjected to Big Eccentric Tension Forces
This case is usually found in reinforced concrete tanks, tunnels and aqueducts, in
which the eccentric tension- force lies outside the cross section “big eccentricity”,
creating tension on the near side and compression on the far side. Thus, the concrete
contributes to the strength of the section. This part is represented by the part E-F in the
interaction diagram shown in Fig 7.3. However, since this part is not represented in
the interaction diagram as explained before, the same approximate method (Mus) used
in sections with compression forces is used here with minor modifications The
distance es shown in Fig. 7.16 is given by.

e = e - —+ cover .............................................. (7.24)

2
where e = ^ JL

The moment about the tension steel Mm equals

= T .e , = M , - T u(^ - cover) ........ .......................(7.25)

The problem can be solved using curves with double reinforcement (Rl-a>)

Compute — ,
fc b d *

Locate © from curves using the desired compression steel ratio a and calculate As

As = cJ^-b d + — ^ — ........................................ (7.26)

s f y / „ / ! • 15

A's = a c o m b 'd ................................................ (7.27)

fy
! d'

Fig. 7.16 Design of sections subjected to big eccentric tension force

303
Example 7 .8
Design a tension member (250 * 650 mm) if it is subjected to eccentric axial tension
force o f200 kN as shown in figure.
fy=400 N/mm
£.,,=35 N/mm2

I. ,1
Solution I I
T„=200 kN (tension) ° '9 m
e=0.9 m (outside the cross section —'*big eccentric tension)
Mu =0.9 x 200 =180 kN.m
Assume concrete cover of 50 mm —*■d=650-50=550 mm —*d 'td =50/600 = 0.10

e. =e—- +caver = 0 .9 - ^ ^ - + 0.05 = 0.625 m

2 2

M«s = r«A = 200 * 0-625 = 125 kN.m

125x10
Compute - = 0.0397
f cub d 2 35x250x6002

From doubly reinforced tables or curves with a=0.4 d7d=0.10, and R=0.0397
From the curves —*•<a=0.048

A = cj-zt-b d + — ^ — = 0.048— x 250 x 600 + 2-0- - - — ■= 1205 m m 2 (4020)

1 /, / , /1.15 400 400/1.15

A! = a c o ^ -b d =0.4x0.048— x250x600 = 252 mm2 ->(20>16)

fy 400

650 mm I

250 nun
2<D 16
4 ® 20
e.
rJ

304
7.5 T-Sections Subjected To Eccentric Forces
T-sections subjected to eccentric forces are often encountered in the girders of framed
structures. Design interaction diagrams are available in design format only for
rectangular sections. Preparations of such diagrams for T-section would be unrealistic
because many variables are encountered such as B/b and ts/t ratios. The approximate
method can be used to transform the T- shaped sections to members subjected to
bending only using Mm approach. The design steps are the same as those explained
before in section 7.3, however, the designer has to check the location of the neutral
axis (a=0.8 c), and determine the area of steel using the (Cl-J) as follows.

a ^ t' A = - .M v ±- P"
f y J d f y l 1.15
A. .(7.28)

f l \ . \ 5 ( d - t s l2) f ,71.15

where ts is the slab thickness and Pu is the applied axial force (negative in case of
compression and positive in case o f tension)
where es is measured from the e.g. of the T-section as shown in Fig. 7.17 and
determined from the following relations:
M «s=p«xes ....................................... .......... (7.29a)

es =e+(d - z) (compression)...................................(7.29b)

es = e -(d - z) (tension)............................................(7.29c)

es = e + ( d - z )

a-Eccentric compression b-Eccentric tension

Fig. 7.17 Definition of es in T-sections

305
Example 7 .9
Design the T-section shown in figure if it is subjected to the following straining
actions.
Pu =600 kN (compression)
M„ =450 kN.m
The material properties are
fcu =25 N/mm2
fy =240 N/mm2

250 m m

Solution
Since the member is T-section, we can not use interaction diagrams and the
approximate method should be used
d = 700- 50 =650 mm

100xl800x50 + 606x 250x(600/2 + 100) ,

z = -------- :---------------------------------------- = 209.1 mm
100x1800 + 600x250
es = e + (tf - z) = 0.75+(0.65 - 0.209) = 1.19 m

=pu xes =600x1.19 = 714.5kN.m

Using the (Cl-J), determine c/d ratio

 -< -1 - 1 =0.125
d d ) mia d J,n,n

c=0.125 x 650=81.25 mm
a= 0.8 c = 65 rrnn
since a< ts(100 mm), get J from the curve using c/d=0.125
J=0.826

M... P.. 714.5x10

= 2670 mm
' fyJ d f y / l . 15 240x0.826x650 240/1.15

Astchosen 6 0 25

250 mm

307
Example 7.10
For the cross section shown in the figure below calculate the moment capacity from
the first principles. The material properties are fcu=25 N/mm2 and fy=240 N/mm2
Pu =600 kN (compression)

1800 mm
1

T
100 mm

A.=2014 mm

250 mm

Solution

Assume that acts, apply the equilibrium equation, and assume that yc=l .5 and ys= l . 15

0-67./„ B a
1.5

p -67 f cux B x a As f y
1.5 1.15

.67x25xl800xa 2014 x 240

600x1000 = ------------------------------------
1.5 1.15
a=50.67 mm < ts, our assumption is correct

308
The axial force Pu is located at a distance e from the plastic centroid. For simplicity it
shall be assumed that the plastic centroid coincides with the e.g.

_ 100 x 1800 x 50 + 600 x 250 x (600/ 2 + 100)

= 209.1 mm
100x1800 + 600x250

The moment capacity of the section about the c.g equals

u a\ v /j % 0.67 f 5 a a. As x f y
Mu = CAz----) + T x(d - z ) = ----- —---- (z — ) + -------- x ( d - z )
c 2 1.5 2 1.15

M„ = 6 7 x j j i ^ SO O x 5 0 .6 7 1"2 ( ) 9 1 ^ 5 0 ^ 6 7 ^ 2 0 1 4 x j 4 0 x ( 6 S 0 _ 2 0 9 1} _ 3 7 2 .8 W .w
1.5 1.15

Photo 7.5 Reinforced concrete columns during construction

309
M
Example 7.11
Design the T-section shown in figure if it is subjected to the following straining
actions
Pu=250 kN (Tension) Mu=850 kN.m
The material properties are
fcu=30 N/mm2 fy=400 N/mm

600 ram
±
£
£ T
100 mm
O
in
oo
• _ •] As=?
*—H
250 mm

Solution
Since the section is T-section and subjected to tension force, transformation using the
approximate method must be made
d = 850 - 50 =800 mm

M -» = -----=
e=— 850 5.667 m
Pu 150
calculate the c.g of the section

100x600x50+ 7 5 0 x 1 2 0 x ( 7 5 0 / 2 + 200)
z = ----------------------------------- i--------------- - = 305 mm
100x600 + 750x120
es = e ~ ( d - z ) = 5 .6 6 7 -(0 .8 -0 .3 0 5 ) = 5.172 m

310
 0.67fa,

0-67f ^ B i ,
1.5

250
= Pu xes = 150x5.172-= 775.75 kUm

d = Cl

775.75 xlO6
800 = Cl. Cl=3.85
30x600

Using the (Cl-J), determine c/d ratio = 0.21

d
c=0.21 x 800=168 mm
a= 0.8 x 168 = 134.4 mm
Since a(134.4)> ts(100 mm), neglect the partin the web and calculate^ using
M..
/ /l.l5 ( d - ts /2) f / l .15 400/1.15x(800-100/2) 400/1.15

Choose 6 0 28 (3695 mm ) 600 mm

3 #12

311
7.6 A n a ly s is o f Irregular S e c tio n s

7.6.1 G e n e ra l
Reinforced concrete sections can take any shape. Irregular cross-sections are usually
encountered in shear walls where irregularity comes from either the shape of the
cross-section or the distribution of the reinforcement. For these sections, the
development of the interaction diagrams follows the previously mentioned procedure.
Referring to Fig. 7.18, any point falling inside the interaction diagram is considered
safe (point A), while any point falling outside the diagram is considered unsafe (point
B ).

The adequacy o f the section is satisfied by ensuring that for the same axial load, the
calculated moment capacity is greater than the applied moment. Thus comparing
points C & F indicates that point C is considered safe because PU~P„ and M„>MU

Fig. 7.18 Analysis of irregular sections

312
7.6.2 Strength of Shear Walls
Shear walls are usually encountered in tall buildings to resist lateral loads initiated by
wind or earthquake. The analysis of these walls should be based on strain
compatibility and equilibrium of forces as shown in Fig. 7.19. The calculation can be
carried out in tabulated form or using spreadsheet like EXCEL. The design procedure
can be summarized in the following steps:

1.The shape of the cross-section is usually chosen to fit the architectural

requirements of the structure.
2. The structural engineer usually assumes the concrete dimensions and the
reinforcement distribution. Some codes of practice give recommendations
regarding these issues.
3. The neutral axis distance is assumed and the internal forces are evaluated. The
stress in each steel bar is given by

/ = 6 ............................................. (7.30)
c rs
The force in each layer of steel equals the stress multiplied by its area

Fsi =f si x A sl (positive if compression)................... ............ (7.31)

4. The assumption of equivalent stress block is used, and the distance of the
compression block is evaluated as (a=0.8 c). The concrete force is divided into
areas Aci then multiplied by the stress (0.67 f cJyc).

Fd = °-6 7 x /™Aci .....................................................(7.32)

Yc
5. The section nominal ultimate axial capacity P„ is the sum of concrete and steel
contributions as follows:
i=nc i =/tf

i=l 1=1

This procedure is repeated until the condition of P„=PUis satisfied.

6. The nominal moment capacity M„ is computed by summing the moments of all
the internal forces from its c.g to the plastic centroid of the section (Xp). Thus
the moment capacity equals:
i =nc
=Z *yt + 1 r* (x r ~di ) ................................<7-34)

313
7. The section will be considered safe if the calculated axial capacity P„ equals
the applied force P„ (within 5%) and calculated moment is greater than the
applied:
Pn = Pu and M n > Mu............................ ................ (7.35)

8.If the calculated force is less than applied force,'increase the neutral axis
distance to increase the axial load capacity.

9. If Pn=Pu but the calculated moment is less than the applied moment (Mn<Mu)
increase either section dimension or reinforcement or both

t
XP

F c2 F c l

Fig. 7.19 Forces and strains in the shear wall at ultimate

314
Example 7.12
The shear wall shown in figure is subjected to the following straining actions
P„=12600 kN
M„=7520 kN.m
The material properties are
fcu=30 N/mm
fy=400 N/mm2
Determine the adequacy (Safety) of the cross section

2100 mm
300 300' 350

bp
d o
o
•'3',

ON

© e e
CM CS

CN CM CN CN

Solution
Step 1: Find the location o f the N.A.
Since the location of the neutral axis is unknown, a trial and adjustment procedure is
carried out. As a first trial, assume that the neutral axis distance c=700 mm
a = 0.8c = 0.80 x 700 = 560 mm
Step 1.1 Forces and moments in steel
Since the section is symmetrical, the e.g. and the plastic centroid coincides.
Xp=t/2=1050 mm
Calculate the applied eccentricity eu
_ H„ _ 7520
- = 0.5968 m
P„ ~ 12600

Calculate the strength reduction factors yc and ys

315
 , . '1 0.5968^ , .
yc =1.5x| —----- -— =1.45 <1.5...... yc =1.5
6 3

f 7 0.5968
= 1.11 <1.15...... ys =1.15

The stress at each bar at distance dt from the compression face equals

- dd, __ 100- d . 4 0 0 . .
c — .... 2
f si = 600 x -——L = 600 x - -------‘- < ----- <347.8N I mm
c 700 1.15
The force in each layer of steel equals the stress multiplied by its area by number of
bars in the layer (positive in compression)
The area of one bar ® 19 ASj is 283.53 mm2

1
(kN)
1000

-3 5 0
121> 19

12 <P 19

0.003

F sS I ’-sT F S6 F s 5
a=560
11 1 I t
F s3 Fs2 F si

F c2 Fel

316
The following table summ arizes the results

Layer No of di Li F
1 SI•
bars, n,- mm N/mm2 kN
1 12 50 347.8 1183.4
2 12 300 342.9 1166.5
3 2 600 85.7 48.6
4 2 900 -171.4 -97.2
5 2 1200 -347.8 -197.2
6 2 1500 -347.8 -197.2
7 12 1800 -347.8 -1183.4
8 12 2050 -347.8 -1183.4
Total Ps=-459.99

Step 1.2: Force and moment in concrete

a= 0.8 x c = 560 mm
Since a > flange thickness, divide the compression zone into two zones, the flange and
the web. The force developed in each layer equals

Yc 1000 1.5 “ 1000

tz =560-350 = 210mm
The following table summarizes the calculations
No t, bi Aci Fci
mm mm mm2 kN
1 350 1750 612500 8207.5
2 210 400 84000 1125.6
Total Pc=9333.1

ns nc
Pn = Y , + Y , Fc i= P * + P c = 9333; 1- 459.99 = 8873.11 kN
i =I i*l

Since P„ (8873.11 kN) is less than the applied load Pu (12600 kN), thus location of the
N.A. must be adjusted.
Note: The corresponding Mu= 12106 kN,m (calculations not shown)

317
Step 2: Adjust c, and Recalculate P„

Since the calculated normal force is less than the applied, try increasing the neutral
axis distance c. After several trials, it can be found that the neutral axis distance that
gives the axial force of 12600 kN is 1303 mm
c —1303 mm
Step 2.1: Forces and moments in steel
The stress in each bar f sl equals

Jt a = 600 13-°3 - ^ <347.8 N /m m 2

j 303

Fs,. = /Js,, x (n,.x A",)—5

'lo g—
o (kN)

The bending of each bar about the c.g equals

M . = Fsi ( - - d,) x - J — (kN.m)

s‘ 2 1000

The following table summarizes the results

Layer No of Asi di fsi Fsi t/2-d[ Msi

bars, n* mm mm N/mm2 kN mm kN.m

1 12 283.53 50 347.8 1183.4 1000 1183.4

2 12 283.53 300 347.8 1183.4 750 887.6

3 2 283.53 600 323.7 183.6 450 82.6

4 2 283.53 900 185.6 105.2 150 15.8

5 2 283.53 1200 47.4 26.9 -150 -4.0

6 2 283.53 1500 -90.7 -51.4 -450 23.1

7 12 283.53 1800 -228.9 -778.6 -750 584.0

8 12 283.53 2050 -344.0 -1170.3 -1000 1170.3

Total Ps=682.2 3942.8

318
Step 2.2: Forces and Moments in Concrete
a = 0.8xc = 1042,4 mm t2 =1042.4-350 = 692.4 mm
The force developed in each layer equals

rc iooo 1 .5 “ iooo
M c; = Fd x y.

No U h Aci Fa yi Ma
mm mm mm2 kN mm- kN.m
1 350 1750 612500 8207.5 875 7181.56
2 692.4 400 276960 3711.26 353.8 1313.05
Total Pc=11918.8 8494.61

ns nc
K = Z ^ i + Z 'Fd =682.2+ 11918.8 = 12600kN
M i=l
ns nc
Mn = 2 Ms, + X = 3942.8 + 8494.6 = 12437.4kN.m
1=1 1=1

Step 3'- Conclusion

Since Pu=Pn and M r (12437) > Mu(7520) , the section is considered safe 1

1Calculation for c=1500 was not shown

319
7.7 In teraction D iagram s Fo r C irc u la r C o lu m n s
The same procedure used in developing the capacity o f rectangular columns is used
for circular ones. However, the ECP-203 does not permit the use of the equivalent
stress block in developing circular section capacity. The depth of the neutral axis is
assumed and the resulting compression zone is a segment of a circle. Since the stress-
strain curve is parabolic and the width of the cross section'varies along the depth of
the neutral axis, an integration procedure must be followed. In order to calculate the
compressive force resisted by the concrete, the compressed zone is divided to n
segments with height tt and width wt as shown in Fig. 7.20. The width of the segment
w; is given by
w,. = 2 -Jhi x(2r-h f) ................................................. (7.36)

Where A; is the height of the segment from the top

The corresponding concrete force at the center of gravity of each segment is evaluated
as follows.

'C e = 2 > , x / , x / d ................................................... (7.37)

i =n
where f ci is the concrete stress at the c.g of the segment.

Concrete section strain stresses concrete

anil forces segment

Fig. 7.20 Internal forces and strains distribution in circular columns

The moment of this segment is determined by multiplying the force by the distance to
the column center of gravity y t.

M ^ = Y J'wi t-tl Y.fcix y i ................... .............. :....... (7-38)

320
Summing all the forces and the moments of all segments gives the total concrete force
and moments about the column center of gravity. The number of bars in the column
affects the shape of the interaction diagram. This is because the position of both
compression and tension steel varies according to bar arrangement with column height
giving different strain distribution. Therefore interaction diagrams for circular sections
are computed by assuming a continuous ring. Placing 8 bars in the column or more is
sufficient to validate this assumption. The interaction diagram is normalized to
concrete column radius rather than the total area of the column (?tr2) as follows

p„ . M„
and •
/„, '■ fc, >'3
The reinforcement area is obtained by multiplying the column area with the
reinforcement ratio as follows

Asjml = M ^ r 2) ...................................................... (7.39a)

Appendix E contains interaction diagrams for circular column based on the above
procedure. Example of the developed interaction diagrams is given in Fig. 7.21.
Similarly, interaction diagrams for hollow circular sections can be prepared as shown
in Appendix F. The reinforcement area in this case is obtained by multiplying the net
column area with the reinforcement ratio as follows:
AsMa,= M Ac ................................................... (7.39b)

Ac = x { r l - r ? ) ................................................ (7.39c)
Where r and r, are the external and internal radius respectively.

Photo 7.6 Circular columns during construction

321
 Steel yield stress

0 .0 0 0 .1 0 0 .2 0 0 .3 ' 0 .4 0 0 .5 0 0 .6 0 0 .7 0 0 .8 0 0 .9 0 1 .0 0

P“‘t -

Fig. 7.21 Interaction diagrams for circular sections (appendix E)

322
Example 7.13
Design a circular column to resist the following straining actions:
P„=5600 kN
Mu=830 kN.m
The material properties are as follows:
fa, =40 N/mm2
f y =360 N/mm2

Solution
Since the section is circular and is subjected to eccentric force, use interaction
diagrams for circular sections.

D = ----
r- — 800= 400
„«n mm
2 2

Calculate the following terms

P„ 5600x1000 =og75
f m r2 40x4002

J £ ^ _ = 830x101 = 0324
f m r3 40x4003

Assuming 40 mm concrete cover, r'=400-40=360 mm

2*® - 0 9
r 400

Using the interaction diagram with fy=0.9, f y=360 N/mm2

p=2.5

323
/ i - p x f clt x 10-4 = 2.5X40X10-4 = 0.010>pTOin(0:008).....o.k

Asloml r z)= 0.010XX-X4001 =5026 mm2 (20018, 5089mm2)

Assume that we shall use 8<j)10 stimips per meter and Asp for <j>10mm =78.5 mm2
The volume of the stirrups in 1 meter equals

Vs = n xA sp x(7txDs) =8x78.5x (;rx 720) = 1420502 mm3

V x 8002 x 1000 = 1256637 mm3 <V...o.k

s 'm m 100 4

324
Example 7.14
Design a spirally reinforced column that is subjected to a normal force of 1100 kN and
bending moment of 180 kN (factored values). The material properties are as follows:
f m = 30 N/mm2
f y =400 N/mm2
f yp = 240 N/mm2

Solution
S te p l: Estimate cross section diameter
Interaction diagrams for circular sections is used to calculate the capacity of the spiral
column by neglecting the contribution of the spiral under eccentric loading.. The spiral
reinforcement will be added after using the interaction diagram for confinement only.
Since the column dimension is not given, assume a middle point on the interaction
diagram such as Pu/fcu r2=0.9

1100x1000
30 x r 2
r=201.8 mm, try r=250 mm and D=500mm

Step2: Calculate the following terms

Pu 1100x1000
=0.5866
f cur2 30x2502

180xl06
f cu r ’ 30x2503

Assume concrete cover of 30 mm, r'=250-30=220 mm

* = 11= 220 = 0.88

r 250
Using the interaction diagram twice with £=0.9 and £=0.8
Pc=o.9= 2 -3, and pr=os=2.S
P<=0.88=2-4

U = P x / c„ xlO-4 =2.4x30xl0-4 =0.0072 < ^ ,( 0 .0 1 ^ or 0.012 Ak)

325
 0.01x;rx2502 =1963 mm1
A =
0.012x^x2202 =1824 mm2

Choose 12 4) 16 (2400 mm2)

Step 3: Spiral design

The minimum volume of stirrup for spiral column is used to calculate the required
pitch p.
f ^0
= 0 . 3 6 x ^ ( 4 - / ( J = 0.36x— (*-x2502 -*x220*) = 1993 mm2
Jyp
Using 8mm spiral with Asp=50 mm2

31 d,„ Dk 50x440
=34.67 mm
P Vw 1993

Use (j) 8 /30 mm

326
Example 7.15
Design a hollow circular core shown below to resist the following straining actions:
Pu = 30000 KN
Mu= 19000 KN.m
The material properties are as follows:
/ cu = 30 N /mm2.
/ y = 360 N/mm2.

Solution:
Step No. 1: Calculate th e following terms:
Since the core is hollow circular section and is subjected to eccentric force, use
interaction diagrams for hollow circular sections.
D 3000
- = 1500 mm
2 ' 2

Ac =7r[(l500)2-(ll0 0 )2] = 3.27xl06 mm1 =3.27m 1

30000x1000
= 0.306

- = 0.129
f a Aer 30 x (3.27 x 10-) x 1500

Step N o.2: Design of the reinforcement:

Assuming 40 mm concrete cover, r -1500-40=1460 mm

r 1500
rx 1100
0.75
r ~ 1500 :

327
Using the interaction diagram for hollow circular sections (Appendix F)
/ y = 360 N/mm2, C= 0.95, r;/r = 0.75
Therefore p = 3
xlO-4 =3x30xl0“4 = 0.009>)JTOj„ (0.008).....o.k
Asjaal = jj (Ac) = 0.009x (3.27x 106) = 29340 mm 2 (964*20,30159mm2)

Step No.3: Stirrups design:

Assume that we shall use 7 <j>10/m' stirrups perimeter and Asp for <j>10 mm = 78.5 mm2
The volume o f the stirrups in 1 meter equals:
For outer diameter:
Vs ~ n x A sp x(;rxZ>s) = 7x78.5x(;vx2920) = 5.04xl06 mm3.
For inner diameter:
Vs =n x Asp x(^-xjDs) = 7x78.5 x( 7rx 2120) = 3.66x106 mm3
+ V.ou,er =3.66xl0 6 +5.04x106 = 8.7x10s mm3'

= = - ^ x ( 3 . 2 7 x 1 0 6) x 1 0 0 0 = 8 .I 7 x 1 0 s * ! < ^ ...ok

Note: Since the outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter, about 60% of the
reinforcement is assigned to the outer diameter and about 40% of the reinforcement is
assigned to the inner diameter.

328
7.8 In teraction D iagram s Fo r Box S e c tio n s
The development of non-traditional interaction diagrams is performed for box section,
which is frequently found in building and bridges. The construction of the diagrams is
similar to those for rectangular sections. It is obvious that the capacity of the box
section is greatly affected by the area of the internal void. Thus, in developing the
interaction diagram the thickness of the concrete wall must be specified and is given
as a ratio from the section width and depth (at and a b) as shown in Fig. 7.22

0 .6 7 fc„/Yc

Fig. 7.22 Distribution of the reinforcement in box section

If the neutral axis is inside the top flange, the concrete force and moment can be easily
evaluated exactly as rectangular sections. However, if the neutral axis is outside the
top flange the area of the void must be subtracted to obtain the exact area of the
compressed concrete. The ECP-203 concrete stress-strain curve was used in
developing the charts. The developed compression force in the concrete Cc is
evaluated by integrating the compressed area with the stress-strain curve and
subtracting the void area.
The reinforcement area determined from the interaction diagram is the total area of
steel and should be uniformly distributed around the cross section and in both sides of
the section (i.e. each face will have 1/8 of the total area) as shown in Fig. 7.22.
The interaction diagrams are normalized to the net concrete column area Ac rather than
the total area of the column as follows
P. _ ,
and
fe u fe u

The reinforcement area is given by multiplying the reinforcement ratio with the net
concrete area A r as follows:
A. .(7.40)
Ac =b t -void area
An example of the curves is shown in Fig. 7.23 and the rest is given in Appendix G.

329
Fig. 7.23 An example o f an interaction diagram for box section (appendix G)

330
Example 7 .16
Design the box section shown in figure if it is subjected to the following straining
actions
Pu =9000 kN
Mu =2700 kN.m
The material properties are as follows
fcu =30 N/mm2
fy =360 N/mm2
i

1000 mm
Solution
Interaction diagrams for box sections are used to design the given member.
Since the thickness of the concrete walls is not given assume a=0.15, thus
at= 0.15 (1500)=225 mm
ab=0.15 (1000)=150mm
i 700 mm i

1000 mm

331
The net area of the concrete Ac equals
Ac = 1500 x 1000 - 700 x 1050 = 765000 mm1

P„ 9000x1000
- = 0.3921
fa . A c 30 x 765000

Mu 2700 xlO6
- = 0.078
f a Ae t 30 x 765000x1500

From the diagram with fy=360 N/mm2, £,=0.95, a=0.15

p=6.2

H = p'x.feuY.W* =6.2x30xl0'4 =0,0186

Astmil = p A c = 0.0186 x 765000 = 14229 ram2

Choose the area of steel multiple of eight and more than 24 bars
Choose 56 <5 18 (14250 mm2)

10 018 4^)18 at each comer

ft 4 • 4 r j
• fl • • * ;i 0 ■i

» fl • « 4>8/200 mm
\ i /
00 » fl \ | / ••
1 I

©
o 10018
/ K
• fl
/ *\
• fl • fl'
/ ! \
• fl ■« • ■I
R fl _ • , • . . . » • • _ K1

10 018 4018

1000 mm

332
 CJ ^
« i
oou> I
j- j VI
*c3
Cfi
a
0
O

c
o

©
H
Sections

OK
S
Design of Eccentric

OJ

333
7.9 C o lu m n s S u b je cte d to B ia x ia l Bending
7.9.1 General
Designing a rectangular cross section for biaxial bending and axial load is a
complicated process because the direction and the position of the neutral axis are
difficult to establish. Furthermore, since the strain over the cross section varies linearly
in both directions as shown in Figure 7.24, considerable computation time is required
to establish equilibrium.

Neutral axis

Fig. 7.24 Strain distribution for columns subjected to biaxial bending

The failure surface of sections subjected to biaxial bending is a three-dimensional

surface as shown in Fig. 7.25. Any combination of Pu, Mux, and M uy falling inside the
surface is considered safe, but any point falling outside the surface is considered
unsafe. The surface consists of infinite number of interaction diagrams as follows:

1. Position 1 represents the uniaxial section capacity in x direction in which the

neutral axis is parallel to x-direction (Mllx).
2. Position 2 represents the uniaxial section capacity in y-direction in which the
neutral axis is parallel to y-direction (Muy).
3. An inclined neutral axis such as position 3 represents the case o f column
under biaxial bending (M^, Muy).

Another representation can be made by cutting the failure surface with horizontal
planes called load level. This approach is adopted for preparing the design aids
presented in the Appendix H of this book.

334
 Fig. 7.25 Failure surface for columns subjected to biaxial bending

7.9.2 Ex a ct Analysis of Biaxial Bending

The analysis of sections subjected to biaxial bending is performed using compatibility
o f strains and equilibrium of forces. Defining the neutral axis distance from the origin
as xNA with an angle <j>as shown in Fig. 7.26. The strain at any steel bar equals to

ssi = 0 . 0 0 3 .............................................(7.41)
c

where dl = xi sin(^) + y i cos(^) and the neutral axis distance c equals

c = x NA sin(fiS) ..................................................(7.42)
It should be clear that a positive strain indicates compression and a negative strain
indicates tension. The developed stress in each bar equals to

fsi =E.x £si = 200,000 x esj = 6 0 0 ^ = ^ - <U- .....................(7.43a)

c rs
/„. = 6 0 0 ^ i < ^ ...................................... (7.43b)
c rs
The total force in each bar is

Fs l=Asix f s! .............................................. (7.44)

where Asi is the area of each individual bar

335
 Fig. 7.26 Stress and strain distributions for a column under biaxial bending

The moments of the reinforcement Msxi, Msyi is taken about X and Y axis respectively
for each bar as

M 5X1. = Fsi, xv.

Si (7.45)

(7.46)

The ECP-203 does not allow the use of the equivalent stress block in the computation
of the capacity of biaxially loaded columns, thus an integration process must be
performed. The compression zone will be divided into small areas At and multiplied by
the corresponding stress^,-. This procedure is used in a computer program developed
for the propose of preparing biaxial interaction diagrams. The compressive force
developed in each concrete segment is given by
(7.47)
However, the previous procedure is not suitable in hand calculations. For hand
computations, the equivalent stress block is used. Depending on the compression zone
shape, it is divided into two or three areas and the developed force in each area equals

(7.48)

336
The moment of the concrete compression force in each segment equals the individual
compressive force multiplied by the distance from the axis X and Y as follows:

M a l =Fa. x y ci .....................................................(7-49)
...................... ..............................(7-50)

The total resultant capacity of the section Pu equals to

p.= .............................................. <7-51>

The total forces and moments are assumed to be located at the plastic centroid. For
sections with symmetrical reinforcement, the plastic centroid coincides with the center
of gravity. Thus if one needs to calculate the total moments Mux>Muy about any point
rather than the plastic centroid (point o in Fig. 7.26), the moment of the resultant force
(Pu) should be taken into consideration as follows

(IX ,,- + ) ................ (7-52)

=PU* x +Z M <y‘ ) .......................... (7-53)
where x and y are the distance from the plastic centroid to the assumed axes. For
symmetrical sections x=b/2 and y=t/2.
It should be noted that the reduction safety factors depend on the eccentricity, and the
resultant eccentricity (e/t*) is used for the calculations of these factors as shown in Fig.
7.27.

/ \2 f \
e tz. ■(7.54)
- ] + t
\ b J) V J
where
.Z L g, _ M «>
p„ reinforcement b P„

Fig. 7.27 calculation of the eccentricity for a section under biaxial bending
337
 Example 7.16
Calculate the biaxial column capacity for the neutral axis position shown in the figure
below knowing that:
f ar 25 N/mm2
/„= 400 N/mm2
825 mm
-40 mm

Solution
For the sake of simplicity, the equivalent stress block is assumed to be valid in such a
case. The calculation of the capacity can be summarized in the following steps:
Step 1: Moments due to Forces Developed in the Steel Bars
c= 825 sin (30) = 412.5 mm
The strain in the steel equals

s s. = 0.003 = 0.003 x -4 j 2: 5-~ 4 -

c 412.5
where dj = xi sin(^)+y . cos(^) = x t sin(30)+ cos(30)

FI

338
Positive strain indicates compression and vice versa. The stress in each bar equals:
■fy
f si = 200,000 x s j <:
rs
Since most of the section is in compression (e/t is small). Assume e/t=0.27.
, , (1 0.27') , ,
Ye =1.5x1--------- «1.6
U 3 J

Thus concrete and steel safety factors equals ys=l-24 and yc=1.6. This assumption will
be verified later. The area of one bar $ 28 mm equals=615.75 mm2
The force in each bar equals

Fn =Asix f si= 6l5.75xfs,

The moment capacity of the section is calculated by taking the moments of the forces
about any point (for example point o). The moments of the forces resisted by the steel
reinforcement Msxi, Msyi are taken about X and Y axes. The moment of the resultant
force Pu should be considered since point o does not coincide with the plastic centroid.

M sx! = F si X y,- M syi = F si XX i

Calculations of moments due to forces developed in the steel bars

Bar X[ Yi d; £si fsi Fsi Msxi Msyi

mm mm mm N/mm2 kN kN.m kN.m

1 40 40 54.6 0.00260 322.6 198.63 7.95 7.95

2 360 40 214.6 0.00144 287.8 177.21 7.09 63.80

3 40 360 331.8 0.00059 117.4 72.31 26.03 2.89

4 360 360 491.8 -0.00058 -115.3 -71.00* -25.56 -25.56

Total 377.15 15.50 49.07

*(tension force)

339
Step 2: Moments due to Forces Resisted by Concrete

The equivalent stress block is 0.8 o f the neutral axis distance

x'= 0.8 (825) =660 mm
Since the compression zone is trapezoidal, it will be divided to rectangular and
triangular as shown in figure,
ts =(.*'-400) x tan 0 = (660-400) x tan 30” = 150.11 mm
U - 400 x tan 6 = 400 x tan 30° = 230.94 mm

825 mm

400 x L
At = 400 x tx A, = -----—L

t,
ya +j

F„. = -0,6- X^ -“ A, = - 6-7x25 -A - = 0.01047 A, (kN)

7C 1.60 1000

The moment of the concrete compression force is the sum o f the individual
compressive force multiplied by the distance from the axis x and y as follows
ya (kN.m)
1000

M*, = Fa x ^ - (kN.m)
1000

340
Calculations o f moments due to forces resisted by concrete

No shape bi U Area Xci yci Fa Maxi Mcyi

mm mm mm2 mm mm kN kN.m kN.m

I= 3 628.59 47.18 125.72

1 400 150.11 60044.43 200.00 75.06

2 400 230.94 46188 133.33 227.09 483.53 109.81 64.47

Total 1112.12 156.98 190.19

Step 3: Total Forces and Moments in Concrete and Steel

Pu = 377.15+1112.12 = 1489.27 kN.

Since the section is symmetrical, the plastic centroid coincides with the e.g. Thus the
location of the section compressive force Pu (the resultant) is at 200 mm from both X
and Y axes. Since the moment is not taken at the plastic centroid of the section,
contribution of the Pu must be taken into consideration, thus the total moments about
point o equals

/^ =^ - ( Z ^ + 2 > 0

Mv = P . * x - f e M , „ + 2 > J

Mm = 1489.27x200/1000-(15.50+ 156.98) = 125.36 kN.m

Muy = 1489.27x 200/1000-(49.07 + 190.188) = 58.6 kN.m

X
4-----
■
MU). ^
y r r \

'i o
■ : Atr

341
Step 4: Check reduction safety factors

1 2 5 .3 6
t Pu x t 1 4 8 9 .2 7 x 0 .4 0

e, M n. 5 8 .6
= 0 .0 9 8 m
b P x b 1 4 8 9 . 2 7 x 0 .4 0

r \2 / \
e
=0 .2 4
M + t
7 1 U J \ J

y. = 1.5x16----3 =1.63=31.6
, , (7 0 .2 4 ,
............. o k

(7 0 74'
y s = 1 . 1 5 x 1 ^ - - ^ - 1 = 1 . 2 5 * 1 . 2 4 ......... o k

*1

342
7.9.3 Minimum Eccentricity for Biaxialiy Loaded Columns
The Egyptian code states that for columns subjected to biaxial bending, the moment
applied on either direction can be neglected if the eccentricity caused by this moment
is less than code minimum eccentricity of 0.05 t or 20 mm. The column in such a case
will be designed as if it is subjected to a uniaxial bending as shown in Fig. 7.28.

it
e*< 0.05 b i f - ©
( f o
o
• • cT
V
• • £
A,
V s. J
- ........r*“ x - T _

i 1 <
• 11 • ex> 0.05 b • »•

D e s i g n f o r Pu, & Mm D e s i g n f o r Pu & Muy Design for Puonly'

N e g l e c t Muy N e g l e c t Mm Neglect Muxand Mllv

Fig. 7.28 Minimum eccentricity requirements for biaxialiy loaded columns

Photo 7.7 Eccentrically loaded columns in a multi-span concrete bridge

Example 7.1 7
Determine the reinforcement required for
a column subjected to biaxial bending with Muy=12 kN.m
the following data:
Pu= 960 kN Mu>.=480 kN.m
fcu=
fv=
25 N/mm2
360 N/mm2
r H
300 mm
700 mm

Solution
The minimum eccentricity in each direction is the bigger of 0.05 of the column
dimension and 20 mm

e, min =0.05x—— = 0.015 m (or 0.02m) e, min = 0.05 x - ^ - = 0.035 m

1000 1000
12
= 0.0125 m <ex,mi,„ neglect Muy
960
480
= 0.5 m >ey,mjn Design for Mux
P„ 960
Thus design as if the section is subjected to uniaxial bending Pu, Mu>
Pu 960x1000
= 0.183
f cub t 25*300x700

480x10“
= 0.1306
f cub t 2 25x300x7002
Using interaction diagram with £=0.9 fy=360 N/mm2, a= l(to p and bottom)
P = 2.7
M = p * f cu x 10"4 = 2.7 x 25x 10"4 = 0.00675
As= n b t = 0.00675 * 300 x 700 = 1418 nun2 (3 025) 300 mm
A ' =A, =1473 m m 2
Please note that the two <J> 16 is added to
satisfy code spacing requirement.

344
7.9 .4 Biaxial Interaction Diagrams
The design of sections subjected to biaxial bending can be greatly simplified by using
interaction diagrams. The horizontal, plane (constant load level) is the chosen
representation of the failure surface. A computer program was prepared to carry out all
the required calculations. The program can be summarized in the following steps
1. The neutral axis is first assumed with certain inclination angel <j>, the forces
and moments in the reinforcement steel are evaluated.
2. The force in the concrete is determined' through the integration of the
idealized concrete stress strain curve (not the equivalent stress block) with the
compressed area.
3. A trial and adjustment procedure is performed by changing the neutral axis
inclination and/or position until the equilibrium is achieved.
4. Having determined the desired load level, moments are evaluated and a point
in the interaction diagram is plotted.
5. For the same reinforcement index (p) and load level Rj,, several neutral axis
positions are assumed and the corresponding bending moments are plotted
forming a curve on the interaction diagram.
6. The area of the steel determined from the charts and should be uniformly
distributed along the cross section.

7.9.5 The u s e o f Biaxial Interaction Diagrams

The use of biaxially interaction diagrams (refer to Fig. 7.29 and the appendix H) can
be summarized in the following steps.

1- Evaluate the load level Rb using the following equation

R = P“
* /J cuvb t*
2- Calculate the non-dimensional biaxial moments quantities

and Mu>
‘ L jb 2
3- Locate the reinforcement index p from the required load level chart using the
previous non-dimensional moments. If the desired load level is not
available, use interpolation to find p using charts of higher and lower value.
4- Calculate the total area of steel using the following
M= p x f cu* W '

This area of steel should be distributed uniformly (uniform in area) along the
cross section perimeter. There should be at least three-four bars in each side
of the column to ensure uniformity -

345
A computer program was prepared to carryout the computations required to construct
the biaxial interaction diagrams. An example of the developed interaction diagrams for
biaxially load column is shown in Fig. 7.29. The rest of the design aids is given in
Appendix H.

Fig. 7.29 Interaction diagram for biaxially load columns (appendix H)

346
Example 7 .1 8
Design the reinforcement for a short column subjected to biaxial bending accompanied
with compressive force using the following data:

feu =35 N/mm2 Muy=65 kN.m

fy =360 N/mm2
Pu =1200 kN
Mm =215 kN.m M u x = 2 1 5 k N .m
Muy =65 kN.m
c I-
250 mm
o
o■o

Solution
Step 1: Calculate the following terms

P 1200x1000
=0.228
f mb t 35x250x600

AC 215x10'
= 0.0683
f cub t 1 35x 250x 6002

M uy 65x10**
=0.0495
f cJ b 1 _ 35 x 600 x 2502

f.b t1
0 .0 6 8 3

347
Step 2: Calculate reinforcement area
Since the desired load level Rb=0.228 is not available in the biaxial interaction
diagrams (see Appendix H;jy=360 N/mm2, £=0.8), interpolation is performed between
Rb=0.2 and Rb=0.3
Rb=0.20 —+ p =5.0
Rb=0.30 -»■ p =6.8
Interpolating for Rb=o.228 — >p =5.5
ji = p fcu 10-4 = 5.5 x 35 x 10-4 =0.0193 > ^ '(0 .0 0 8 ) and < jw (0.04)
As,total = H b t = 0.0193 x 250 x 600 = 2895 mm2 =28.95 cm2
Choose 12 0) 18.

348
7 .9 .6 E C P -2 0 3 D e s ig n P ro c e d u re fo r B ia x ia l B e n d in g
The calculation procedure for sections subjected to biaxial bending is laborious. Many
design codes including the Egyptian code adopt the use of the simplified methods for
designing members subjected to biaxial bending.
The approximation used in the ECP-203 is to assume that the interaction curve can be
represented by two straight lines. Then, transferring the two applied biaxial moments
into one magnified (increased) uniaxial moment either M'x or M'y depending on the
ratio of the applied moments and the load level. Fig. 7.30 shows the ratio between the
section capacities in each direction.

AJA /''"j~ ^ \M y

Fig. 7.30 Developemtn of the ECP-203 design method

349
The angle X can be calculated as

tan X ------ — . (7.55)

........ ....................
b'
where Mx is the design moment, and M'x is the magnified.moment
Defining p as tan X gives
M L -K u -g tL .(7.56)
a! a' H b'

M [= M x+p \ - \ M y . (7.57)

similarly M'y

M ' = M y+p (“ 7")M .(7.58)

The previous equations are the basis of the code-simplified equations, in which the
value of the factor (3 was determined from the comparisons with the biaxial interaction
diagrams.

AT '

Fig. 7.31 Load contour for different reinforcement ratios and load levels.

350
Fig. 7.31 shows that for the same reinforcement ratio, the moment capacity for
columns with low load level is more than the moment capacity of columns at higher
load levels (above the balanced point). Also, the angle X differs from one load level to
another, and a constant value cannot be used. Thus, using X determined from high load
level (Rb=0.5) will lead to unconservative values of M'x for load levels near the
balanced point (Rb =0.2) (point A instead o f point B). The actual variation of P (tan X)
with load level is nonlinear. However, the code approximates the relation with a
conservative straight line given in Table 7.2 or the following equation.

P = 0 . 9 - ^ - > 0.6
2 ...................................................... (7.59)
< 0.8

Table 7.2 Values of P for different load levels

= Pu < 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 > 0.6

/« b a
P 0.8 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.60

Figure 7.32 represents the actual values of p determined from the strain compatibility
method versus the code approximate values. It can be seen that code value will yield
always a conservative design than using the interaction diagrams. The average area of
steel using the simplified method is about 10-20 percent higher than the actual vales as
shown in Fig. 7.32. However, better accuracy can be hardly obtained from such a
simplified design method

Load level, Rb
Fig. 7.32 Comparison among actual and code values for P

351
 Design steps for biaxially loaded colum ns w ith uniform reinforcem ent

1- Calculate the applied load level using

P..
Jf rcu
ub a

2- From Table 7.2 or Eq. 7.59 determine p factor, use interpolation if required
M. My ,, Ja'
if a b' M * =M * +P \ p -\M >

i f M ^ < ^ J - then M ' =M +fi ( ~ ~ ) M X

a b a

3- Locate a point on the uniformly distributed steel uniaxial interaction diagrams using

MI m ;
and ( or_ )
fe u b a f cub a f cu a b

4- Calculate the total area of steel by determining the reinforcement index p

M = p x f c « * l0~4
s jo ia l
--/jbt >AS„

This area of steel should be distributed uniformly (uniform in area) around the cross
section perimeter. There should be at least 3—>4 bars in each side of the column to ensure
uniformity as shown in Fig. 7.33.

Y jL ML
As/4

•.. .a
Ca ____ 5 U

• • .
AJ4

A/4 /
y » • a .■
k -p —

Fig. 7.33 Reinforcement details for biaxially loaded columns

352
 Example 7.19

Design a comer column in a braced building if it is subjected to

P. =1620 kN
eK = 0.068 m
ey —0.2345 m
The material properties are

in e the column dimensions are not given, assume load level of 0.3 and assume
column width of 250 mm. Thus;

=0 3 _ 1620x1000
fcub ‘ ' 30x250x7
t=720 mm
Try a column with 250x750 mm
Determme the actual load level Rb using the following equation

R - P« 1620x1000
f abt 30^250^750 ~°-288

Eq0^ ^ 3nC* US*n^ 'nterP°^at‘on between Rb=0.2 and Rb=0.3, or directly use

£ = a 9 0 ~ 2^ = o .M -H 25 * L 0.756
Calculate the applied moments using the given eccentricities

K = P.*, = 1620x 0.2345 = 380 kN.m

Mr = p„•<?, = 1620 X 0.068 = 110 kN.m
Assume concrete cover = 30 mm, and the distance from the centerline of the
reinforcement to the concrete surface 45mm

353
a' = 7 5 0 -4 5 = 705 mm
b' = 250- 45= 205 mm
Since Mx /a'= (380/705) > (My/b') =(110/205), the design moment will be taken about
x. Using Eq. 7.57 gives

M ' = M + /?(—W =380 + 0.756) — )ll0 = 665.99

1 \jb') r {205 J

M' 665.99 xlO6 p^

f cub t 30 x 250 x 750

f = I5 0 -2 x 4 5 =08g
750
Using uniaxial interaction (uniformly distributed steel) f y~ 280 N/mm2
Since £=0.88 use interpolation
For £=0.9 p =14.0
For £=0.8 p =16.0
Therefore for 0.88 p=14.4
H = 14.4 x 3 0 x 10^= 0.0432 > ^ ( 0 .0 0 8 ) and <jxmax(0.06)
As>,omi = | i b t = 0.0432 x 250 * 750 = 8100 mm2
The number of bars should be the multiple of 4, thus choose 16 (j) 28.
The bars are distributed equally on the four sides.
16 d) 28

o
«o
r-

250 mm

354
7.9.7 Biaxial Bending in (Jnsymmetrically Reinforced
Sections

Sections with unsymmetrical reinforcement are often encountered in shear walls,

beam-columns and columns with high rectangularity ratio. From the cost-effectiveness
point of view, placing the reinforcement in the direction of the large moment is more
efficient. Thus, the ECP 203 provides a simple method for designing biaxially loaded
sections in which the steel is not uniformly distributed.
This simplified method is based on magnifying the applied moments by a moment
magnification factor. The magnification factor oib was introduced to modify the design
moments in both directions according to the load level and the ratio of the applied
biaxial moments. The magnification factor a b was evaluated after the examination of
the exact solution of the unsymmetrical interaction diagrams1 ( as the one shown in
Fig. 7.34). The code permits the use of this simplified method until a fairly high load
level of Rb <0.50 given by Eq. 7.60a. If Rb>0.5, biaxial interaction diagram with
uniform steel or the simplified method (7.9.2) may be used. The magnified moments
about X and Y-axes; M'x and M'y, are modified by the same factor a b provided that
(Pu /f cub a) <0.50 as follows:

.(7.60a)
fc J a
M'x = ab M x ..............................................(7.60b)
M y ..............................................(7.60c)

Fig. 7.34 Biaxial interaction diagram for unsymmetrically reinforced sections',(i)

’ Developed by the authors

355
 The uniaxial bending interaction diagrams (top and bottom steel only-Appendix B) is
used twice to calculate the area of steel for each direction.
This approach is easy to use in routine calculations and yields approximately the same
results obtained through the interaction design curves for biaxially loaded members
with unsymmetrical reinforcement. The suggested values of a b are given in Table 7.3.
It can be noticed that the values of the coefficient a b are symmetrical about
(Mx/a')/(My/b') =1 (case of uniform steel). It can also be noticed from Fig. 7.35 that the
general practice o f designing rectangular reinforced concrete beams subjected to pure
biaxial bending (R b = 0 ) twice by using the design moments Mx and My without
magnification (ab= l) is valid. However for sections subjected to biaxial bending with
normal force this assumption will yield unconservative results, as the design bending
moments need to be magnified.

Fig. 7.35 Actual values o f a bfor rectangular cross sections

356
t
Table 7 .3 values of a b for rectangular cross sections
oo 3 2 1 ■ 0.5 0.33 0
Rb=P„/ fjb'a
Rb£0.1 l 1.2 1.25 1.30 1.25 1.20 1
Rb=0.2 l 1.35 1.50 1.75 1.50 1.35 1
Rb=0.3 l 1.25 1.35 1.4 1.35 1.25 1
Rb=0.4 l 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 1
Rb=0.5** l 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.70 0.65 1

* This is a case of My=0. For cases in which My does not equal to zero, value of 10 is
sufficient for interpolation
** If Ry>0.5, biaxial interaction diagram with uniform steel or the simplified method
(7.9.2) may be used

Photo 7.8 Biaxially loaded corner column in court house

357
 D e sig n S te p s fo r b ia x ia lly lo a de d co lu m n s w ith u n s y m m e tric a l
re in fo rc e m e n t
1- Calculate the applied load level and moment ratio using

R ,h = —5.l _
~ and. —M 1-J—
a '-
fc u b a M y fb
2- From the table determine a b factor Rb <0.50 , use interpolation if required
M ' - a, M
My

y se £ 0P and_ bottom steel interaction diagrams twice to determine the reinforcement

index p, calculate the total area of steel.

Using M'
— - i— -and — — s .— determine fix = / 7 x / c„ x l O "
Jcu ° « JCMb a
rr • M'.. p
Using— — r and "— determine // = p x / £» xlO"
Jcu^b f c ub a
- =Hx b t A.
and ~= ftyb t
The area of steel determined for each direction should be duplicated at the opposite face
as shown m Fig. 7.36. The total area of steel equals

AsM i ~ Asx + AS}, = 2 +My ) b a

Fig. 7.36 Analysis of sections with unsym m etrical re in fo rc e m e n t

358
Example 7 .2 0
Determine the unsymmetrical reinforcement required for a short interior column
tA kiovi<l1 11 1 ,

Column size 300 x 800 mm

Pu = 1440 kN
Mux = 580 kN.m
Muy =120 kN.m
= 30 N/mm2
fy = 400 N/mm2 ( Muy=120 kN.m

Mux=580 kN.m

_L

Solution 300 mm
H
Step 1: Calculate the magnified moments.
Assuming concrete cover 40 mm, thus
a'=800-40=760 mm
b'=300-40=260 mm
Calculate
M„Ja' 580/760
= 1.65

1440 x 1000
= 0.20
f cub a 30x 300x 800 A.v/2
Asy/2

Note that the comer bar is

divided between x and y
directions
Asy/2
Asx/2
b'=26'
l<--------- >
300

359
From Table 7.3 in this text and by using interpolation ab=1.587

M'x= Mux . ab = 580 (1.587) = 920.2 kN.m

M'y= Muy . ab = 120 (1.587) = 190.4 kN.m
Calculate the non-dimensional quantities:

m; 920.2xioooxiooo = q 159
f^ ba1 30x300x800

M\, _ 190.4 x 1000 x 1000 Qgg

f ^ a b 1 ~ 30 x 800x 3002
_ 8 0 0 -2 x 4 0 _
800
„ 2 5 0 -2 x 4 0 n/ror
—-------------- —0.685 w 0.70
hb 250
Using the regular uniaxial interaction diagrams with symmetrical reinforcement top
and bottom (fy=400 N/mm2, a = l)

Step 2: Area of steel for M'x

P M'
^=0.9, — -— = 0.20,----- *—? - 0.159, the reinforcement index (px) equals
fcub a fcub a

Px= 3.4
Hx* =
M =Pp *X £« 10"4 = 3.4x30 x l0'4 = 0.0102
A=A'S=AJ2
(ASJ2) = pxb a = 0.0102 x 300 x 800 = 2448 mm2 (@each side)

360
Step 3: Area of steel for M'y
P M ’,
Cb =0-7, — = 0.20,----- i— = 0.088, the reinforcement index (py) equals
fcub a fo ,a b 2
py= 1.6
(Xy = py 10-4 = 1.6 x 30 x K)-4 = 0.0048
(Asy /2)= jiy b a = 0.0048 x 300 x 800 = 1152 mm2 (@each side)

Step 4: Final design

As,roin = 0.008 x 300 x 800 = 1920 mm2
A^otai = Asx + Asy = 2 (2448 + 1152) = 7200 mm2> As,min

_ s.mni _ —?200 _ o 0 3 <(u =0.04 for interior column)

b x d 300x800
(choose 12 ® 28, 7389 mm2 )

Note : The comer bar is divided between x direction and y direction

[Asx/2 = 5 <1)25 (2454 mm2), Asy /2= 3 <6 25 (1473 mm2)]

5025
__^ ___
300 mm 1/2025 4 ^ 2 5 1/2025

\1 /2 0 2 5

2025 \2 0 2 5 „
/
' & •
1/2025 1/2025
/

1/2025 4 $ 2 5 1/2025
I,___________________^ ___________________ J

5025

361
7.9.8 Circular Columns under Biaxial Bending

Biaxial moments applied to circular sections can be transformed into equivalent

uniaxial bending. This procedure is possible because the bending strength of circular
columns is the same in all directions due to the complete symmetry of the section.
Thus the design of a circular column subjected to biaxial bending (as the one shown in
Fig. 7.37) is the same as the one subjected to uniaxial,bending but with a resultant
uniaxial moment equals

Mu +Mly ,................................................. ....(7.61)

Pu

Reinforcement

Fig. 7.37 Circular sections under biaxial bending

The previous procedure is valid in case of using almost uniform steel distribution. The
use of at least 12 bars is considered sufficient to ensure uniformity.

362
Example 7.21
Design a circular column in a braced building if it is subjected to:
Pu =560 kN
Mux =275 kN.m
Muy =140 kN.m
The material properties are
fcu =25 N/mm2
fy =240 N/mm2

Muy=140 kN.m

Mux=275 kN.m

D=600 mm

Solution
The column is subjected to biaxial bending moments. It can be designed to withstand a
resultant moment Mu

Mu = V2752 + 1402 = 308.58 kN.m

Assume concrete cover of 30 mm

Mu=308.58 kN.m

D=600 mm

363
Using interaction diagrams for circular sections (Appendix E)fy= 240 N/mm2, £=0.9
p=6.8
H = p f m x 10'4 = 6.8 x 25 x 10-4 = 0.017 >nmi„ (0.008) and < j w (0.04)

ASJMl = j u x r 1 = 0.017x7rx3002 = 4806mm2

Choose 16 <|>20

1 D=600 mm 1

Reinforcement detail

Assuming that the lateral reinforcement is 6 <j)10/m', thus the volume of the stirrups Vs
equals (AbWJ0)=78 mm2):

Vs =n7rxDl Ah = 6xttx550 x 78 = 808645 mm3

K m in = — X - X D2 X 1000 = — X - X 6002 X 1000 = 706858 mm1 < V ......oJc

s'mn 100 4 100 4

364
7.9.9 Interaction Diagrams for L-Sections
L-section columns are often encountered in the comers of buildings. Most of these
columns are subjected to bending in addition to the normal force. Since L-sections are
not symmetrical about either axis, evaluating their strength is very complicated and
time consuming. In addition, the eccentricity of the applied load with respect to the
local axes affects the resistance of the section. Developing interaction diagrams for L-
sections is a design tool without any approximations. The construction of the
interaction diagram for L-sections is similar to that for rectangular columns subjected
to biaxial bending, but the neutral axis has to be assumed in one of four positions as
shown in Fig. 7.38.
The developed charts are limited to columns that are symmetrical about a 45° axis as
in Fig. 7.38. Furthermore, the width of the column b is defined as a ratio from column
height X=—.

Fig. 7.38 Different positions for the neutral axis in L-sections

The load level is determined by normalizing the applied compressive force with the
net concrete area Ar

R„=- . (7.62)

Ac =b xt +b(t -b ) = 2xt xb - b 2 (7.63)

365
The moment is normalized with respect to the net concrete area Ac and the section
thickness t.

fe u A c t fcu A c 1
The area of steel should be at least 16 bars and should be a multiple of 8 to ensure
uniformity and equals
^ m„=M x Ac ...... ................................... (7.64)
An example of these charts is shown in Fig. 7.39, the rest of the charts is given in the
Appendix I.

Fig. 7.39 Biaxial Interaction Diagrams for L-sections (appendix I)

366
Example 7.22
Determine the area of steel required for an L-shape reinforced concrete column that is
subjected to the following straining actions:
Pu =950 kN
Mux =180 kN.m
Mtty =115 kN.m
The material properties are as follows:
fcu =25 N/mm2
fv =360 N/mm2

M„K= 1 80 kN.m

250
500 mm

Solution:
Calculate the area of the concrete section Ac
Ac = 500 x 250 + 250 x 250 = 187500 mm2

,,= 1 = 2 5 0 = 0 .5
' ( 500
Note that the direction of the given moments will produce a compression in zone 1,
thus the normal force will be as shown in figure.
Calculate the following terms

950x1000
= 0.202
/„, Ac 25x187500

= 180 x 1000x1000 = QQ76g

f cuAc t 25x187500x500

Muy 115x1000*1000 0 (m
f a Ac t 25x187500x500 Mux=180 kN.m

367
Referring to chart (in Appendix I) with Rb=0.2, X=0.50, ^=0.85 the compression zone
in the first quarter of the chart, the reinforcement index p can be obtained as follows

p = 10.2
p. = p fcu 10~4 = 10.2 x 25 x KT4 =0.0255
A s,totai = | i A c = 0.0255 x 187500 = 4781.25 m m 2
The area of steel should be at least 8 bars and should be a multiple of 8

A reaof one bar = _ 299 mm 2

16
As,Chosen= 16 $ 20, 5026 mm2

368
8
SLENDER COLUMNS

Photo 8.1 Unbraced slender columns at Rice University,- USA.

8.1 D efinition o f S le n d e r Colum ns

Consider a very short column subjected to increasing axial load, eventually the
compressive stress is exceeded and compression failure occurs. Now consider a
relatively slender column subjected to increasing axial load, when the load reaches a
certain value, the column begins to bend about its weaker axis and deflect laterally.
The column is said to have buckled.
For a pin-pin ideal column (without any imperfections) the buckling load (also called
Euler load) is given by

...... .......................................... {si)

in which E l is the flexural rigidity and L is the ‘column length.

369
Thus, a column is more likely to buckle when either the length (L) is increased or the
flexural rigidity (El) is reduced. Up to Euler load, for a perfectly straight member, the
column is stable without any lateral deformation. However, at Euler load, the column
will be at bifurcation “unstable” equilibrium, in which it will buckle laterally with
indeterminate magnitude. The previous behavior is applied for perfectly straight
column, which almost does not exist in reinforced concrete industry. Columns will not
be exactly vertical and loads are always slightly eccentric.
Figure 8.1a shows a pin-ended column before loading. Assuming that the column is
loaded at an eccentricity e, then it will laterally deflect by an amount S as shown in
Fig. 8.1b. This lateral deflection increases the moments for which the column must be
designed. In the symmetrically loaded column shown here, the maximum moment
occurs at mid-height where the maximum deflection occurs.
The moments at the ends of the column are:

P P

A A

JyM=P(e+6)
v
Sec. A-A

(b) During loading

Fig. 8.1 Straining actions for a deflected column

M e =P e (8.2.a)

For equilibrium, the internal moment at mid-height must be

M =P( e +S ) (8.2.b)

A slender column is defined as a column that has a significant reduction in its axial
load capacity due to moments resulting from lateral deflections of the column.

370
Figure 8.2 shows an interaction diagram for a cross-section of a reinforced concrete
column. This diagram gives the combinations of axial load and moment, which are
required to cause failure of a very short column. The dashed radial line OtA is a plot
for the end moment on the column in Fig. 8.1b. Since the load is applied at a constant
eccentricity, e, the end moment, linear function of P, as given by Eq. (8.2.a).
The curved solid line O-B is the moment Mc at mid-height of the column, given by
Eq. (8.2.b). At any given load P, the moment at mid-height is the sum of the end
moment, Pe, and the moment due to the lateral deflection, PS. The line O-A is referred
to as a load-moment curve for the end moment, while the line O-B is the load-moment
curve for the total column moment. If the column is slender, failure occurs when the
load-moment curve O-B intersects the interaction diagram for the cross-section at
point B as shown in Fig. 8.2. Because of the increase in maximum moment due to the
secondary moments, the axial load capacity is reduced from A to B. This reduction in
axial load capacity results from what are referred to as slenderness effect. Since,
failure still occurs at one of the points of the interaction diagram, it is called material
failure.
For very slender columns, failure occurs well within the cross-section interaction
diagram because of the pronounced second-order effect (slenderness effect). This type
of failure is called stability failure. In this type of failure, the collapse load of the
column (point C) is less than the actual material given by the interaction diagram.

Fig. 8.2 Loads and moments in short and slender columns

371
8.2 C la s s ific a tio n o f Buildings
The Egyptian Code ECP classifies concrete structures as being braced ox unbraced.

Many concrete building structures are braced by providing shear walls, cores, or
elevator shafts. The stiffness of these elements is considerably higher than the
columns themselves and may be assumed to attract all horizontal forces (Fig. 8.4a).

An unbraced building is the one that resists the lateral loads by the framing action of
the beams and the columns or that is provided with flexible shear walls (Fig. 8.4b).
According to the ECF-203, a building that does not contain shear walls is considered
unbraced.
According to the Egyptian Code, a building that contains shear walls or cores that
extend the full building height can be considered braced at a certain direction if they
were symmetrically distributed and satisfy the following equation:

< 0.60 fo r n> 4 (8.3a)

< 0.20+0.1« fo r n< 4 (8.3b)

where

Hb = height of the building in meters above foundation

N = sum of all unfactored vertical loads of the building (total working gravity
loads)
^£/ = sum of the flexural rigidities of all the vertical stiffening elements
under service conditions,
n = number of stories.
E =4400 f a
It should be mentioned that a building can be considered braced in one direction and
unbraced in the other depending on the distribution of the walls on plan. Fig 8.4 shows
examples of braced and unbraced structures. To check the bracing of a building in the
two directions, one has to calculate the values a x and a y as follows:

(bracing in x-direction) (8.3c)

(bracing in y-direction) (8.3d)

Example 8.1 illustrates the application of the above equations

372
 -C
3CD
oc
0
C
o
CD
oc -o
CO

03
.2 O
G
o S
0
%
cn J2
o . 0c
c
-o 'o
CD
O £0
XI
s ©
SI

Fig. 8.3 Classification of buildings according to ECCS 203

. XX
c h
Z>

c w
-2 1
I 15
C Buildings

02.
3
D
C>
*o
03
u
£}
O
z
fR
Types o /

<0
*o
CQ
w _o

E 03
- jl
© 0)
“D £
<D CO
0
O -to - 05 SI
CD ^ c
C o
CO
to
CQ *55 <0
JD £
C
© £
*o *o
0
*D
©
>
o
< Q .

373
 Stiff shear walls

(a) No shear walls or core) (b) (shear walls system)

Unbraced structure Unbraced in Y-direction
Braced in X-direction

Stiff shear Stiff shear walls

(c) shear walls system (d) shear walis+core system

Braced structure in X&Y directions Braced structure in X&Y directions

Fig. 8.4 Examples for braced & unbraced structures

374
8.3 Braced and Unbraced Columns
Columns located in braced structures are referred to as braced columns. Columns
located in unbraced structures are referred to as unbraced columns.
Eccentrically loaded braced slender columns are subjected to additional moments due
to the fact that the center-line deviates from the original vertical (un-deformed) shape.
This is called additional moments due to member stability effect (Fig. 8.5a).
Unbraced columns are subjected to additional moments due mainly to lateral drift
effect, which occurs due to the fact that each story is laterally shifted with respect to
the one below (Fig. 8.5b). Member stability effect still exists but has a minor effect.
It should be noted that member stability effect results in additional moments in braced
slender columns. On the other hand, lateral drift effect results in additional moments
in unbraced short columns as well as in unbraced slender columns. In unbraced
slender columns, however, member stability effect might increase the additional
moments.

Relative displacement
between column ends

Fig. 8.5Bracedand unbraced columns

375
8.4 S len d ern ess C o n sid era tio n s in the E g yp tian C o d e
This section outlines the procedure adopted by the Egyptian Code for slenderness
consideration.

8.4.1 Code Definition of Slender Columns

The degree of slenderness is generally expressed in terms o f the slenderness ratios

(8-4.a)
or

(8.4.b)
in which

(8.5)

and

H=kH o
(8.6)

where

He = the buckling length or the effective height of the compression member,

b = the column dimension perpendicular to the axis of bending,
k = length factor which depends on the end conditions of the compression member
as well as the bracing conditions.
H0 = unsupported (clear) height of the compression member.
i = the radius of gyration of the cross section and can be taken as 0.3 b for
rectangular section and 0.25 D for circular section. For other shapes, I may be
computed for the gross concrete section.

According to the Egyptian Code, slender columns are defined as those that have
slenderness ratios greater than those mentioned in Table (8.1) but not more than those
mentioned in Table (8.2). The minimum area of steel for slender column is given by

< min (8.7a)

Anin = 0.25 + 0.052 \ (for rectangular columns) ........ (8.7b)

A™, =0.25 + 0.015 A,. (for other columns) (8.7c)

376
Table (8.1) Limits of Slenderness Ratio for Short Columns

Column Status h or 4-

Braced 15 12 50

Unbraced 10 8 35

Table (8.2) Limits of Slenderness Ratio for Slender Columns

Column Status or XD 4'

Braced 30 25 100

Unbraced 23 18 70

8.4.2 Unsupported Height of a Com pression Mem ber (Ha)

The unsupported height H0 of a compression member shall be taken as the clear
distance between floor slabs, floor beams, girders or other members capable of
providing lateral support for the compression member. Where capitals or haunches are
present, the unsupported length shall be measured to the lower extremity of the capital
or haunch in the plane considered (see Fig. 8.6). It should be noted that the buckling
length may be different in X-direction than Y-direction as shown in Fig. xx

b) Flat plates c) Flat slab with

colum ns h ea d s

Fig. 8.6 Unsupported length o f columns (H0)

377
8.4.3 Effective Height of a Com pression Mem ber (He)
Columns supported by hinges and rollers do not exist in real structures. The ends of a
real column are retrained against rotation by their supports, and moments always
develop. The effective length concept can be established by examining the
deformation of the buckled column with that of a pin-pin column.
The buckling length or the effective height of a compression member (He) is the
distance between the points of inflection of the diagram representing the buckled
shape of the member. It depends on the end conditions of the column and whether it is
braced against side-sway or not.
The definition of the effective height is illustrated in Figs. 8.7a and 8.7b for braced
and unbraced columns, respectively.

For braced columns, k is the smaller of:

k =[0.7+0.05 (a,+ a 2)] < 1.0 ...............................(8.8a)

k =[0.85 + 0.05 (a™,)] < 1.0 ..................................(8.8b)

For unbraced columns, k is the smaller of:

k = [1.0+0.15 (a,+o:2)] > 1.0 ..............................(8.9a)

k = [2.0 +0.30 (amin)] > 1.0 ................... (8.9b)

where
a j , a 2 = Ratio of the sum of the column stiffness to the sum of the beam
stiffness at column lower and upper ends respectively
a min = Smaller of ay & a 2

The coefficient a is given by

g ... 2 K ijh .) (8.10)

2 K h l h ) ...........................

378
Where
Ec = modulus of elasticity for columns
El, - modulus o f elasticity for beams
Ic = gross moment of inertia of the column cross-section without considering the
steel reinforcement
Ih = gross moment of inertia of the beam cross-section
Lb = clear span of the beam
Ha = clear height of the column

Special cases
- a=1.0 for a column connected to a base designed to resist column moment.
- a=10 for a column connected to a base that is not designed to resist moment.
- a=l .0 for simply supported beams framing into a coluPmn.

Notes:
- When calculating the flexural rigidity of the beam cross-section that has a T shape or
L shape, the width of the flange is taken as follows

B is the smaller of (l6/s +b)/2 or (L2/5+b)j2 for a T-section

B is the smaller of (6«s +b)/2 or (L2fIQ+b)f2 for a L-section

The Egyptian Code permits the use of the gross moment of inertia of the beam section
and allows taking the effect of cracking of the beam through using half the value of
the gross moment of inertia of the beam section.

- The ratio ( a ) may be calculated in flat slab construction on the basis of an

equivalent beam having the width and the thickness of the column strip of the slab
in the direction of analysis.

As a simplification, the Egyptian Code gives the values of the factor (k) for four cases
of end restraint condition. The values of (k) are given in Table (8-3) for braced
columns and in Table (8-4) for unbraced columns.

379
I.P.
A 1—-
M .P .

J .P .
\ —
\
\
\
1
I
I
Inflection point
I .P . (I-P-)
I.P. *
A
P
IP
(1) k=1.0 (2 ) k = 0 .5 0 (3 ) 0 .5 0 < k < 1.0

(a) Braced columns

(b) Unbraced columns

Fig. 8.7 Effective heights of columns

380
Table (8-3) Values of (k) for Braced Columns

End condition at bottom

End condition at top
1 2 3
1 0.75 0.80 0.90

2 0.80 0.85 0.95

3 0.90 0.95 1.00

Table (8-4) Values of (k) for Unbraced Columns

End condition at bottom

End condition at top
1 2 3
1 1.20 1.30 1.60

2 1.30 1.50 1.80

3 1.60 1.80 -

4 2.20 - -

The four conditions are as follows:

i) Condition 1: The end of the column is connected monolithically to

beams that are at least as deep as the overall dimension of the column
in the plane considered. Foundation designed to withstand moments is
considered in this category.

ii) Condition 2: The end of the column is connected monolithically to

beams or slabs that are shallower than the overall dimensions of the
column in the plane considered.

iii) Condition 3: The end of the column is connected to members which,

while not specifically designed to provide restraint to rotation of the
column, nevertheless, provide some nominal restraint (hinged base).

iv) Condition 4: The end of the column is unrestrained against both

lateral movement and rotation (i.e cantilever column).

Note: The unsupported height of the column might be different in the two orthogonal
directions (X- and Y- directions). Figure 8-8 shows an example for such a case.

381
 X - d ir e c t io n Y - d ir e c t io n

C ase 1 -to p / 3 -b o t. 1 -to p / 3 -b o t.

H0 H, h 3
K 1 .6 0 1 .6 0

He 1.6 x H , 1.6 x H3
, 1.6 xH , , 1 .6 x H ,
b b \ = — r *

6
g _ X g _ A x t
b 2000 t_ 2000

Hdd<y)^u ’^ b Madd(x)
= PU. 8 ti
add

■y

Fig. 8.8 Effective height for an unbraced column

8.5 D esign M oments in Slender Braced Columns
The Egyptian Code takes into account the increase in the applied moments in slender
columns by adding to the original moment an additional moment. The additional
moment is assumed to occur due to interaction of the applied load with the lateral
deflection of the column.

8.5.1 Calculation of the Additional Moments

According to the Egyptian Code the additional moment ( M aM) induced by the
deflection ( 8 ) is given by:

= PS (8.11)

Figure 8.9 illustrates a case of a rectangular column subjected to additional moments

in two directions.
Y

X
r

Fig. 8.9 Calculations of additional moments

If the columns is slender in t direction (about X-axis in Fig. (8.7))

7
( 8. 12)
2000

(8.13)

If the columns is slender in b direction (about Y-axis in Fig. (8.7))

For circular columns of diameter (D)

22 n
................................................(8.16)
2000

For columns with a general shape

22 /'
S = - 2 J — ................................................ (8.17)
30000
where
t' = column dimension in the direction considered (in mm).
Xj = slenderness ratio using the column radius of gyration i, given by Eq. 8.4b.

8.5.2 Design Moments

Assume a braced slender column subjected to two end moments M] and M2 and the
M2 is the larger of the two end moments. Figure (8.10) shows the distribution of
moments assumed over the height of a typical braced column. M-t is the initial
moment at a section located near the mid-height and is calculated from:

M t = 0.4M, + 0.6M2 > 0 .4 M 2 ........................... (8.18)

For columns subjected to double curvature, the sign of the moment is taken negative.

The design moment for braced columns is taken as the largest value of:

M2

......................................................... .....(8.19)

P e mm

Note:
The axial force in a column may be calculated based on the assumption that the beams
and slabs transmitting force into it are simply supported. For the case of interior
columns supporting approximately symmetrical arrangements of beams, the end
moments (Mt) and (M2) may be assumed equal to zero. This assumption does not
apply to columns of flat slab construction for which moments transferred to columns
are dealt with explicitly by the code. The initial moments in exterior columns may be
estimated as given in Table (8.5).

384
End condition Initial moment Additional
of column from analysis moment

M add

LU

bigger moment Madd

LU M2

m
smaller moment

Fig. 8.10 M tial and additional moments in braced slender columns

385
Table (8.5) Design Moments for Exterior Columns

Position of moment Moments for frames of one Moments for frames of two
bay bays or more

Moments at foot of upper Ku-Mf Ku -Mf

column K( + Ku+0.5 K„ K,+ K ' + K h
Moments at head of lower Kt -Mf Kr Mf
column KC+ K U+0.5K„ Kt +K u + K„

Where
M f = bending moment at the end of the beam framing in the column, assuming fixity
at both ends of the beam.
Kb= stiffness of the beam
Kt = stiffness of the lower column
Ku= stiffness of the upper column

Photo 8.2: Shear walls and slender columns during construction.

386
 8.6 D esign M om ents in Unbraced Slender Columns
The Egyptian Code takes into account the increase in the applied moments in
unbraced slender columns by adding to the original moment an additional moment.
The additional moment is assumed to occur due to interaction of the applied load with
the lateral deflection of the column. It should be mentioned that unbraced short
columns are also subjected to additional moments due the relative displacements of
the ends of the columns.

8.6.1 Additional moment

Unbraced columns are generally connected to floors that are rigid enough in their own.
plane to induce equal deflection (side-sway) to all columns under lateral loads. In such
a case an average deflection may be applied to all columns. This deflection can be
assessed from the following equation:

sm =Y,s!n .............................(8-2°)

where
8av = average deflection at ultimate limit state of the floor
§ = deflection at ultimate limit state for each column calculated from Eqs. 8.12
n = the number of the columns in the floor

After the calculation of ( S av ), any values of the ( S ) more than twice ( S av ) should
be ignored and the average recalculated. In such a case, (n) in Eq. (8.20) should be
reduced appropriately.

M mU = P . 6 „ ......................................... (8.21)

8.6.2 Design moments

Assume an unbraced slender column subjected to two end moments Mj and M2 and
the M2 is the larger of the two end moments. The distribution of moments assumed
over the height of an unbraced column is shown in Fig. (8.11). The design moment for
unbraced columns is taken as the largest value of:

M 2+ M mld .

P ............................................................ ........ (8.22)

where
M2 is the larger initial end moment due to design ultimate loads.
Fig. 8.12 summarizes the calculations of Madj in rectangular slender columns
according ECP-203

387

I
 End condition Initial moment Additional Design
of column from analysis moment moment

Madd M 2 + M a dd

LU I----- H 1---------------- 1

Stiffer end joint

M, add M2 +M add
LU 1------------- H

m
le s s stiff end joint
may be reduced in proportion to
the ratio of the stiffness of the less
stiff to the stiffer joint

Fig. 8.11 Design moments in unbraced slender columns

388
 Columns

r
Braced Unbraced
Short if X< 15 X < 10
Long if 15 < X < 30 10 < A, < 25

Not accepted if X- > 30 X,> 23

K-factor (Table 8.3) (Table 8.4)

Fig.8.12 Calculations of M ^ in rectangular slender columns according to ECP-203

389
 V
fa
5
s
u
■a
V
cc

■
a5

VI
<-<:
Design of columns

o
m<
IT

IS s
8
as
<«
a
S
-e
VI I*
£
co

390
Example 8.1
Figure EX-8.1 shows a structural plan of an eleven story residential building. The
following data are given:
Thickness of the flat plate at all floors = 220 mm, flooring=1.5 kN/m2, equivalent wall
loads = 2 kN/m2 and the live load = 3 kN/m2. The height of the ground floor is 5.0 m
and that of the typical floor is 3.0 m. The weight of the core, the walls and the
columns can be assumed equal to 20000 kN. The concrete cube strength
f cu = 35 N / m m 2
It is required to check the bracing condition of the building in both directions.

Solution
The building is provided with a core and 2 shear walls to increase its capacity to resist
the lateral loads. According to the ECP 203, the following equation is to be used to
check whether the building is braced or unbraced.

where

Hb The total height of the building above the foundation level

N Total unfactored vertical loads acting on all vertical elements
£ £ / Summation of flexural rigidity of all vertical walls in the direction under
consideration

Step 1: Calculation of N

Weight of typical floor = Own weight + Flooring + Equivalent wall load + Live load
= 0.22x25+1.50 + 2.0 + 3.0
= 12 kN/m2
Total Weight of floor = Area xUnit weight
= (26.00x34.00) x 12
= 10608 kN/floor

Total Weight o f Building, N

= No. of floors x Weight of floor + weight of core, walls and columns
= 11 x 10608+20000
= 136688 kN

391
 2 6 .0 0 m
0
5.0 m 5.0 m 6.0 m 5.0 m 5.0 m

Figure Ex-8.1. Plan of a Typical Story

392
Step 2:Calculation of the moment of inertia of the core and the walls
The core resists lateral loads in the X- and the Y-directions. The walls resist lateral
loads in the Y-direction only.

For the Core

3x0.35x3.85x 2.275 + 6.3 x 0.35 x 0.175
y =- = 1.53 m
3x0.35x3.85 + 6.3x0.35
3x0.35x3.85
+ 3 x 0.35 x 3.85 x (2.275 -1 .5 3 )2 + -6 '3 * °'35 - + 6.3 x 0.35 x (1.53 - 0 . 1 75)2
12

l x = 11.30m4
3x0.353x3.85 0.35 x 6.3 ,6.3
*,= + 2x0.35x3.85 (— -0.175)2 =31.19/n4
12 12 2

For the Walls

r 0.35 x4.23
= 2.16 m3
12

l r = 2.16m4

r 4.2x0.353
/ = ------------- =zero
1 12

Step 3: Calculation o f Hb
Height of the building above the foundation
=10 x 3.0 + 5.0=35.0 m

393
Step 4: Check bracing condition in Y-direction (Calculation of ay)
The lateral bracing of the building in Y-direction is achieved by the core, Ix = 11.3 m4
and the two shear walls.
E = 4400^/f cu N/mm2

E = 4400^35 = 2.6 x 104 N ! m m 1 = 2.6 x 107 k N Im 2

I E lx =E j : ( I xicore) + 2 X I x(wall)) = 2.6 X 1o7X (11.30 + 2 x 2.16) = 4.06 x 108

a. =Hh ' U

136688
a ,,=35.0x.l—
J V4.106x10

= 0.64 > 0.60 Unbraced Structure in Y-direction

Step 5: Check bracing condition in X-direction (Calculation of a , )
The bracing of the building in X-direction is achieved by the core, Iy = 31.19 m2.

Y ,E Iy =Ex /„„ = 2.6xl07x31.19 = 8.1x10®kN.m2

a . =Hh

136688
a y =35.0 x IJE
V8.1 xlO
= 0.45 < 0.60 Braced Structure in X-direction

O
I
-S

I Braced in X-direction

394
Example 8.2
Design the rectangular column shown in the figure below to support a factored load of
1500 kN. For simplicity the column may be assumed hinged at the foundation level.
The column is considered unbraced in x-direction and braced in y-direction. The
material properties aref cu = 30 N /mm2 andf y~ 360 N /mm2.

beam 250x600
o
vo

'0.45
o
r-~
A

S
ovo
o“

ooo
c4

E le v a tio n

250x600

<d <S
CM

S e c A-A

395
Solution:
Step N o.l: Considering the moments developed in t-direction (My)
The column is considered unbraced in X and Y directions as no lateral resisting system
is provided.
Clear height of the column, H0 = 6.6- 0.6=6.0 m
The top end of the column is connected monolithically to beams that are deeper than
the dimension of the column (conditionl), while the bottom end of the column is given
as hinged condition (condition 3).
From Table (8-4), the effective length factor —*—* k = 1.60.

The effective height, He = k H0

He = 1.60x6.0 = 9.60 m
H. 9.60
in-plane 21.33 > 10 and not more than 23
t 0.45
The column is classified as slender column in the direction considered, and additional
moment is developed.
„ X2xt 21.332 x 0.45
= 0.102 m
2000 2000 M ad d (y )

~P<i x<^ =1500x0.102 = 153kN.m O

o
<*■> ----- X
^ l o l a l {in-plane) “ ^ad d

v Mu =0
M.„total (in-planc) = 0 + 153 = 153 kN.m
t=450
.'. M„=153 kN.m.

Step No. 2: Considering the moments developed in b-direction (Mx)

Clear height of the column, H0 = 2.80 m (the largest of the two heights)
The top end of the column is connected monolithically to beams that are deeper than
the dimension of the column (conditionl), while the bottom end o f the column is given
as hinged condition(condition 3).
From Table (8-4), the effective length factor-*-* k = 0.90.
The effective height, He = k H0
He =0.90 x 2.80 = 2.52 m
H. 2.52
out o f plane =8.4 <10
0.30
The column is classified as short column in the direction considered, and no additional
moment is developed.

396
 ^loUoutofplane) My+ Madd
' *M[ot,(oulofpjanc) ®
Mx=0 .
Step No.3: Design of the reinforcement:
The column is subjected to uniaxial bending, calculate the following terms:

Pt 1500x1000 ; ?
f m.b.t 30x300x450

Assume cover = 40 mm —>—* £ = °-82 —>—>Use £=0.80(conservative)

Using the uniaxial interaction diagram (top & bottom steel) (Appendix B)
From the diagram with f y = 360 N /mm2, C,—0.80, a =1—>—> p = 3.5

p = 3 . 5 x 3 0 x 10"4= 0.00875 < p max (0.05) (external column).

As = p b t = 0.00875 x 300 x 450 = 1181 mm2
As =A' =1181 mm2

= A s +As = 1181+1181 =2362 mm2

p min = 0.25 + 0.052 x 21.33 =1.359 %

As.mm= 0.01359 x 300 x 4 5 0 = 1834.65 mm2< ASitota,
Choose 5 <E* 18 top & 5 O 18 bottom (As>tota1- 2544 mm2)

450 mm

397
Example 8.3
Design the rectangular column shown in the figure below to support a factored
eccentric load of 500 kN (own weight of column may be neglected). The column is
connected to a footing that can resist moment. The material properties are / C11= 25 N
/mm2 and f y - 400 N /mm2.

500 KN

beam 250x700

a1" tA

-k , 600 ,

IIC Z ]
Sec. A-A

Semelle
250x800,
-V

L ..1 ,'—2— _i
Elevation In-plane direction
beam beam S e c B-B
250x700 250x700

>Y
S e c C-C
Fig Ex.8.3

398
Solution:
Step 1: Considering the in-plane direction of the column (M*)
Since the structure is not provided by lateral resisting system, it is considered
unbraced. Clear height of the column, H0 = 6.0 m
The top end of the column is unrestrained against both lateral movement & rotation
(cantilever column) (condition 4) while the bottom end of the column is connected to
a footing that can resist moment (condition 1). From Table (8-4), the effective length
factor, k = 2.20.

The effective height, He = k H0

He = 2 .20 x 6 .0 = 13.20 m
H. 1 3 .2 0
- = 2 2 > 1 0 a n d n o t m o re th a n 2 3
0 .6 0
The column is classified as a slender column in the direction considered, and an
additional moment is developed.
2 2 ^ x 0 6 0 = (U 4 5
2000 2000
- x
M «u ~?u xS =500x0.145 = 72.5K N . m
M]otal,(in-p!ane) =MU+ Mad(1
vM „ =500x0.50 = 250KN.m
••• M w & u in - p t a e ) = 2 5 0 + 7 2 . 5 = 3 2 2 . 5 K N . m

.- .M = 3 2 2 .5 K N .m .

250 Kn.m

250 Kn.m

72.5 Kn.m 322.5 Kn.m

Original Additional Total
moment moment moment

399
Step No.2: Considering the out of plane direction of the column(My)

Clear height of the column, H0 = 6-0.70 = 5.30 m

The top end of the column is connected monolithically to beams that are deeper than
the dimension o f the column (condition 1), while the bottom end of the column is
connected to a footing that can resist moment (condition 1).
From Table (8-4), the effective length factor —>—»—>k = 1.20.
The effective height, He = k H0
He =1.20x5.30 = 6.36 m
Airplane = ^ = ^ = 21-2 >10 and not more than 23

beam 250x700

The column is classified as slender column in the direction considered, and additional
moment is induced.

* = ^ = 2 1 ^ 3 0 = 0 .0 6 7
2000 2000

= P„ x S =500X0.067= 33.5kN m

t o t a l / o a t o f p la n e )
= M U+ M add

plane) = 0 + 33-5 = 3 3 .5 ^ .m X (out-of-plan direction)

.\M y=33.5 KN.m

M u=?0

M add(y)= 3 3 .5

400
Step No.3: Design of the reinforcement:
The column is subjected to the following straining actions(compression force+ biaxial
bending)
Pu= 500 kN
M*= 322.5 kN.m
My=33.5 kN.m
Detennine the load level Rb as follows:

_A _ = ^ 0 0 x l 0 0 ^ = 0111
f m.b.a 25x300x600
Since Rb<0.2—> p = 0.80
Assume that the concrete cover = 40 mm
a' = 600-40 = 560 mm
b'=300 —40 = 2 6 0 m m __________

Since Mx l a ' = (322.5 / 560) > My /b' = {33.5 / 260), the design moment will be taken about x.
Using equation 7.57 in this text gives the uniaxial magnified moment.

M ’x =MX + P i ^ ) M y

= 322.5 + 0.8 x (— ) x 33.5 = 380.2 kN m

260

Y Y
Mx'=380.2
Mx=322.5

" t"
■X
Equation 7.57

My=33.5
Biaxial Uniaxial

401
 M'x _ 380.2x10* =Q141
f cub t 2 25x300x6002

600- 2 x 40 _.09
b 600
Using uniaxial interaction diagram (uniformly distributed steel)
From the diagram with f y = 400 N /mm2, 'Q= 0.90 —*►
—>p = 8
H = 8 x 25 x 1O'4=0.02 < Umax (0.05) (external column).
As, total= M-1> t = 0.02 x 300 x 600 = 3600 mm2
H mill = 0.25 + 0.052 x 22 =1.394 % < j i ......o.k.

Choose 12 <P 20 (3770 mm2)

6 0 8/m
4 S 0 20

2<g> 20
o
o
CD

2 5^20

4 5 0 20

300

Column Reinforcement

402
Example 8 .4
Fig. Ex-8.4 shows a plan and a sectional elevation of a workshop. It is required to find
the straining actions acting on column Cl at the ground floor level knowing that it is
subjected to an axial load of a factored value of 2700 kN and an initial moment in X-Z
plane (My)of a factored value of 400 kN.m. / c„=25 N/mm2 and/y=360 N/mm2

Solution

In order to find the design moments for column C l, it is required to investigate the
effects of the slenderness ratios of the column about its principal axes. Since the
building contains no shear walls, it is classified according to the Egyptian Code as
unbraced. Accordingly, all columns are unbraced columns.

Step 1: Calculation of the ultimate deflection in the X-direction

To calculate the average ultimate deflection in the X-direction, one has to calculate the
deflection 5 for each column. The following table summarizes the calculations:

Ho He b or t 5*
Column Top Bot. k X
(m) (m) (m) (m)
Cl 1 2 1.3 8.0 10.4 0.65 16.00 0.083

C2 1 2 1.3 8.0 10.4 0.60 17.33 0.090

4.0
C3 1 2 1.3 5.2 0.5 10.40 0.027

C4 1 2 1.3 4.0 5.2 0.5 10.40 0.027

Note: Since the floor beam is thicker than the column dimension under consideration,
the top condition is considered case 1. Since the semelle is shallower than the column
dimension under consideration, the bottom condition is considered case 2. From Table
8.4 in this text, it can be determined that k=1.3.

Where
Sci = deflection at ultimate limit state for Q in the X-direction

_ xb h
2000

K - T
He = kHa
k =1.3 {From Table 8.4 of this text with end condition (2) at bottom and (1) at top}

403
 C4 300x900 C3 I 300x900 C4

C2 300x900 Cl 300x900 C2t

~ I |E
(Typ.) (Typ.)

C4 300x900 C3 300x900 C4
m
10.0 m 10.0 m
20.0 m

1 0 .0 m 1 0 .0 m
4-
20.0 m
C l = 650x650 m m
C2 = 300x600 m m Elevation
C3 = 500x500 m m
C 4 = 300x500 m m Fig. Ex-8.4

404
 Smx = - , where n = the number of columns

Scl +2xSc2+2xSe} + 4 xSc4'

0 .0 8 3 + 2 x 0 .0 9 0 + 2 x 0 .0 2 7 + 4 x 0 .0 2 7
8mx = - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - = 0 . 0 4 7 2 m

N o te t h a t n o n e o f in d iv id u a l 8 is la r g e r th a n 2 8avx(0.0944)

Step 2: Calculation of the ultimate deflections in the Y-direction

To calculate the average ultimate deflection in the Y-direction, one has to calculate the
deflection 5 for each column; the following table summarizes the calculations.

Ho He b o rt 5y
Column Top Bot. k X
(m) (m) (m) (m)
Cl 1 2 1.3 8.0 10.4 0.65 16 0.083

C2 1 1 1.2 4.0 4.8 0.3 16 0.038

C3 1 2 1.3 8.0 10.4 0.5 20.8 0.108

C4 1 1 1.2 4.0 4.8 0.3 16 0.038

T 5
8avv = -----~ , where n = the number of columns
n

Sci + 2 x Sc2 + 2 x < % . 3 + 4 x i ? d

■ 9

. 0 .0 8 3 + 2 x 0 .0 3 8 + 2 x 0 .1 0 8 + 4 x 0 .0 3 8 n A C O rt
g - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - = 0 .0 5 8 9 m
g

N o t e t h a t a l l t h e v a lu e s o f 5 a r e le s s t h a n 2 SaVy

■Step 3: Calculation of the additional moments

Additional Moments in the X-Z plane (My) = P 8avx
= 2700 x 0.0472
= 127.44 kN.m

Additional Moments in the Y-Z plane (MX) = P 8avy

= 2700 x 0.0589
= 159.03 kN.m

405
Step 4: Calculation of Final Straining Actions for Column C l
P = 2700 kN
My (X-Z plane) = 400+127.44 = 527.44 kN.m
M* (Y-Z plane) = 159.03 kN.m
It should be noted that in spite of the fact that the column was subjected to an initial
uniaxial moments, slenderness effects have resulted in the column being subjected to
biaxial moments.
Y
i
My+Madd(y)= 527.44 kN.m

Madd(x)= 159.03 kN.m

----- X

650

Straining actions for column Cl

Step 5: Design of the reinforcement:

The column is subjected to biaxial bending; determine the load level Rb as follows:
^ = _2700xl00^ = 0256
b f c„.b.a 25x650x650
From Table (7.2), using interpolation, get p = 0.772
Assume concrete cover = 40 mm,
♦
a' = 650 - 40 = 610 mm
b' = 650 - 40 = 610/wm

Since lb ' = (527.7/ 610) > la' = (159 / 610), the design moment will be taken about y.
Using equation 7.58 'of this text (Chapter 7)

M'y =My + p ^ ) M x
y * a
= 527.7 + 0.772 x (— ) x 159 = 650.50kN m
610

406
 , My'=650.5
4 \

Biaxial Uniaxial

M' 650.5 xlO6

= 0.095
f wb t 2 25x650x6502
650-2x40
=0.877
650
Using the uniaxial interaction diagram (uniformly distributed steel) f y = 360 N /mm2

£ = 0.90 -> p = 4.8

£ = 0.80 -> p = 5.8
Using interpolation —»—» p = 5.03
|j. = 5.03 x 25 x 10"4 = 0.0126 < [i max (0.04) (internal column),
total = |x b t = 0.0126 x 650 x 650 = 5313 mm2
n niin = 0.25 + 0.052 X 16 =1.082 % < (x ..... o.k.

Choose 20 <5 20 (6283 mm2)

Or 16 <D22 (6082 mm2)

20#20 16^22
6010/m 6010/m
1" V > >> ■ ■■ <3 ' ..... 4 ' i »

> ■ -• ■ i_ i . >-----1 __ i
650 650
Alternative (1) Alternative (2)
for column reinforcement for column reinforcement

407
Example 8 .5

The frame shown in Fig. Ex-8.5 is a part of the structural system of a braced structure.
It is required to find the bending moments in the exterior columns. The unfactored
dead and live loads of the exterior beam for all floors may be assumed equal to 32.0
and 12.5 kN/m, respectively. The columns may be assumed fixed to the foundations.

Solution
Table 8.5 gives the values of bending moments in the exterior column.

For the case of frames with two bays or more, the values of bending moments in the
exterior column are as follows:

Bending Moment in the lower of upper column is equal to

= ------ — ------- xM ,
K, + K U+ K b 1

and Bending Moment in the upper of lower column

K,
-xM <
Kl + K u +Kb f
where

Mf is the fixed end moment of the beam

4El
Ku is the flexural stiffiiess of upper colunrn with two fixed ends, Ku =---- -
h“
4 El,
K, is the flexural stiffness of lower column with two fixed ends, Kt
h,

. 4E h
Kb is the flexural stiffiiess of beam, K, ■
h

hu, ht the height of upper and lower column respectively

Z6 the length of beam

Ib the moment "of inertia for upper column, lower column and beam
respectively.

408
 1 21.50 m 1
6.50 8.50 6.50

Hij------- - Lj —------if---- ----1p--------

—■ ——U------- •— —.....
o
H
0.40,
CO I-
G
p - ---- —.---------—
U------—I
o
F
co 0.40,
CO
1-E
s ; ---
— -------- .0 . — rj
5}- I d ' ' “ | — ~jl
* ° Secondary^ /
0.40, beams
CO
lc
V — u —-----q|p-=— ^=u----- —
B Girder /
a
o 0.40,
I

A
JL_ . = - 4 --------- J— . i........ i ........... ,i _ i-= i-—
(250x700)

- A ll exterior columns are 300x400m m

at all floors
- A ll interior columns are 400x400m m
at all floors
- A ll girders are 250x700mm

Fig. Ex-8.5 Elevation o f an industrial building

409
410
Bending Moment a t joint B ond C

M =-------- K
---------------- M
K iAB)+ K {CD)+ K h f

M ab = ------------- 1 A2 3 XL° -------------- -x228.2 = 41.76 kN .m

AB 1.42E xlO + 1.94.E xlO +4.4£ xlO'3

M co = ------- ^ 2 2 ------- m ,
. K (AB)+K^CD)+Kb 1

M cd = - - - - - - - - - - - - - i .94E x 1 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 2 8 . 2 = 5 7 . 0 5 kN jn
CD \A2E xlO + 1.94£ xlO'3 + 4.4£ xlO"3

K.
^ Imm ~ ~ Z ~ jZ „ M f
(A B ) _,' J V (C O ) "r

4 4 F x 1 0 -3
x 2 2 8 . 2 = 1 2 9 . 4 1 & iV .m
1 .4 2 £ x 1 0 '3 + 1 .9 4 £ x 1 0 '3 + 4.4E x 1 0 ' 3

Bending Moment at joint D, E, F, and 6

=---------5l£Sl--------- M
K a.
/ v (0 > ) ^
K ( E F ) -f- *K^ b }

1.94£xl0~3
x 228.2
1.94£xl0-3 +1.94JE’x l(T 3 + 4 .4 £ x l0 -3

= 53.46 kN.m

Bending Moment at joint H

K,
K(ohi + 00 + Kh
1.94E xlO -x 228.2 = 69.8 k N m
1.94E x 10 + 0.00 + 4.4£ x 10"

411
Example 8.6

Figure Ex-8,6 shows a part of an industrial building that is braced in the two
orthogonal directions. The cross-sectional dimensions of the columns are 300 x 300
mm. Also shown in this figure is the bending moment diagram acting on columns AB
& BC in the X-Z plane. The bending moments acting on these columns in Y-Z plane
(out-of plane) can be neglected. Columns AB and BC are also subjected to axial
forces of values of 700.0 kN and 450.0 kN, respectively. It is required to find the
straining actions acting on columns AB & BC.

Solution
Step 1: Analysis of Columns in the X-Z Plane (in-plane)
Step 1.1: Check slenderness limits of the columns

a) Column AB
Clear height of the column, H0 = 6.40 m
The top end of the column is connected monolithically to beams that are at least as
deep as the overall dimension of_the column in the plane considered {Condition 1).
The bottom end of the column is connected to a semelle that is deeper than the column
(Condition 1). From Table 8.3, the effective length factor, k = 0.75
The effective height, He = kHa
He = 0.75 x 6.40 = 4.80 m

■lb = = —**—=16 >15 and not more than 30

b b 0.30
Hence, column AB is classified as a slender column in the X -Z plane

b) Column BC
Clear height of the column, H0 = 7.80 m
The top and bottom ends of the column are connected monolithically to beams that are
at least as deep as the overall dimension of the column in the plane considered
(Condition 1) for top and bottom. From Table 8.3, the effective length factor, k = 0.75.
The effective height, He = kH0
He =0.75x7.80 = 5.85m

/L = = -^^-=19.5 >15 and not more than 30

b b 0.30
Hence, column BC is classified as a slender column in the X-Z plane

412
 v Beam
i 4 250x800mm

i* t= n = i

v- 0.30
\ Beam
250x600mm Sec. 1-1

-t

B
Beam
250x800mm 14

Moments in columns
Semelles
250x700ram AB and BC (kN.m)

Fig. Ex-8.6 Elevation o f an Industrial Building

Step 1.2: Compute the Additional Moment in the X -Z plane(in-plane)
The additional moment, M adi = P.S
a) Column AB
I2 162
S = — — t = — —x 0.30 = 0.0384 m
2000 2000
= P.5 = 700 x 0.0384 = 26.88 kN.m

b) Column BC
19 52
S = ^ - x 0.30 = 0.057m
2000
M aii = />.<? = 450x 0.057= 25.65 kN.m

Step 1.3: Compute the Design Moment in the X -Z Plane (in-plane)

The design moment, M<jes is the larger of the following values:

1) M 2 2) M s + M add
3) M l +(M ndd/2) 4) P-emm
where
Mi = 0.4 AT, + Q.6M2 > 0.4M 2

a) Column AB

M ] = —60 kN.m
M 2 = \ 53 kN.m (double curvature)
M, = -0.4 x 60 + 0.6 x 153= 67.8 kN.m > 0AM1
The design moment is the larger of the following values
1) 153 kN.m 2) 67.8+26.88 = 94.68 kN.m
3) 60+(26.88/2) = 73.44 kN.m 4) 700x(0.05x0.3) = 10.5 kN.m

Accordingly the design bending moment, Mdes for column AB =153.0 kN.m
153\r----------
7
x . < - ; / . > „./
(m ,=67.^—

\AV(Madd/2=26.88/2^J)
--------------^

414
b) Column BC

My = 83 kN.m
M 2 = 111 kN.m ( s in g l e c u r v a t u r e )
M, - 0 .4 x 8 3 + 0 .6 x 111 = 9 9 .8 kN.m > 0.4M2

T h e d e s i g n m o m e n t is t h e l a r g e r o f t h e f o l lo w in g v a l u e s

1 ) 1 1 1 k N .m 2 ) 9 9 .8 + 2 5 .6 5 = 1 2 5 .4 5 k N .m

3 ) 8 3 + ( 2 5 .6 5 /2 ) = 9 5 .8 3 k N .m 4 ) 4 5 0 x ( 0 .0 5 x 0 .3 ) = 6 .7 5 k N .m

A c c o r d i n g l y t h e d e s i g n b e n d i n g m o m e n t, M dl,s f o r c o l u m n B C = 1 2 5 .4 5 k N .m

Step 2: Analysis o f Columns in the Y-Z Plane (out-of-plane)

Step 2.1: Check slenderness limits of the columns

a) C o lu m n A B
C le a r h e ig h t, H e = 6 .4 0 m
T h e t o p e n d o f t h e c o l u m n is c o n n e c t e d m o n o l i t h ic a l l y t o b e a m s t h a t a r e a t l e a s t a s
d e e p a s t h e o v e r a l l d i m e n s i o n o f t h e c o lu m n i n t h e p l a n e c o n s i d e r e d (Condition 1).
T h e b o t t o m e n d o f t h e c o l u m n is c o n n e c te d t o a s e m e l le t h a t is d e e p e r t h a n t h e c o lu m n
(Condition 1). F r o m T a b l e 8 .3 , t h e e f f e c tiv e l e n g t h f a c t o r , k = 0 .7 5
T h e e f f e c t iv e h e i g h t , He = kHa

He = 0 . 7 5 x 6 . 4 0 = 4 .8 0 m

l b = 0 s- = = 1 6 > 1 5 a n d n o t m o re th a n 3 0
b b 0 .3 0

H e n c e , c o l u m n A B is c l a s s i f i e d a s a s l e n d e r c o l u m n in t h e Y - Z p l a n e

415
I

b) Column BC
Clear height, H0 = 4.0 m
The top and bottom ends of the column are connected monolithically to beams that are
at least as deep as the overall dimension of the column in the plane considered
{Condition 1) for top and bottom. From Table 8.3, the effective length factor, k = 0.75
The effective height, He = kH0
He =0.75x4.00 = 3.00 m

The ratio Ah = - s- = -5— =10.0< 15

6 b 0.30
Hence, column BC is classified as a short column in the Y-Z plane.

Step 2.2: Compute the additional moment in the Y-Z plane

The additional moment, M add = P.8

Column AB
16^
S= x 0.30 = 0.0384m
2000

M add = P S = 700 x °-0384 = 26.88 kN.m

Step 2.3: Compute the Design Moment in the Y-Z Plane

Since the initial bending moments in the Y-Z plane were neglected, the design
moments in that plane can be considered as the larger of the following two values:

1) 2) P.emm

a) Column AB
1) 26.88 kN.m 2) 700x(0.05x0.3) = 10.5.kN.m

Accordingly the design bending moment in the Y-Z plane for column AB = 26.88
kN.m r

b) Column BC
Since the column is classified as a short column the design bending moment in Y-Z
plane is equal to zero.

416
Summary
The following table gives the design straining actions for columns AB & BC.

Axial Force Mdes (X-Z) plane Mdes (Y-Z) plane

Column
(kN) (kN.m)(Mv) (kN.m) (M.)
AB 700 153.0 26.88

BC 450 125.45 0.00

Step 3: Design of the reinforcement:

a) Column AB:
The column is subjected to biaxial bending; determine the load level Rb as follows:
P 700x1000
R =0.194
f cu.b.a 40x300x300
From Table (7.2), get p = 0.8
Assume concrete cover = 30 mm,
a' = 300—30 = 270mm
6' = 300 - 30 = 270mm
Since / a' = ( 1 53 / 270) > M , l b '=(26.9/ 270), the design moment will be taken about y.

Using 7.58 in this text (chapter 7)

M'y =My + p & ) M x

a
270
= 153 + 0.8 x (— ) x 26.9 = 174.5 KN.m
270
174.5x10
f j j t240x300x300 = 0.162

300-2x30
300
Using uniaxial interaction (uniformly distributed steel) f y = 360 N /mm2, C,= 0.80
Therefore p =12.2
(i = 12.2 x 40 x 10^*= 0.0488 < (x max (0,05) (external column).
As, total = p. b t = 0.0488 x 300 x 300 = 4392 mm2
H mm= P-25 + 0.052 x 16 =1.082 % < f i ..... o.k.
Choose 12 <t>22 ( 4562 mm2)

417
 12 0 22
5010/m
0
o
o
CO

300

Column AB

Note: Since the reinforcement ratio is high (4.8%), therefore it is advisable to increase
column dimensions to decrease reinforcement (calculations not shown).

b) Column BC•
The column is subjected to uniaxial bending; determine the following terms:
P 450x1000
- = 0.125
f cu.b.a 40x300x300
Mu 125.45 xlO6
= 0.116
f eub t 1 40x300x3002
Using uniaxial interaction (uniformly distributed steel) f y = 360 N /mm2, £ = 0.80
Therefore p = 7.5
p. = 7.5 x 40 x 1 O'4 = 0.03 < ji max (0.05) (external column).
As, total = p. b t = 0.03 x 300 x 300 = 2700 mm2 Choose 12 O 18 ( 3054 mm2)
p. min = 0.25 + 0.052 x 19.5 =1.264 % < p .....o.k.

12#18~

12018
LO
•. 1 ■ 'f CO

» fl
ft 1 fl 1

| 12022

ColumnBC

Column Lap splice

418
9 REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMES

Photo 9.1 Reinforced concrete frames at Dullas airport, USA

9.1 Introduction

This chapter covers the topic of reinforced concrete frames that are used as supporting
elements for halls. The object o f a hall is to cover a limited area that has to be utilized
for a certain purpose such as meetings, sports, storage, exhibitions and industry.

419
9.2 Definition of the Frame
A frame is a structure in which the rigid connections between the girders and the
supporting columns are utilized so that the internal forces due to the loads are resisted
by the combined action of the girder and the columns i.e. the bending moment M0 is
distributed among the girder and the columns (Fig. 9.1). In a simple girder, vertical
loads are resulted in vertical reactions (Fig. 9.1b), while in a frame; vertical loads give
vertical and horizontal reactions (Fig. 9.1a).

^ ig . 9.1 Frames versus simple girders w

f t r n i T i - T i r m - m ft f t n 11 h i i H i i: i l i t I H n j i i t i i . l i

The magnitude of the bending moments resisted by the columns depends on the
relative stiffness Kr of the girder with respect to the columns. The bigger the value of
Kr, the smaller is the moment resisted by the columns.

where
H height of the column,
L span of the girder.
h gross moment of inertia of the beam,
K gross inertia moment of of the column.

.In order to achieve a good distribution for the bending moments in frame members, it
is recommended to choose the concrete dimensions of the frame members as shown in
Fig. (9.2)

420
 t4
=4
ti
- l3

Link
member

Lii
4-|4-12
y
Member Recommended value

17(12-16)

*i (0.8-1, 0 ) tg

*2 0.67 t.

^3 0.60 tg

*4 According to design

*5 0.67 t4

^6 According to design

Fig. 9.2 Dimensioning of the Frame

421
9.3 The C h o ice of the Type of the Fram e
The choice of the form of a frame is generally governed by the external and internal
architectural considerations as well as the purpose at which it is used. The statical
system depends on the conditions at the supports.
Two hinged frames are generally used on medium soils as they are not sensitive to
displacements o f the supports. Figure (9.3) shows several types of two-hinged frames
that are extensively used in industrial buildings and workshops. Figure (9.4) shows a
two-hinged frame that supports stands.

Fig. 9.3 Examples of two hinged frames

Fig. 9.4 A two hinged frame supporting stands

422
Statically determined three-hinged frames (Fig. (9.5)) are used on weak soils that may
be subjected to small horizontal or vertical movements of the bearing hinges.

Fig. 9.5 Examples of three-hinged frames

On good firm soils, fixed frames may be used. In this system, the internal stresses due
to temperature changes and shrinkage are relatively high and must be considered.

A two-hinged frame with a tie is shown in Fig. (9.6a). Adding a tie to the frame
reduces the bending moment in the girder. In order to prevent the sagging of the tie,
hangers might be provided at convenient distances. The frame is twice statically
indeterminate and hence, the bending moments developed at different sections are less
than the case of the two-hinged frame without a tie. The rigid tie at the top of the
columns gives a better distribution of the internal forces in the columns and the girder
although this does not necessarily more economic solution because of the complicated
formwork and the big amount of steel in the tie and the hangers. It gives however a
smaller horizontal thrust on the foundations. A frame without a tie is simpler and
architecturally more acceptable than a frame with a tie and hangers. If the foundations
of a frame cannot resist its horizontal thrust, a tie may be arranged at the bottom
hinges to resist the thrust as shown in Fig. (9.6b). In this case, the frame is once
statically indeterminate. For elastic ties at foundation level, the horizontal force
developed at the foundation level is smaller than that of two hinged frames without
ties or with rigid ties. The result is that the comer moment is smaller and the field
moment is bigger.

(a) (b)

Fig. 9.6 Examples of two-hinged frames with a tie

Continuous frames can be used to cover areas in which the dimensions are too long to
be spanned by single-bay frames (see Fig. (9.7)). Continuous frames are generally
high grade statically indeterminate. If the frame is symmetrical in shape and loading,
as generally the case in roof structures, the horizontal reaction at the intermediate
column will be almost zero. In such a case, the frame may be constructed with a
slender intermediate column, which can be assumed as a pendulum. The system in this
form is only twice statically indeterminate.

Fig. 9.7 Continuous frames

424
 F i g . 9 .7 C o n t i n u o u s F r a m e s ( C o n t i n u e d )

9.4 Layout of a Half Supported by R/C Frames

In b ig c o v e re d h a lls , re in fo rc e d c o n c re te fra m e s a r e u s u a lly u s e d a s th e m a in
s u p p o r t i n g e l e m e n t . I n o r d e r to g e t r e l a t i v e l y r e a s o n a b le d i m e n s i o n s o f t h e f r a m e s , t h e
s p a c i n g b e t w e e n f r a m e s s h o u l d b e i n th e r a n g e o f 5 .0 m s t o 7 .0 m s .

F i g u r e ( 9 .8 ) s h o w s t h e l a y o u t o f th e s u p p o r t i n g e l e m e n t s o f a h a l l t h a t is 1 8 .0 m s w id e ,
2 0 .0 m s l o n g a n d 5 .0 m s c l e a r h e ig h t.

T h e m a in s u p p o r tin g e le m e n t c a n b e c h o s e n a s a re c ta n g u la r fra m e . T h e fra m e a re

c h o s e n t o s p a n i n t h e s h o r t d i r e c t i o n ( 1 8 .0 m s ) a r r a n g e d e v e r y 5 .0 m s .
C o n t i n u o u s s e c o n d a r y b e a m s s u p p o r t e d o n t h e f r a m e s a r e u s e d in t h e r o o f o f t h e h a l l
in o r d e r t o g e t r e a s o n a b le s la b t h ic k n e s s .

I n o r d e r t o g e t r e a s o n a b le w a l l a r e a ( 1 5 - 2 5 m 2) , w a l l b e a m s a r e u s u a l l y p r o v i d e d a t th e
s id e s o f t h e h a lls .

I n c a s e o f a w e a k s o i l, s e m e lle s a r e p r o v i d e d a t t h e f o u n d a ti o n l e v e l i n o r d e r to
c o n n e c t t h e f o o t in g s t o g e t h e r t o r e d u c e t h e e f f e c t o f d i f f e r e n t i a l s e ttl e m e n t. O t h e r w is e ,
th e y c o u ld b e p r o v id e d a t th e b o tto m e n d o f th e fra m e le g to s u p p o rt th e w a ll a b o v e .
I t s h o u l d b e m e n t i o n e d t h a t f r a m e s a r e r i g i d i n t h e i r o w n p l a n e a n d a r e v e r y f l e x i b le in
t h e o u t - o f - p l a n e d i r e c t io n . H e n c e , i t is e s s e n t ia l t o p r o v i d e b e a m s t h a t c o n n e c t t h e
f r a m e s p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o t h e i r p la n e . I n m a n y c a s e s , th e s e b e a m s a r e a l r e a d y e x i s te n t
th ro u g h th e p ro v is io n o f w a ll a n d r o o f b e a m s .

425
 3^

F ram e

300x130(

A
B I i
Seroelle 250x500/
6x3.0=18.0 m R7C footing

P/C footing
§

Sec. A —A

Figure 9.8 Layout o f a Hall

426
9.5 R e in fo rce m e n t D etailing o f Rigid Fra m e s

T h e a r t o f d e t a i l i n g o f r e i n f o r c e m e n t in r i g id f r a m e s s h o u l d f o l lo w t h e g e n e r a l r u le s o f
m e c h a n i c s o f r e i n f o r c e d c o n c r e t e a s a c o m p o s it e m a t e r ia l. I t s h o u l d a ls o b e s i m p le a n d
p r a c t i c a l . F i g u r e 9 .9 s h o w s s o m e t y p i c a l d e t a il s . O t h e r r e i n f o r c e m e n t d e t a il s c o u l d
a ls o b e a c c e p te d .

1- D e ta il- 1 s h o w s a f r a m e j o i n t t h a t d o e s n o t r e s i s t m o m e n t ( a j o i n t b e t w e e n a l i n k
m e m b e r a n d a fra m e g ird e r)

2 - D e t a i l - 2 s h o w s a f r a m e j o i n t t h a t d o e s r e s i s t m o m e n t . T h e c o l u m n is a l i n k m e m b e r
a n d t h e f r a m e g i r d e r h a s a c a n t i l e v e r p a r t.

3 - D e t a i l - 3 s h o w s a f r a m e j o i n t d e s ig n e d to r e s i s t th e m o m e n t s t h a t d e v e l o p e d d u e to
th e r i g id c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n t h e g i r d e r a n d t h e c o l u m n . T h e m o m e n t s a p p li e d t o t h e
j o i n t p r o d u c e s w h a t is s o c a l l e d “ c l o s in g j o i n t ” . T h e h o g g i n g m o m e n ts o f t h e g i r d e r
a r e r e s i s t e d b y t h e t e n s i o n c o l u m n r e i n f o r c e m e n ts . I t s h o u l d b e n o t e d t h a t t h e t e n s ile
f o r c e s i n t h e r e i n f o r c e m e n t s r e s u l t s in a f o r c e F = T 4 2 , t h a t p r o d u c e s s p l i t t i n g te n s il e
s tre s s e s . D ia g o n a l r e in fo r c e m e n t ( As = T / { f y / / , ) ) m i g h t b e p r o v i d e d to p a r t i c i p a t e i n
r e s i s t in g t h e s p l i t t i n g t e n s i l e s tr e s s e s .

4 - D e t a i l - 4 s h o w s a f r a m e d e s i g n e d t o r e s i s t t h e m o m e n t s t h a t d e v e l o p e d d u e to t h e
r ig id c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n t h e g i r d e r a n d th e c o l u m n . T h e m o m e n t s a p p l i e d t o t h e j o i n t
p ro d u c e s w h a t is so c a lle d “ o p e n in g jo in t” . It c a n b e s e e n th a t th e r e in fo r c e m e n t o f th e
c o lu m n has no t been u se d to re in fo rc e g ir d e r . I f th e te n s io n r e i n f o r c e m e n t is
c o n t i n u o u s o v e r t h e s h a r p c o m e r , f a il u r e o f th e c o v e r w i l l t a k e p l a c e d u e t o t h e a c t i o n
o f th e r e s u lta n t fo rc e F .

5 - D e t a i l - 5 , D e t a i l - 6 a n d D e t a i l - 7 s h o w r e i n f o r c e m e n t d e t a i l i n g o f r i g i d c o n n e c t i o n s in
f r a m e s in w h i c h t h e g i r d e r s h a v e c a n t i l e v e r p a r ts .

6 - D e t a i l - 8 s h o w s t h e d e t a i l i n g o f a d o u b le c a n t i l e v e r f r o m t h e f r a m e le g .

7 - D e ta il-9 s h o w s a b r o k e n p a r t o f a g ir d e r o f a fra m e c r e a tin g a n “ o p e n in g jo i n t” . T h e

b o t t o m r e i n f o r c e m e n t o f t h e f r a m e g i r d e r h a s t o b e d i s c o n t i n u e d a t t h e b r o k e n p a r t in
o r d e r t o p r e v e n t c o v e r s a p llin g .

8 - D e ta il-1 0 s h o w s a b r o k e n p a r t o f a g ir d e r o f a fra m e c r e a tin g a “ c lo s in g jo in t” . T h e

b o t t o m r e i n f o r c e m e n t h a s n o t b e e n d is c o n t i n u e d a t t h e b r o k e n p a r t s i n c e t h e r e s u l t a n t
o f t h e t e n s i o n f o r c e is in w a r d a n d h a s n o t a f f e c t t h e c o v e r .

Figure 9.10 shows a typical reinforcem ent detailing o f a frame.

427
Fig. 9.9 Detailing o f Fram e Joints (Detail-1)

Fig. 9.9 D etailing o f Frame Joints (Detail-2)

428
429
 A A .

Fig. 9.9 Detailing o f Frame Joints (Detail-6)

430
Fig. 9.9 Detailing of Frame Joints (Detail-7)
Fig. 9.9 Detailing o f Frame Joints (Detail-9)
 2 1 5 jg 1 0 /m

4018

4025
6025

3025
'•

h
1500

... - •>

K
CM CM
S &
S e ctio n (1-1)

. 400 .

Se ctio n (2-2) Se ctio n (3-3)

Fig. 9.10 Typical reinforcement detailing of a frame

433
9.6 Hinged Bearings

The most commonly used type in concrete structures is the lead plate hinge. The
design of this type is explained as follows.

In this type of hinges, the normal component of the hinge is transmitted to the
foundation by bearing through 20 mm thick lead plate arranged at the middle of the
column foot. The horizontal component H is resisted by shear resistance of the
connecting bars As that are protected from rusting by 20 mm thick bituminous
material as shown in Fig. 9.11.

20 mm Load
plate
if
t

Fig. 9.11 Details of Lead hinge

In order to have acceptable hinge action, the length of the lead plate t' must be smaller
than or equal to one third of the depth of the column at the position of the hinge
measured in the direction o f the required rotation.

The lead hinge can accordingly be calculated in the following manner:

 bt yc Vb x t

N
r < fb ~ 0-67_ ■L . I L
b t' 0 rc *{'
The area of the steel dowels As is given by

H
A. = • (9.3)
o - t y y / r ,)

The normal compressive stresses are transferred from the breadth of the column t to
the breadth of the lead plate i in a height h approximately equal to the breadth t of the
column. Therefore, a splitting tensile force is developed along this length. The
transverse splitting force Fsp is approximately equal to one forth of the vertical force
A /74
(N/4). This force must be resisted by horizontal stirrups of area A„ - arranged
fy/r.
at the end of the column in a height h=t. Fig. 9.12 shows the graphical representation
of finite element model of the hinged base. Far from the lead plate the stress
distribution can be considered uniform. Stress concentration can be easily noticed at
the connection between the frame leg and the lead plate

C o m p r e s s iv e
stre ss

C o lu m n e n d

c o n c e n t r a tio n

\ L e a d p la t e

Fig. 9.12 Finite element model for the hinged base

435
Example 9.1
It is required to design the frame shown in the Figure below and Fig. EX9.1. The
ultimate load including dead and live loads is 100 kN/m'. The horizontal reaction at
the base equals = 293.7 kN ./c„= 25 N/mm2 and f y=360 N/mm2.
Frame spacing =5.0 m
Slab thickness ts=120 mm
The frame may be considered unbraced in its plane and braced in the out of plane
direction.

wu=100 kN/m'

6.0 m I 7,5 m I 6.0 m

Fig. EX 9.1

436
m

Plan

Section A-A

Fig. Ex.-9.1

437
Solution
Step 1: Calculations of the reactions
The sloped length of the frame L' equals

L' = V6.02 +2.52 =6.5 m

wu=100 kN/m'

Since the frame is symmetrical in loading and in geometry, the vertical reaction equals

w 100
Ya = Yb = -^-x(2 xL ' + 7.5) = x (2x 6.5 + 7.5) = 1025 kN

438
Step 2: Calculations of Normal, Shear, and Bending Moment
The calculation of shear and normal force for the sloped elements can be obtained
using the following formula
9 = tan"1 | ^ j = 2 2 .6°

N = H, xcos(0)+Vi xsm(0) (normal force)

Q = Vj x c o s ( 0 ) - H i xsin(0) (shear force)

Positive direction is given in the figure below

1025

F, = Y a = 1025 kN

F2 =Ko -w „ x L ' = 1025-100x6.5 = 375 kN

H ,= H 1=Ha = 293.1 kN

section H V N Q

1 293.7 1025.0 665.3 833.2

2 293.7 375.0 415.3 233.2

The normal, shear and bending moment are shown in the following figures.

439
233.2 375

shear force diagram

normal force diagram

bending moment diagram

440
Step 3: Flexural design of critical section
B e c a u s e o f f r a m e s y m m e tr y , o n l y f iv e s e c t io n s n e e d to b e d e s i g n e d a s s h o w n .

Step 3.1: Design of Section 1 (400x1400)

A ssu m e t = -^m - — ^ ^ — = 1.21—> 1 .6 2 5m

8 12 —» 1 6 1 2 -> 1 6

T ake tg= \ A m = 1 4 0 0 m m
S e c t i o n 1 is s u b j e c t e d t o t h e f o l lo w in g s t r a i n i n g a c tio n s :

M u= 2 1 1 3 .3 k N .m

P u= 2 9 3 .7 k N (compression)

I t a c t s a s a T - s e c t i o n a n d t h e w i d th B is ta k e n a s :

16 ts +b 1 6 x 1 2 0 + 4 0 0 = 2 3 2 0 mm
0 .7 xL 0 .7 x 1 9 5 0 0
B smaller o f - +b= - + 4 0 0 = 3 1 3 0 mm
5 5
CL CL 5 0 0 0 mm

B = 2320 m m

A s s u m i n g t h a t t h e d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e c . g o f t h e s te e l t o t h e c o n c r e t e s u r f a c e is 8 0 m m ,
t h e e f f e c t iv e d e p t h e q u a ls

d = t- S 0 m m = 1 4 0 0 —8 0 = 1 3 2 0 mm

I f P u/ f cu b t is le s s t h a n 0 .0 4 , t h e n o r m a l f o r c e c a n b e n e g l e c t e d

Pu 2 9 3 .7 x 1 0 0 0
= 0 .0 2 1 < 0 . 0 4 ............ n e g l e c t n o r m a l f o r c e
f^ xbxt 25x400x1400

T h e d e s i g n w i l l b e c a r r ie d o u t a s i f th e s e c t io n is s u b j e c t e d t o m o m e n t o n ly .
A s s u m i n g t h a t t h e n e u t r a l a x i s is w i t h i n t h e f l a n g e a n d u s i n g C - J c u r v e g iv e s

441
 4
fe u X B

1320= c i _ C1=691
25x2320
The point is outside the curve(Cl>4.8), thus use c/d)min=0.125
a = 0.8xcmin =0.1xo? =0.10x1320 = 132 mm
Since a(132 mm)>ts(120 mm), our assumption is not valid, because the neutral axis is
outside the flange. According to clause 4.2.1.2.f of the ECP 203, one can neglect the
compression force in the web and assume that a=ts. Accordingly, As equals

Mu 2113.3xl06
f n . l 5 x ( d - t s /2) 360/1.15x (1320-120/2)

°- 25j R -b d = °'225^ x400x 1320 = 1650 mm2 J < A, o.k

=smaller o f fy 360
1.3A, =1.3x5357 = 6965 mm2

Use 12025 (5890 mm2) & use 4<l>18 (about 17% of As) as stirrups hangers

Step 3.2: Design of Section 2 (400x1400)

Section 2 is a rectangular section with the following straining actions:
Mu= 2055.6 fcN.m
Pu= 665.3 kN (compression)
If Pu/fcu b t is less than 0.04, the normal force can be neglected
P, 665.3x1000
= 0.047 > 0.04 ■......... normal force cannot be neglected
fat * b x t 25x400x1400
Section 2 is located in the girder of the frame. Hence, it is recommended to limit the
amount of the compression steel (if needed) to 40% that of the tension steel. Mus
approach for the design of this type of sections can be utilized1 if tension failure
occurs. Assuming that tension failure occurs ( P u < P Ub ) -
M = Mu + P„ (—- cover) = 2055.6 + 665.3 x [ 1122 _ 80 jx —^— = 2468 kN.m
"■ “ 2 ^ 2 ) 1000

i1Alternatively,
ah, <4 i es =e+— f cover=--------+------0.05
2055.6 1.4 = 3.71w
2 665.3 2
= P„ xe, = 665.3x3.71 = 2468 kN.m

442
 2468, Iff U 16
fmb d2 25 x 4 0 0 x 1 3 2 0 2

d ' / d = 8 0 /1 3 2 0 = 0 .0 6
S i n c e n o c u r v e s a r e a v a i l a b l e f o r d '/ d = 0 .0 6 , o n e c a n u s e d e s i g n c u r v e s o r ta b l e s w i th

d '/ d = 0 .1 ( c o n s e r v a t i v e ) . F r o m t h e c u r v e , i t is c l e a r t h a t t h e u l t i m a t e c a p a c i t y o f t h e

s e c t i o n f o r <x=0 is e x c e e d e d , th u s a = 0 . 2 is u s e d .
F r o m t h e c u r v e , to = 0 .1 8 5

A' = a to b x d = 0 .2 x 0 .1 8 5 x — x 4 0 0 x 1320 = 1357 mm2

fy 360

co=0.185

Check failure condition

690 d = — — — 1320 = 8 6 7 .4 2 mm
b 690 + / / 690 + 360

A p p ly in g th e e q u ilib riu m e q u a tio n

n 0 .6 7 x f cu b (0 .8 c„) , A [ x f y As x f y
**i«A— _ "r"
1.5 1.15 1.15

p 0-6 7 x 2 5 x 4 0 0 ( 0 .8 x 8 6 7 .4 2 ) | 1 3 5 7 x 3 6 0 4658x360
“ 1.5 + 1.15 1.15

Pub = 2 0 6 6 2 5 5 N = 2 0 6 6 .2 kN > P„ ( t e n s i o n f a i lu r e a s a s s u m e d )

F o r p ra c tic a l c o n s id e ra tio n s , th e re in fo rc e m e n t fo r s e c tio n 2 s h o u ld b e e q u a l to th a t o f

s e c tio n 3 . T h u s

U s e 1 2 0 2 5 ( 5 8 9 0 m m 2) T op
U s e 4<t>25 ( 1 9 6 3 m m 2) B o tto m

443
Step 3.3: Design of Section 3 (400x1200)
tx= 0.8tg =0.8xl.4 = 1.2 m
t2 = 0.671, = 0.67 x 1.2 = 0.80 m
The column is subjected to the following forces
Mu= 2055.6 kN.m
Pu=1025 kN (compression)
The frame column has a variable cross section, for buckling calculations; an average
column width at 2/3 h is used.

Buckling analysis in the out-of-plane direction

From Fig EX9.1, H0 = 3.25 m (from the foundation level to the wall beam)
Since this direction is braced, the effective length factor k can be obtained from Table
8.3 with case 1 at top and case 1 at bottom (the semelle is larger than the column
dimension). Thus, k?=0.75.

H„ =k xH„ =0.75x3.25 = 2.44 m

H 244
X = -j*- = = 6.1 < 15 (case of braced columns)
Thus, no additional moments are induced in the out-of-plane direction

444
Buckling analysis in the in-plane direction
• T h e f r a m e c o l u m n is u n b r a c e d a n d t h e h e i g h t o f t h e c o l u m n is m e a s u r e d
f r o m t h e b o t t o m o f th e f r a m e g i r d e r to t h e b a s e ( H 0) a n d is e q u a l to
H0 = h s l . 0 m
• T h e e f f e c t iv e l e n g t h f a c t o r k c a n b e o b ta i n e d f r o m T a b l e 8 .4 . T h e to p p a r t o f
t h e c o l u m n is c o n s i d e r e d c a s e l a n d th e b o t t o m p a r t is c o n s i d e r e d c a s e 3
( i s o l a t e d f o o t in g w it h n o s e m e i le ) . T h u s k = 1 .6 a n d t h e e f f e c t iv e l e n g th He
e q u a ls

Hc = k x H p = 1 . 6 x 7 . 0 = 11.2 m
T h e s le n d e rn e s s ra tio X is c a l c u l a t e d u s i n g t h e a v e r a g e c o l u m n t h i c k n e s s n o t t h e a c t u a l
s e c tio n w id th , th u s X e q u a ls

He 1 1 .2 0
X =10.50
1-067

S in c e X is g r e a t e r t h a n 1 0 , t h e c o l u m n is c o n s i d e r e d l o n g a n d a d d i t i o n a l m o m e n t
c a l c u l a t i o n is r e q u i r e d .

1 0 .5 0 2 x 1.067
= 0 .0 5 8 8 m
2000 2000

emm = 0 . 0 5 x t mg = 0 .0 5 x 1 .0 6 7 = 0 .0 5 3 m < 5

Thus th e la te ra l d e f le c t i o n due to b u c k lin g is la rg e r th a n th e code m in i m u m

e c c e n tr ic ity . T h e c o l u m n is s u b je c te d t o a n a x ia l f o r c e o f P „ = 1 0 2 5 k N a n d th e
a d d i t i o n a l m o m e n t e q u a ls

M aU = Pu x 5 = 1025 x 0 .0 5 8 8 = 6 0 .2 5 kN.m

+ M ,, = 2 0 5 5 .6 + 6 0 .2 5 = 2 1 1 5 .8 5 kN.m

2 0 5 5 .6 6 0 .2 5 2 1 1 5 .8 5

O rig in a l m o m e n t (M „) A d d itio n a l m o m e n t (M add) T o ta l m o m e n t

445
It is recommended to use compression steel in frame column not less than 40% of the
tension steel to allow for moment reversal initiated by lateral loads such as wind or
earthquake. Columns in frames is preferred to be designed using the interaction
diagram with compression steel ratio (a=0.4—>0.80) depend on the magnitude of the
moment. It should be noted that the actual member thickness of 1200 mm is used in
the design.

P„ _ 1025x1000 0Qg;
faX -bxt 25x400x1200

... -g— - = = Q.147

f Cu x b x t 25x400x1200

The factor C, equals

_ t-2 x c a v e r 1200-2x80
r --------------------------------- = 0.867
t 1200
Using interaction diagram with f y=360 N/mm2, a=0.4
At £=0.8 p=5.1
At C=0.9 p=4.6
Using interpolation for ^=0.867 gives p=4.8
p p x / a XlO-4 = 4.8x25x1c4 =0.012

As = ftx b x t = 0.012x400x1200 = 5760mm1 (12<£25, 5890mm2)

A's = a-A s = 0.4 x 5760 = 2304 mm2 (6<D22, 2280 mm2)

AUo,„i = Al + = 5760 + 2304 = 8064 mm1

Since the column is long the minimum reinforcement ratio is
= 0.25 + 0.052 A. = 0.52 + 0.052 x 10.5 = 0.8%
Asmk =0.00Sxbxt = 0.008x400x1200 = 3840 mm2 < ASM......o.k

Step 3.4: Design of Section 4 (400x800)

This section is subjected to pure compression (P„~ 1025kN). From the detailing of the
frame the section will be reinforced with 6i>25 and 6<t>22
Asc = 6 x 491 + 6 x 380 = 5226 mm2

A., i nn x b x t = iAn x 400x 800 = 1920 mm2<AS

xC....... o.k

446
Pu= 0.35x fmxAc+0.67 xfyxAsc
Pu = --------( 0 .3 5 x 2 5 x ( 4 0 0 x 8 0 0 ) + 0 . 6 7 x 3 6 0 x 5 2 2 6 ) = 4 0 6 0 k N > ( 1 0 2 5 )...... .ok
1000

A s= 6 0 2 5 A 's= 6 0 2 2

4<D12
800 mm

Step 3.5: Design o f Section 5 (400x1400)

S e c t i o n 5 is s u b j e c t e d t o t h e f o l lo w in g s t r a i n in g a c ti o n s
M „ = 1 4 1 0 .2 k N .m

P „ = 4 1 5 .3 k N (compression)

Pu 4 1 5 .3 x 1 0 0 0
------- a— = ----------------------- = 0 .0 2 9 6 < 0 . 0 4 ............. n e g l e c t n o r m a l f o r c e
f cu xb xt 2 5 x 4 0 0 x 1 4 0 0

F r o m s e c t i o n 1—>—> B = 2 3 2 0 m m

C l = 8 .4 6
T h e p o i n t is o u t s i d e t h e c u r v e , t h u s c /d )n ,in= 0 .1 2 5

a - 0 . 8 x c min = 0 . 1 x r f = 0 .1 0 x 1 3 2 0 = 132 mm
S in c e a (1 3 2 m m H (120 mm), o u r a s s u m p ti o n is not v a li d , b e c a u s e t h e n e u t r a l a x is is
o u ts id e th e fla n g e .

M u_________ 1 4 1 0 .2 x l0 6
A = 35 7 5 mm
f y / l . 1 5 x(d - t s / 2 ) 3 6 0 /1 .1 5 x ( 1 3 2 0 -1 2 0 /2 )

U s e 8 0 2 5 ( 3 9 2 7 m m 2) & u s e 4 0 1 8 a s s t ir r u p s h a n g e r s

447
Step 4: Design for Shear
Ideally, the critical section for shear should be taken at distance of d/2 from the
column leg. However for simplicity the value of the maximum shear from the shear
force diagram is used.
Qu=833.2 kN
Q„ 833.2x1000 f 2
q„ = — — = -------------- = 1.58 N/mm
bxd 400x1320
The applied shear qu should be less than the maximum shear stress qUjmax

9*.™ = 0 - 7 ^ = 0 . 7 0 ^ | = 2.85 N / mm2... >qu(1.58)...ok

The presence of the compression force increases the concrete shear capacity of the
section by the factor 8C, where

Sc = 1+ 0.07x-5, = i + 0.07X -6--3x1000 = 1.083 < 1.5.....o.k

Ac 400x1400

<j = Sc xO .2 4 /^- = 1.083x0.24J — =1.06 N /mm2

V Yc V1.5
Since qu > qcu, the frame has to be provided with special reinforcement for shear..

- — = 1.58-— = 1.047 N/mm2

Hsu 2 2
Assume that steel yield strength of the stirrups is 280 N/mm2. Since the frame girder
equals 400 mm, the code requires four branches of stirrups. Try 10 mm (78.5 mm2)
Aa =4x78.5 = 314 mm2

The required stirrup spacing can be obtained using code equation (4-22)

s x QSu x b - A. x
1.15
non
j x 1.047 x 400 = 314 x ——
1.15
t
s=182 mm, rounding to the lesser integer number —>—>s=150 mm

4,min = x bxs = x 4 0 0 x 15 0 = 85 mm2 < A„ ( 3 14)...ol

Jy
Use (j>10@ 150 mm in the inclined part of the girder and <j>10@ 200 mm elsewhere.
Note: use 10 <j)10 at the foundation level.

448
 a)
E
co
CD
JZ
O)
c
‘35
a>
a
■*->
c
a>
£
<
OD
£c
*a>
a:

449
Example 9.2

The frame shown in the Figure below and Fig Ex. 9.2 is to be designed for a new
factory in the Six of October City. The ultimate load including dead and live loads is
75 kN/m'. The horizontal reaction at the base equals = 127.56 kN. f cu= 30 N/mm2 and
f y= 360 N/mm2.
Frame spacing =5.0 m.
Slab thickness =120 mm, bg~ 350 mm, /g=1200 mm.
The frame may be considered unbraced in its plane and braced in the out of plane
direction

w„= 75 kN/m '(H P)

r r i.t.~ r m i t .t .y t j t t i .r r n

Fig. EX 9.2

450
 a
o
*^3
o

Uh
(N
£ OS
o
06
d
bb
E

451
Solution
Step 1: Calculations of the reactions
The vertical reaction equals wu-75 kN/m '(H.P)

Ya =Yb = y x (1 8 + 2x3.5) =937.5 W

i rn r h t r i i i i i i h t~rm

Step 2: Calculations of normal, shear, and bending moments

The calculation of shear and normal force for the sloped elements can be obtained
using the following formula

N =HI x c o s x s i n ( < ? ) (normal force)

Q =Vl xcos(6) +H i xsin(<9) (shear force)

where 0 = tan'1 \ — -\ = 16.7° , Positive direction is given in the figure below

a A

section H V N : Q
1 0.0 -262.5 75.4 -251.4
2 127.56 675.0 -71.8 683.2
3 127.56 0.0 122.2 36.7
4 127.56 -675.0 316.1 -609.9
The normal, shear tod bending moment are shown in the following figures.

452
683.2

1824.3

453
Step 3: Flexural design of the critical section
Seven sections need to be designed as follows

Step 3.1: Design of section 1 (350x1200)

The girder section is given as 350x1200 mm.
Section 1 is a rectangular section and is subjected to the following straining actions
Mu= 1557.6 kN.m
Pu= 0 kN
Assuming 70 mm concrete cover to the e.g. of the reinforcement
d = t —70mm = 1200 - 70 = 1130 mm
To use the R-co, calculate R
Mu 1557.6xl06
R=- = 0.116
fa x b x d 2 30x350xll302

From the chart with R=0.116, the reinforcement index <y=0.158

f 30
A. = c o x ^ - x b x d = 0A5Sx— x 350x1130 = 5207 mm2
fy 360

°-225'J f I b d = 0^225^ 0 ^ 3S()x n 3 0 = 1 3 5 4 ww 2 -j < A Q_k

4m,-„ =smaller of fy 360
1.3A. =1.3x5207 = 6769 mm2

Use 12<J>25 (5890 mm ) & 6C>16 (about 20% of As) as secondary steel

454
Step 3.2: Design of section 2 (350x1200)
S e c t i o n 2 is a T - s e c t i o n a n d is s u b j e c te d t o t h e f o l lo w in g s t r a i n i n g a c t io n s

M u= 1 5 5 7 .6 k N . m
P u= 1 2 2 .2 k N ( c o m p r e s s i o n )

T h e e f f e c t iv e w i d t h B is t a k e n a s

16 ts +b 1 6 x 1 2 0 + 3 5 0 = 2 2 7 0 mm
0 .7 xL 0 .7 x 1 8 0 0 0
B smaller o f —> +b = - + 3 5 0 = 2 8 7 0 mm
5 5
CL - » CL 5 0 0 0 mm

B = 2270 m m

I f P u/ f cu b t is l e s s t h a n 0 .0 4 , t h e n o r m a l f o r c e c a n b e n e g le c te d

- x — — - = 0.0097 < 0 . 0 4 ............ n e g l e c t n o r m a l f o r c e

fxbxt 3 a0 xv. 3 5 0 xv ,1i 2o 0n r0v

T h e d e s i g n w i l l b e c a r r ie d o u t a s i f t h e s e c ti o n is s u b j e c t e d t o m o m e n t o n ly .
A s s u m i n g t h a t t h e n e u t r a l a x i s is w it h in t h e f l a n g e a n d u s i n g C - J c u r v e g iv e s

C l ^ / , f X : = l l 3 0 / J 1 5 5 7 -6 - 10- = 7 .4 7
\ f mxB V 30x2270

T h e p o i n t is o u t s i d e t h e c u r v e , t h u s c /d ) mj„ = 0 .1 2 5 a n d j = 0 .8 2 5
a = 0 . 8 x c = 0 .1 x r f = 0 .1 x 1 1 3 0 = 1 1 3 ,

S in c e a ( l 13 m m ) < t s( 7 2 0 m m ), o u r a s s u m p t io n is v a lid .

1 5 5 7 .6 x 1 0 s
= 46 4 1 mm1
/ x j x d . 3 6 0 x 0 .8 2 5 x 1 1 3 0

^—2—'^ S—b d = O'-2 2 -- # . x 3 S O x 1130 = 1354 mm 2 J < A S ok

= smaller o f fy 36 0
l.3 A s = 1 .3 x 4 6 4 1 = 6 0 3 3 m m 2

U s e 10< 625 ( 4 9 0 9 m m 2) ( a c tu a l d e t a i l i n g = 1 2 0 2 5 )

Step 3.3: Design o f section 3 (350x1200)

S e c t i o n 3 is a r e c t a n g u l a r s e c ti o n w i t h th e f o l lo w i n g s t r a i n i n g a c t io n s
M u= 1 8 2 4 .3 k N . m
P u= 7 1 .8 k N (te n s io n )
S i n c e t h e n o r m a l f o r c e i s te n s io n , i t c a n n o t b e n e g le c te d . M us a p p r o a c h is u s e d to
c a lc u la te th e a r e a o f s te e l

455
M = M + P U (--c o v e r ) = 1824.3 + ( - 7 1 . 8 ) 'x f i ^ ^ —70 | x —-— = 1786 kN.m
“ v2 V 2 J 1000

. t b 0 .133
f cub d 2 30x350 x ll302
The resulting R l is greater than the singly reinforced section (a=0). Thus use simple
bending curves with compression steel (a=0.2) and d'/d = 0.1

ra = 0.174

A, = o jL -b x d + - = 0.174x — 350x 1130 + —- X- ° — = 5964mm2

fy f s >r, 360 360/1.15
f ^0
A' —a e o ^ - b x d = 0.2 x 0.174 x - — x 350 x 1130 = 1147 mm2
fy 360
Use 14<D25 (6872 mm2) Top
Use 4025 (1963 mm2) Bottom

Step 3.4: Design of section 4 (350x900)

Because section 4 has an inverted slab and is subjected to negative bending, it is
designed as T-section as shown in figure
Mu= 459.4 kN.m
P„=75.4 kN (compression)
The effective width B is taken as

456
 [16ts +b [16x120 + 350 = 2270 mm

\
B smaller o f —> •! CL —> CL = 15000 mm

13= 2270 mm
c/= /-co v e r = 900—50 = 850 mm
If Pu/fcubt is less than 0.04, the normal force can be neglected

— ---- = 75^4x1000 _ q qq7 9 q.04.......... neglect normal force

f a xbxt 30x350x900
The design will be carried out as if the section is subjected to moment only.
Assuming that the neutral axis is within the flange and using C-J curve gives

The point is outside the curve, thus c /d ^ ^ O .llS and j=0.825

a = 0.8xc = 0.8x0.125x850 = 85 mm
Since a(85 mm)<ts(720 mm), our assumption is valid
Mu 459.4x10'
As = -------- 2----- = ----- — -------- ------ = 1819 mm
fyxjxd 360 x 0.825 x 850

0.225 bd = 0-225 n5o

x350x850 = 1018 mm2 J < A S o.k
Asmn= smaller o f \ fy 360
1.3A, =1.3x1819 = 2365 mm

Use 4<J>25 (1963 mm2) (Actual detailing 6<t>25)

Step 3.5: Design of section 5 (350x1200)

t t —0.8tg - > t g = l.2 m
/2- 0 . 6 7 —>0.75/, = 0.90m
The column has a variable cross section starting from 900 mm at the footing and 1200
mm at the top. The column is subjected to the following forces
Mu= 1364.9 kN.m
Pu=937.5 kN
For buckling calculations; an average column width measured at 2/3h is used.
tmg = /2+ | ( / , - / 2) = 900+|(1200-900) = 1100 mm

457
Buckling analysis in the out-of- plane direction
From Fig EX9.2 H0 = 4.8 m (from the foundation level to the wall beam)
Since this direction is braced, the effective length factor k can be obtained from Table
8.3 with case 1 top and case 1 at bottom (the semelle is larger than the column
dimension). Thus, k=0.75.
He =k =0.75x5.3 = 3.975 m

X = — = -3'—- = 11.36<15 (case of braced columns)

b 0.35
Thus no additional moments are induced in the out-of-plane direction
Buckling analysis in the in-plane direction
• The height of the column is measured from the bottom of the beam to the
base (Ho), as shown in Figure above.

H0 zh-*-*- = 10.7-— = 10.1m

2 2
• Since the column is unbraced in this direction, the effective length factor k
can be obtained from Table 8.4. The top part of the column is considered
case 1, and the bottom part is considered case 3 (isolated footing with no
semelle). Thus k=1.6, and the effective length He equals

He = k x H 0 =1.6x10.1 = 16.16 m

458
 • The slenderness ratio X is calculated using the average column thickness not
the actual section width, thus X equals

A = ! L m ™ * mlA.7

Since X greater than 10, the column is considered long and additional moment
calculation is required.

X' xt 14.72 x 1.1

s =----- »*. = 0.119 m
2000 2000

emk = 0.05 x tmg = 0.05 x 1.1 = 0.055 m < 8

Thus the lateral deflection due to buckling is larger than the code minimum
eccentricity. The column is subjected to axial force of Pu=937.5 kN and the additional
moment equals
Mau =Pux S = 937.5x 0.119 = 111.3 M.m

= M„ + M„„,, = 1364.9 + 111.3 = 1476.2 M m

1364.9 111.3 1476.2

Original moment (Mu) Additional moment (Madd) Total moment (M,ot}

937.5x1000
= 0.074
f cux b x t 30x350x1200

1476.2 xlO6
= 0.098
feu x b x t2 ~ 30x350xl2003
The factor C, equals
t-2 x c o v e r 1200 - 2 x 70
C — -------------------------------------------- —O.o7
t 1200
Using interaction diagram with_/J,=360N/mm2, a=0.4, and

459
At ^=0.8 p=3.0
At ^=0.9 p=2.5
using interpolation for £=0.87 gives p=2.65
V = p x f cu xlO"4 = 2.65x30x10"' =0.00795

As = /u xb xt = 0.00795 x 350x 1 200 = 3339 mm2 (8<D25, 3927 mm2)

A's = a- As =0.4x3339 = 1336 mm2 (4<P22, 1520mm2)

Asjottii = 4 + 4 = 3927 +1520 = 5447 mm2

Since the column is long the minimum reinforcement ratio is
Am in =0.25 + 0.052 A = 0.25+ 0.052x14.7 = 1.014%
Asmjn = p mjn x b x t = 0.01014x350x1200 = 4258 mm2 < ASJOt.....o k

Step 3.6: Design of section 6 (350x1200)

Section 6 is a rectangular section and is subjected to the following straining actions
Mu= 1479.9 kN.m Pu= 316.1 kN
If Pu/fcu b t is less than 0.04, the normal force can be neglected

— 5 ---- = 316.1x1000 _ q 0 2 5 < 0.04.......... neglect normal force

f ^ x b x t 30x350x1200 6

The design will be carried out as if the section is subjected to moment only.
To use the R-co, calculate R

,=-.. J . „ - = - ^ 1 0 6 o ,„o 3
f cu x b x d 30x350x1130

From the chart with R=0.1103, the reinforcement index oj=0.148

f 30
A. = a > x ^ -x b x d = 0.148x--—x350xl 130 = 4877 mm2
fy 360

d = °'225^ x350x i 130 = 1354 mm2 J< A , oJc

-smaller of fy 360
1.3/1. =1.3 x 4877 = 6341 mm 2

460
Step 3.7: Design of section 7 (350x900)
This section is subjected to pure compression (P„= 937.5 kN). From the detailing of
the frame the section will be reinforced with 4<J>25 and 4022
Asc =4x491 + 4x380 = 3484 mm2
The minimum percentage of reinforcement |i. for this long column is 1.01% (refer to
step 3.5)

4™. = — x 6 xf = — x350 x 900 = 3194/wk2<Asc.......o.k

100 10 0

Pu = 0.35 x f m X Ac + 0.67 x f y x Asc

P“ = T()5o ^ ° 3 5 * 3 0 x (35° x 900) + 0.67x360x3484) = 4147 kN > (937.5).....ok

A S=4<J>25 A 's=4<t>22

4<t>12
900 mm

Step 3.8: Design of section 8 (350x1200)

This is a column section and the procedure of calculations is similar to those presented
in section 5. (M„=1020.5 , Pu=937.5 kN)-»-^=6<D25

Step 4: Design for shear

The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support

= 595.82 kN

Qu 595.82x1000
= 1.506 N/tnm:
g“ b x d 350x1130
The applied shear qu should be less than the maximum shear stress qUi,

9 .« =
£ =0.70 = 3.13 N I mm2...>qu(1.506)...o.k

The presence of the tension force (P„=71.8 kN) decrease the concrete shear capacity of
the frame by amount of 8 t where

461
S, = 1-0.3 x — = 1 -0.3x 7 1 , 8 xl00-° = 0.949
A„ 350x1200

q = <5; x 0.24.p a- = 0.949x 0.24,/— = 1.019N /m m 2

Hcu ' M1.5 V1.5
Since > 3 %, the frame has to be provided with special reinforcement for shear.

= 1 - 5 0 6 = 0.997 W/ mm 2
Vs“ *“ 2 2
Assume that steel yield strength of the stirrups is 360 N/mm2. Try two branches of
stirrups with 10 mm in diameter (78.5 mm2)
A„ =2x78.5 = 157 mm2
The required stirrup spacing can be obtained using the following
fy s,
s x tf*« = xJ1.15
OZTA
0.997 x 350 = 157 x —
j x ->->■ s=142.8 mm.
1.15
Use 7 0 10/m' (s=142 mm). This amount is greater than the minimum given by

st,Tmn
=y^ - x b xs = -^-x350xl42
360 = 55.2 mm2 <^4 (157 mm2)..oJc

Note: For the middle third part of the girder and columns where the shear force is
small, an amount of 5 0 10 /m' is used. At the intersection of the column and the
footing the stirrups is increased to 1 0 O 1 0 /m'.

462
 2025

463
Reinforcement Detailing
 6016 14025

E
<0 CM cm •o CM 2012
2*812
<o 1CM i
CM
2«*12 20 1 2
5# 10/m 7010/m
2#12 2012
1200
12025 4025
Sec. 1-1
350

Sec. 2-2

6025 E
CM 04 o CM
i
<N icm in
I iCM
2012
5 0 1 0 /m
2s«12

350 2016 1200

Sec. 5-5
Sec. 4-4
14025

2012

£
2012 CM CM S CM
1200

7010/m i
CM
i *
CM 10 CM
2012

4025

350 1200

Sec. 6-6 Sec. 7-7 Sec. 8-8

Reinforcement Detailing of the Frame (Continued)

464
 APPENDIX A

Design Charts for Sections

Subjected to Flexure

465
Area of Steel Bars in cm 2 (used in Egypt)

<D Weight Cross sectional area (cm2)

mm kg/m' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6 0.222 0.28 0.57 0.85 1.13 1.41 1.70 1.98 2.26 2.54 2.83 3.11 3.39

8 0.395 0.50 1.01 1.51 2.01 2.51 3.02 3.52 4.02 4.52 5.03 5.53 6.03

10 0.617 0.79 1.57 2.36 3.14 3.93 4.71 5.50 6.28 7.07 7.85 8.64 9.42

12 0.888 1.13 2.26 3.39 4.52 5.65 6.79 7.92 9.05 10.18 11.31 12.44 13.57

14 1.208 1.54 3.08 4.62 6.16 7.70 9.24 10.78 12.32 13.85 15.39 16.93 18.47

16 1.578 2.01 4.02 6.03 8.04 10.05 12.06 14.07 16.08 18.10 20.11 22.12 24.13

18 1.998 2.54 5.09 7.63 10.18 12.72 15.27 17.81 20.36 22.90 25.45 27.99 30.54

20 2.466 3.14 6.28 9.42 12.57 15.71 18.85 21.99 25.13 28.27 31.42 34.56 37.70

22 2.984 3.80 7.60 11.40 15.21 19.01 22.81 26.61 30.41 34.21 38.01 41.81 45.62

25 3.853 4.91 9.82 14.73 19.63 24.54 29.45 34.36 39.27 44.18 49.09 54.00 58.90

28 4.834 6.16 12.32 18.47 24.63 30.79 36.95, 43.10 49.26 55.42 61.58 67.73 73.89

32 6.313 8.04 16.08 24.13 32.17 40.21 48.25 56.30 64.34 72.38 80.42 88.47 96.51

38 8.903 11.34 22.68 34.02 45.36 56.71 68.05 79.39 90.73 102.1 113.4 124.8 136.1

Area of Other Steel Bars in cm 2

Weight Cross sectional area (cm2)

mm kg/m' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6 0.222 0.28 0.57 0.85 1.13 1.41 1.70 1.98 2.26 2.54 2.83 3.11 3.39

8 0.395 0.50 1.01 1.51 2.01 2.51 3.02 3.52 4.02 4.52 5.03 5.53 6.03

10 0.617 0.79 1.57 2.36 3.14 3.93 4.71 5.50 6.28 7.07 7.85 8.64 9.42

13 1.042 1.33 2.65 3.98 5.31 6.64 7.96 9.29 10.62 11.95 13.27 14.60 15.93

16 1.578 2.01 4.02 6.03 8.04 10.05 12.06 14.07 16.08 18.10 20.11 22.12 24.13

19 2.226 2.84 5.67 8.51 11.34 14.18 17.01 19.85 22.68 25.52 28.35 31.19 34.02

22 2.984 3.80 7.60 11.40 15.21 19.01 22.81 26.61 30.41 34.21 38.01 41.81 45.62

25 3.853 4.91 9.82 14.73 19.63 24.54 29.45 34.36 39.27 44.18 49.09 54.00 58.90

28 4.834 6.16 12.32 18.47 24.63 30.79 36.95 43.10 49.26 55.42 61.58 67.73 73.89

32 6.313 8.04 16.08 24.13 32.17 40.21 48.25 56.30 64.34 72.38 80.42 88.47 96.5

38 8.903 11.34 22.68 34.02 45.36 56.71 68.05 79.39 90.73 102.1 113.4 124.8 136.1

466
Area of Steel Bars in mm 2 (used in Egypt)
0 Weight Cross sectional area (mm2)

mm kg/m' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6 0.222 28.3 56.5 84.8 113 141 170 198 226 254 283 311 339

8 0.395 50.3 101 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503 553 603

10 0.617 78.5 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785 864 942

12 0.888 113 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1018 1131 1244 1357

14 1.208 154 308 462 616 770 924 1078 1232 1385 1539 1693 1847

16 1.578 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1810 2011 2212 2413

18 1.998 254 509 763 1018 1272 1527 1781 2036 2290 2545 2799 3054

20 2.466 314 628 942 1257 1571 1885 2199 2513 2827 3142 3456 3770

22 2.984 380 760 1140 1521 1901 2281 2661 3041 3421 3801 4181 4562

25 3.853 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909 5400 5890

28 4.834 616 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 6158 6773 7389

32 6.313 804 1608 2413 3217 4021 4825 5630 6434 7238 8042 8847 9651

38 8.903 1134 2268 3402 4536 5671 6805 7939 9073 10207 11341 12475 13609

Area of Other Steel Bars in mm 2

<
£> Weight Cross sectional area (mm2)

mm kg/m' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6 0.222 28.3 56.5 84.8 113.1 141.4 170 198 226 254 283 311 339

8 0.395 50.3 100.5 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503 553 603

10 0.617 79 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785 864 942

13 1.042 133 265 398 531 664 796 929 1062 1195 1327 1460 1593

16 1.578 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1810 2011 2212 2413

19 2.226 284 567 851 1134 1418 1701 1985 2268 2552 2835 3119 3402

22 2.984 380 760 1140 1521 1901 2281 2661 3041 3421 3801 4181 4562

25 3.853 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909 5400 5890

28 4.834 616 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 6158 6773 7389

32 6.313 804 1608 2413 3217 4021 4& 5 5630 6434 7238 8042 8847 9651

38 8.903 1134 2268 3402 4536 5671 6805 7939 9073 10207 11341 12475 13609

467
Values of a and p for solid slab with live loads less than 5 kN/m2

r 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2

a 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
P 0.35 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08

a and p values for two-way hollow block slabs (Marcus values)

r 1 .0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1 .4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1 .8 1 .9 2 .0

a 0 .3 9 6 0 .4 7 3 0 .5 4 3 0 .6 0 6 0 .6 6 0 0 .7 0 6 0 .7 4 6 0 .7 7 8 0 .8 0 6 0 .8 3 0 0 .8 4 9

P 0 .3 9 6 0 .3 3 3 0 .2 6 2 0 .2 1 2 0 .1 7 2 0 .1 4 0 0 .1 1 3 0 .0 9 3 0 .0 7 7 0 .0 6 3 0 .0 5 3

a and p values for paneled beam slabs (Grashoff s values)

r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

a 0.500 0.595 0.672 0.742 0.797 0.834 0.867 0.893 0.914 0.928 0.941

P 0.500 0.405 0.328 0.258 0.203 0.166 0.133 0.107 0.086 0.072 0.059

Coefficients of equivalent uniform loads on beams

L /l x 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

a 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.853 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917

P 0.500 0.554 0.582 0.615 0.642 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750

468
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design o f Reinforced Concrete Structures

0
z
a
z
ui
oa
in
_j
a.
£
<0
o
H
O
UI
H
O
UI T1“
“» tr
CQ
D 9
to JO
(0 H(8
z
o
H
o
UI
(0
K
O
u.
H
K
<
X
o
z
©
(0
lU
Q

469
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

470
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

471
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

0.50

472
 APPENDIX

Interaction Diagrams
(Top and bottom steel)

473
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

(Top and Bottom Steel)

M„
feu x bxt
M= P f cu* 10"
As =fi xbx t

A's =axAs
d -d '

474
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

475
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

(Top and Bottom Steel)
f c u * b x t

M.

476
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

477
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

478
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

479
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

(Top and Bottom Steel)

M ..

M=Pfc«xW
= ju xbx t

4 ' = axAs
^ d~d'

480
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

(Top and Bottom Steel)
f mxbxt

M..
f cux b x r

= P feu Xl O'
A s = (i xbx. t

A' =a x As

481
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

(Top and Bottom Steel)

A'
0.67 f a, fc«*bXt
SL Cs ft —P feux I®
Mu
r I e |a As = x6x t
i
ct
i A's —a x As
i
1 . 1»j»
f

482
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

483
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

P = P / „ x lO '

A s = ju x b x t

A' =a x As

r _ d-d'

484
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

485
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R ecta ngular Se ction s

(T o p and Bottom Stee l)
fa, x b x t

486
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R ecta ngular Sectio ns

(T o p and Bottom Stee l)
f mxbxt

H = p f c u XlO"

As = /j. xbx t

A'. = a x A .

d-d'
f =-

487
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R ectangular Sections

(T o p and Bottom Stee l)
fcu*l>Xt

fa,xbxr
M= P fa, XlO-
As - xbx t
A' =axAs
d-d'

488
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R e cta n g u la r S e ctio n s

(T o p and Bo tto m S te e l)

#■

f„=280 N/mnrr %
i=0.80
:0.90

&

1.5C

2.OC
3.0C

0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3 0.32

489
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

490
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R e cta ng ular S e ction s

(T o p and B ottom S te e l)
f cux b x t

f a xbxt*

491
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R ectangular Sectio ns

(T o p and Bottom Steel)

f c„x b xt
M= P f cux10“
As - n x b x t

A',=axA,

492
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

493
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R ectangular Sections

(T o p and Bottom Steel)
fcuxbxt

M„
feu

O'
As = fj. x6x t

A's = a x A s

d - d '
c=- t

494
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In te ra c tio n D ia g ra m fo r R e c ta n g u la r S e c tio n s
( T o p a n d B o tto m S te e l)

M.
f a, x b x t

M = P /< * x K T

As =n xbx t
A's =axA,
g _ d-d'

495
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In te raction Diagram fo r R ecta ngular S e ctio n s

(T o p and Bottom Steel)
f caxbxt

fcu^bxt

496
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

497
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

498
Ghoneim & Eimihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Inte ractio n Diagram for R e cta ng ular Se ctio n s

(T o p and B ottom S te e l)
f^b xt

A's Pu
f eu x b x t
M = P feu xlO'
As = n xbx t
A's = a x A s

C =- —

499
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R ectangular Sections

(T o p and Bottom Steel)
f^b xt

fcuxbxt2

500
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In te ra c tio n D ia g ra m fo r R e c ta n g u la r S e c tio n s
(T o p and B o tto m S te e l)

A's M.
Pu
feu xbxt
M= Pfcu xlO'
As = n x b x t

A's = a x A s

r _ d-d'

501
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R ectangular Sectio ns

(T o p and Bottom Steel)

A's M ..
Pu
0.67 f„
- t- fcux b x *

Mu
d'i V Yc
Cs
M= P f aix 10_
As - /u x b x t
e
If Cc
A',=axAs
‘ c
t
d-d'
1 r• A

502
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

503
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In te ractio n Diagram fo r R e cta ng ular Se ctio n s

(T o p and Bottom S te e l)
f mxbxt

A's

fm xbxt
M= PfcuXl0~
As = f i x b x t

A's = a x As

r _ d-d'

504
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R e cta ngular Se ctio n s

(T o p and Bottom Steel)
f a, Xk Xt

A's Pu

fJ cu x b x t

505
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In te ractio n Diagram for R ectangular S e ction s

(T o p and Bottom Stee l)

A's Pu M.
f mx b x t 2
M= p f m x 10-4
As = n xbx t
A' =ax As
r _ d-d'

506
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

507
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R ectangular Sections

(T o p and Bottom Steel)
fc, xbxt

A's Pu
fa,xbXt

508
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R ectangular S e ction s

(T o p and Bottom Steel)

A's Pu

M= O'

As - n xbx-t
/I' =axAs
d-d'
<r=-
t

509
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

510
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

511
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram fo r R ectangular Sections

(T o p and Bottom Stee l)
fa ,

A's Mu
Pu
fmxbxt
ft = P f alxlO~
A,=ju xbx t
A[ =axAs
d-d'
<r=-

512
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

513
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R e cta ng ular S e ction s

(T o p and Bottom Steel)
f cux b x t

A's Pu M„

A, = fi xb x t
A' = a x A s
d-d'
£■= - t

514
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

515
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In te ractio n Diagram for R ecta ngular Sections

(T o p and Bottom S tee l)
f cux b x t

A's Pu

Mu

516
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R e cta ng ular S e ctio n s

(T o p and Bottom S tee l)
fcu x b x t

A's Pu M„
f cuxbx t
M = P f c u X l 0 ~

As = fx xbx t
A' =a x As
£•_ d - d 1

517
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

518
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

519
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In teraction Diagram for R e cta ng ular S e ctio n s

(T o p and Bottom Stee l)
fc»*bxt

A's Pu
f cux b x t 2
H = p f a xlO"
As = n xbx t
A' =axAs
d-d’
t

520
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R e cta ng ular S e ctio n s

(T o p and Bottom S tee l)
fcu*bxt

A's Pu
0-67 f n
-r
r. Cs
-!l
Mu
T " i*
Cc

1. As
d’l

521
 APPENDIX c

Interaction Diagrams
(Uniform steel)

522
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

523
Ghoneim & Eimihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

(Uniform Steel)

Pu
0.67 /„, f bt‘
Jcu
ASit0!D//4

e | a

Jl A s>tota/ 4
-T ,

524
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

525
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

P. (Uniform Steel)
fa,bt

1“ = P / « x10"'
As, m i = ft b t
d-d'

526
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

(Uniform Steel)

f br
Jcu

527
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

(Uniform Steel)
fa, bt

0.67
A s , to t a /4

e ja

a
I si J 2
11 -T,
As.tota/4

528
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R ectangular Sections

L,bt (Uniform Steel)

L,bt>

529
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R ectangular Sections

L ,bt (Uniform Steel)

Pu 0-67/„
A s ,lo ta /4

T
a

il -T,
A i.to ta /4

530
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections

f a, b t ____________ (Uniform Steel)____________

Pu 0.67 / „
AS;tQla/4 /-A *2

Xmrvrm
|—
e ~ |a
M = Pfc,.x 10“
a r
-T 2 d !Ma, = Mb t
i
ii -« U - -T ,
A ;,to ta /4 d-d'
<==-

531
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

532
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for R ectangular Sections

fa.bt (Uniform Steel)

M.

533
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

534
 APPENDIX D

Design Charts for Sections

Subjected to Eccentric Forces

535
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

536
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections

r t q

537
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

M ..

L,bt2 Eccentric Sections

0.40

A's

538
 Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections
fm b t

■-----a A's

ct

539
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections
fiu b1

0.40

a>

As

540
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

M..
L .bt2
Eccentric Sections

CO

A's

As

541
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections

0.40

542
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

M.
Eccentric Sections
fcu b ‘

• M As

543
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Stru

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections
feu b ‘

0.40

544
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections
f btl
J cu

A'

ct

■ » As

545
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections
feu bt

0.40

Q-

As

546
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections

A ’s

As

547
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

M ..
Ultimate Limit Design Chart for
fa.br Eccentric Sections

0.40

A'*

As

548
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

f„ b t Eccentric Sections

O O O

A's
a

n i

549
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

/ „ bt
Eccentric Sections

0.40

A's

As

550
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections
fat b ‘

A '.

Ct

As

551
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

0.40

552
Ghoneim & Elmihitmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

M.
Eccentric Sections

A's

Ct

As

553
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections
feu bt

0.40

Mu

■• ■

554
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

■— * - . Eccentric Sections
L»bt2

©
■ " «

t Q.

1 b

555
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections

0.38

A's

556
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections

As

557
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

Eccentric Sections
fa, b *

0.40

O O O O O O
G>
A*

As

558
3honeim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Ultimate Limit Design Chart for

- ~ r Eccentric Sections
f o bt

f
A
f,
4 = a As

559
 APPENDIX

Interaction Diagrams
for Circular Sections

560
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

561
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

562
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

563
Ghoneim & Eimihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for C ircu la r Sections

0 -6 7 f a ,

7c
IX
II

t4

__ _ t3 A sjo,ci
t2
--- - T,

564
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

565
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

566
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

567
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

568
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

In te ra c tio n D ia g ra m fo r C irc u la r S e c tio n s

L,

0.67 / „
L , rS

. T„
P fcuXW~4
. T3
t2 K ia < a i = V nr1
T,

569
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

570
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

p„ Interaction Diagram for Circular Sections

P“- f - 0-67 fa,

571
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Circular Sections

fJ cu r2

P„-4- M.
f 0 -6 7 fcu
fa, r
<? = -
r
t* = P fcuXM'*
- T4 A jC a l = f l i t r 2
. t3
t2
: t,

572
I
APPENDIX F

Interaction Diagrams
for Hollow Circular Sections

573
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structun

Interaction Diagram for

Hollow Circular Sections
Jf cu x Ac

M„
fc„ * AcXr

574
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for

Hollow Circular Sections
fm x

fv f- 0.67 f a

< r= -
r
M= P / „ X W 4

Ac = n ( r 2 - r 2)
■t 3
. t2 A,o,ai=M
•T,

575
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for

p« Hollow Circular Sections

576
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for

Hollow Circular Sections
feu* A

P.-+- 0-67 /«. fruXA Xr

r
M = pfc xlO-4

Ac = ir (r 2 —r 2)
■T,
. T2 A<ot„i = M x 4
' T,

577
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for

Hollow Circular Sections
/„, *Ac

- V f - 0-67 /„
fc,xAcXr
S = r~
r
M= P f a x 10-4
Ac =?t (r 2 - r f )
t3
. t2 K o t„ l = V x A c
T,

578
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for

p- Hollow Circular Sections
feu X A,

579
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for

Hollow Circular Sections
fc„xAc

f = -r
H = p f a x lO -4

Ac = 7I (r2 —r?)

Auo«,<= H xA c

580
 APPENDIX G

Interaction Diagrams
for Box Sections
 Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Box S ections

P u - i- As,to£a1/8
\
As,tota!/8
i
Mu r>
j M
X \ ! ah/- A c = n e t area o f th e concrete
y c
i
t a C = (d~ d')lt
vs /l
A\ % \As,tota1/8 M= p x f c»xW~4
As,tofc 1/8 y
>i
/ii
•
•
• *
• I • • Nu
\V K As.total/8 ^ s jo lti ~ M

A srtotaI/8
1 b ..

582

si •
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Box S ection s

-r P u - i- As,total/8 M.
As,totai/8 fen AC*
Mu' ft
/
\ | ab/£
c
I / Ac - net area of the concrete
t
/ K £ = (d-d')/t
As, toti
\A s,total/8
y / \ ax\ \ M= P *fcuxlQ~4
As,tofc
'* V"
* * .« , m}.• » > As,total/8 sjotal :M AC
i,tola 1/8

583
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Box Sections

fa , A c

Ac = n et area o f the concrete

C = (d-d')/t

M= p x fc u * l(yA
s Jotal =m A

584
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

Interaction Diagram for Box Section s

As,total/8 Mu
Pu-*-
I As,total/8 fc Ac *
i
Mu
’A
'V ja b ^ Ac = net area o f the concrete
$
a
/ C = ( d - d ') lt
As,tot 1/8 7» "i\ vAs,tota1/8
As.toti 1/8 y/ ja
• «
t \ K As.total/8
'!ift “IT"
M = P x f cu x l O ~

As Joml ~ M Ac
As,total/8
As,total/8
i . b J

585
 APPENDIX H

Interaction Diagrams
for Biaxially Loaded Sections
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

587
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

588
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

589
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

590
Ghoneim & Eimihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

591
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

592
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

593
| Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

594
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

595
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

596
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

597
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

598
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

599
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

600
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

INTERACTION DIAGRAMS FOR BIAXIALLY

m ,.n LOADED SECTIONS

601
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

603
 Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

j;-
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

605
Ghonein.»>—
miMiuniy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

606
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

607
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

608
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

609
i
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

610
Ghoneim & Eimihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

611
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

612
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

613
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

614
 APPENDIX

Interaction Diagrams
for L-Sections

615
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

616
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

O w. . . . . . . • O
O O O O ' O O O O o o o o o o o o

617
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

£1 o
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

610
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

620
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
 Units Conversion Table

To transform from To Multiply by

SI-units French -units factor
Concentrated loads
IN kg 0.1
1 kN kg 100
1 kN ton 0.1
Linear Loads lm '
1'kN/m' t/m' 0.1
Uniform Loads lm 2
kN/m" t/m2 0.1
N/mr kg/m" 0.1
kN/m" kg/m2 100
Stress
N/mm2 (=1 MPa) kg/cm2 10
kN/m" kg/cm2 0.01
kN/m7 ton/m2 0.1
Density
N/mJ kg/mJ 0.1
kN/mJ ton/mJ 0.1
kN/mJ kg/mJ 100
Moment
kN.m ton.m 0.1
N.mm kg. cm 0.01
Area
m2 cm2 10000
mm2 cm2 0.01

622
REFERENCES

623
ACI Committee 318, "Building Code Requirements fo r Reinforced Concrete
(AC I318-02)," American Concrete Institute, Detroit, 2002.

Alexander, S., and Simmonds, S., “Tests o f Column-Flat Plate Connections”,

ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 5, Sept.-Oct. 1992, pp. 495-502.

Ahmed S., Shah S., “ Stress-Strain Curves o f Concrete Confined by Spiral

Reinforcement", ACI Journal Proceedings, Vol. 79, No. 6, November-
December 1982, pp. 484-490.

Amin Ghali, and Rene Favre, “Concrete Structures: Stresses and

Deformations'’, Chapman & Hall, New York, 1986, 348 pp.

Arthur H. Nilson, “Design o f Concrete Structures”, Twelfth Edition, McGraw

Hill, 1997, 780 pp.

Bazant, Z., Cedolin, L. and Tabbara, M., “New Method o f Analysis fo r Slender
Columns”, ACI Structural Journal Vol. 88, No. 4, pp. 391-401, July-August
1991.

Claeson, C. and Gyltoft, K., “Slender Concrete Columns Subjected to Sustained

and Short-Term Eccentric Loads”, ACI Structural Journal Vol. 97, No. 4, pp.
591-601, July-August 2000.

Chester Siess and Nathan NewMark, “Rational Analysis and Design o f Two-
Way Concrete Slabs”, ACI Journal Proceedings , Vol. 45,1949, pp. 273-315.

Corley W. G., and Jirsa J. D., “ Equivalent Frame Analysis fo r Slab Design",
Journal of the American Concrete Institute, Vol. 67, No. 11 , November 1970,
pp. 875-884.

CSA Committee A23.3, “Design o f Concrete Structures fo r Buildings, ” CAN3-

a23.3-M84 Canadian Standards Association, Rexdale, Canada, 1994, 199 pp.

Denis Mitchell and William D. Cook, “Preventing Progressive Collapse o f Slab

Structures”, Proceedings ASCE, Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 110,
No. ST7, July 1984, pp. 1513-1532.

ECCS 203-2001, “The Egyptian Code fo r the Design and Construction of

Reinforced Concrete Structures ”, Housing and Building Research Center, G iza,:
Egypt.

624
 Eurocode 2, “Design o f Concrete Structures-Part 1: General Rules and Rules
fo r Buildings (EC-2)" European Prestandard ’ ENV 1992-1-1:1991, Comte
European de Normalisation, Brussels, 253 pp.

Gardner N., and Shao X., “Punching Shear o f Continuous Flat Reinforced
Concrete Slabs”, ACI Structural Journal, V. 93, No. 2, March-April 1996, pp.
218-228.

Hawkins N., “Shear Strength o f Slabs with Shear Reinforcement’', Shear in

Reinforced Concrete, SP-42, V. 2, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, 1974,
•pp. 785-815.

James G. MacGregor, “Reinforced Concrete - Mechanics & Design", Prentice

Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Second edition, 1992, 848 pp.

Kenneth Leet, and Dionisio Bernal, “ Reinforced Concrete Design”, Mc-Graw

Hill, New York, 1997, 546 pp.

Mohamed Hilal, “Design o f Reinforced Concrete Halls”, Marcou & Co, 1987,
364 pp.

Mahmoud El-Mihilmy, ‘‘Toward A Rational Design o f RC Sections Subjected

to Tension Failure”, Journal of the Egyptian Society of Engineers, V. 40, No. 2,
April 2001, pp. 17-24.

Mahmoud El-Mihilmy, “Design o f Biaxially Loaded Reinforced Concrete

Sections with Unsymmetrical Reinforcement”, Journal of Engineering and
Applied Science, Cairo University, V. 48, No. 4, August 2001, pp. 637-653.

Mahmoud El-mihilmy, “ Refined Analysis o f Slender Reinforced Concrete

Columns”, Journal o f Engineering and Applied Science, Cairo University, Vol.
51, No. 2,2004.

Mahmoud El-Mihilmy, Mashhour Ghoneim, and Heba A., “A Simplified Strut

and Tie Model For Slab-Column Connections ”, Engineering Research Journal,
University of Helwan, Vol.93 , pp. C63-C82, 2004.

Mashhour Ghoneim and James MacGregor “Behavior o f Reinforced Concrete

Plates under Combined Inplane and Lateral Loads”, ACI Structural Journal, V-.
91 No. 2, Mar. - Apr. 1994, pp 188-197.

Mashhour Ghoneim and James MacGregor “Prediction o f the Ultimate Strength

o f Reinforced Concrete Plates under Combined Inplane and Lateral Loads”,
ACI Structural Journal, V. 91 No. 6, V. 91 No. 1, Nov. - Dec. 1994, pp 688-
996.

625
M a s h h o u r G h o n e i m , “ Strength
o f High-Strength Concrete Slender Columns
Under Eccentric Compression Loads ” , J o u r n a l o f E n g i n e e r i n g a n d A p p li e d
S c i e n c e , F a c u l t y o f E n g in e e r i n g , C a ir o U n i v e r s i ty , V o l. 4 9 , N o . 6 , D e c . 2 0 0 2 ,
p p . 1 1 5 7 -1 1 7 6 . •

M c H a r g , P . , C o o k , D ., M i t c h e ll , D . a n d Y o o n Y ., “Benefits o f Concentrated
Slab Reinforcement and Steel Fibers on Performance o f Slab-Column
Connections”, A C I S t r u c tu r a l J o u r n a l, V . 9 7 , N o . 2 , M a r c h - A p r i l , 2 0 0 0 , p p .
2 2 5 -2 3 4 .

PCA , “N otes on A C I 318-95:Building Code Requirements F or Structural

Concrete With Design Applications”, S k o k ie , I l li n o is , 1 9 9 6 , 8 1 8 p p .

R o b e rt P a rk an d T h o m as P a u la y , “ Reinforced Concrete Structures”, A W i le y -

I n te rs c ie n c e P u b lic a tio n , W ile y , N e w Y o rk , 1 9 7 5 , 7 6 9 p p .

S a y e d S h e r i f , M a s h h o u r G h o n e i m ., A s h r a f E l- Z a n a t y , a n d S h a d i a E L - I b i a r i,
“Behavior o f High-Strength Concrete Circular Columns Confined with Spirals
and H oops under Axial Loads- P art (1) Experimental Results”, S c i e n ti f ic
B u l l e t i n , F a c u l t y o f E n g in e e r i n g , A i n S h a m s U n i v e r s i t y , V o l. 3 4 , N o . 3 , S e p t.
1 9 9 9 , p p . 1 -1 2 .

S h e i k h S . A ., a n d Y e h C ., “Tied Concrete Columns Under Axial load and

Flexure”, J o u r n a l o f S tr u c tu r a l E n g in e e r i n g - A S C E , V o l. 1 1 6 , N o . 1 0 , p p . 2 7 8 0 -
2 8 0 0 , O c to b e r 19 9 0 .

S t e p h e n P . T i m o s h e n k o a n d J .N . G o o d i e r , “ Theory o f P lates and Shells”, M c ­

G r a w - H i ll , 1 9 6 4 , 3 6 4 p p .

B r o n d i e m - N i e l s o n , “Ultimate Limit States o f Cracked arbitrary

T o rie s
Concrete Sections under Axial L oad and Bending”, C o n c r e t e I n te r n a ti o n a l :
D e s i g n a n d C o n s t r u c t i o n , V o l. 4 , N o . 1 1 , N o v e m b e r 1 9 8 2 , p p . 5 1 - 5 5 .

T s a o W . , a n d H s u T ., “ Behavior o f Biaxailly loaded Square and L-Shaped

Slender Reinforced Concrete Columns” , M a g a z i n e o f C o n c r e t e R e s e a r c h , V o l.
4 6 , N o . 169, D e c 1994, p p . 2 5 7 -2 6 7 .

Y a m a d a T ., N a n n i A ., a n d E n d o K ., “Punching Shear Resistance o f Flat Slabs:

Influence o f reinforcement type and Ratio”, A C I S t r u c t u r a l J o u r n a l , V . 8 8 , N o .
4 , S e p t .- O c t . , 1 9 9 2 , p p . 5 5 5 - 5 6 3 .
 __ j £ __l l a fiJitc-j j l t—S JJj3 j i (JjuUjSI J j j i a J l ^ J .a >

<£LJI (jaji jS3 tq^lo A_i j <Sp. Luudl UJlSu^-ttJl

j jjij j\ £ i l a ©Jllc-I j ! 4_SJ^)laJ 4 j j L q J\ V

--jll j! £-1JJU] dul£ AJajjJJ (_jU QA <^3^ L$'

lsP$> (jij Oj^1 6 ^

p.Li. L q J c . j ^-2kl j j S U ejjjjU-o l^Jl AjU^ll J ] pi^)E3l (jlil^a]! jC-JU

aL jjI^aIi ( J ^ a . j^j-a L-jia^iu

Rconcrete @ iink.net

Y * * £/Y *\° £ :Ajjj.^JI t_u£ll jIjij ^sj

Jjlill J <C-Lilalj A^J jjU ^lla

Y * *£ >
ito I AjlaUI
Y %*V ^ -a fl:3 jj\jJI AjiaLJ)
^2JJ& <Q>

£jA liii AjwIa — <jjjJ1^1I 4_J£ 4 \

&a (jC ^aJJ

627
 About the Authors

Professor Dr. M ashhour Ghoneim: is a Professor o f Concrete Structures at

Cairo University. He obtained his Ph.D. in Structural Engineering from the
University o f Alberta, Canada. He participated in the development o f the
shear and torsion design provisions o f the American Concrete Institute Code
(ACI 318). He supervised several researches for the degrees o f M.Sc. and
Ph.D. related to the behavior and stability o f reinforced concrete members,
particularly under seismic actions. He is the author of many technical papers
in reinforced concrete.

Professor Ghoneim is a member o f several professional committees

including the Standing Committee for the Egyptian Code for Design and
Construction o f Concrete Structures, the Standing Committee for the
Egyptian Code for the Use o f FRP in Construction Fields, the Standing
Committee for the Egyptian Code for Design and Planning o f Bridges and
Intersections and the Committee for the Egyptian Code for Masonry Works.

He participated in the design o f many projects in Egypt and abroad. Some of

the most notable o f these projects are: the Library o f Alexandria (the
Bibliotheca Alexandrina), the bridge over Suez Canal, City Stars Complex in
Cairo, San Stefano Grand Plaza in Alexandria and the Quay Walls o f North
Al-Sukhna port and Port Said East Port.

Dr. M ahm oud T. El-Mihilmy: is an Associate Professor in the Department

o f Structural Engineering at Cairo University. He holds two bachelor
degrees, one in Architectural Engineering and another in Structural
Engineering from Cairo University. He also has two Masters degrees in
Architectural and Structural Engineering. Finally, he obtained his Ph.D.
from Auburn University, USA, in Structural Engineering.

Dr. El-Mihilmy teaches undergraduate and graduate courses in the design of

reinforced and prestressed concrete structures. He published numerous
technical papers in respected journals worldwide. He is a member in the
ACI, ASCE as well as the Egyptian Society o f Engineers. He has served on
many professional committees including the Egyptian Code for Design and
Construction o f Concrete Structures for the Development o f Design Aids as
well as the Egyptian Code for the Use of FRP in Construction Fields.

He was engaged in the design o f a number o f large-scale projects both on the

international and national levels such as MGM-Hotel in Las Vegas, USA,
and Conrad Hotel in Cairo. Finally, He was awarded the Ahmed Moharem
Prize 2005 in Structural Engineering.

628
 DESIGN OF REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Prof. Mashhour Ghoneim Dr. Mahmoud El-Mihilmy

Features
Good theoretical background for each topic with code provisions.
Numerous illustrations and figures for each topic.
Reflects the very latest Egyptian Code provisions (ECP 203-2007)
and includes all major changes and additions.
Extensive examples in each chapter on design and analysis of
reinforced concrete structures utilizing SI units.
All examples are worked out step by step ranging from simple to
advanced.
Full reinforcement details for every example.
Numerous design charts covering a wide range of cross sectional
shapes and straining actions.

This volume covers the following topics

Solid Slabs
Hollow Blocks
Paneled Beams
Flat Slabs
Stairs
Short Columns
Eccentric Sections
Slender Columns
R/C Frames

V olum e 2